IIT-JEE Advanced Book No-401

Physics
Classwork-Problem
Sahitya Roy,B.Tech-IIT Kgp
Saptarshi Das,IIT-Madras
Debsadhan Chaudhury,B.Tech,CU

JEE Advanced
 Index
Sl No Topic Page No Remark
1 Unit & Dimension 1 -3
2 Basic Mathematics 4 -4
3 Vector 5 -5
4 1D Motion 6 -12
5 Relative Velocity 13 -17
6 Projectile Motion 18 -21
7 Circular Motion 22 -22
8 Newton’s Law 23 -32
9 Friction 33 -37
10 Circular Dynamics 38 -39
11 Work Power Energy 40 -49
12 Momentum 50 -58
13 Rotational Dynamics 59 -71
14 Gravitation 72 -75
15 Fluid Mechanics 76 -80
16 Propertiesof Solids & Fluid 81 -84
17 Expansion & Calorimetry 85 -88
18 Transmission of Heat 89 -91
19 Kinetic Theory of Gas 91 -93
20 Thermodynamics 93 -99
21 S HM 100 -104
22-24 Wav e 105 -113
25 Wave Optics 114 -120
26 Geometrical Optics 121 -137
27 Electrostatic field 138 -145
28 Gauss law 146 -148
29 Electrostatic Potential 149 -154
30 Capacitance 155 -161
31 Current Electricity 162 -174
32 Magnetic Effect of Current 175 -186
33 EMI 187 -198
34-35 Inductance & AC 199 -204
36 Modern Physics 205 -213
physics Classwork Problem

1. Unit & Dimension

1. Obtain the dimensions of acceleration.
2. Check dimensional correctness of Fs  1 mv 2  1 mv02
2 2
3. If 1 hp is 746 watt, comment on the statement "1 hp is 550 ft-lb/s".

4. If velocity of light in air ( 3  108 ms -1 ), acceleration due to gravity ( 9.8 ms-2 ) and density of mercury at 0
°C (13600 kgm-3 ) be chosen as fundamental units, find the unit of mass, length and time.
5. The time period ( T ) of a simple pendulum depends upon the length of the thread ( l ), mass of bob ( m
), acceleration due to gravity (g) and the angle of swing ( ). Find the relation of t with other physical
quantities.

6. The length of a rod as measured in an experiment is recorded as 2.50 m, 2.54 m, 2.49 m, 2.58 m,2.49 m,
2.57 m respectively. Find the mean/true length, absolute error in each case, mean absolute error and the
percentage error.
7. If V   50  2 V and I   5  0.1 A then find the percentage error in measuring the resistance. Also
find the resistance with limits of error.
8. Least count of a vernier callipers is 0.01 cm. When the two jaws of the instrument touch each other the
5thdivision of the vernier scale coincide with a main scale division and the zero of the vernier scale lies to
the left of the zero of the main scale. Furthermore while measuring the diameter of a sphere, the zero mark
of the vernier scale lies between 2.4 cm and 2.5 cm and the 6th vernier division coincides with a main scale
division. Calculate the diameter of the sphere.
9. If 5 mm is the distance moved by the thimble on the main scale for 5 rotations then calculate the pitch.
10. The pitch of a screw gauge is 1 mm and there are 100divisions on circular scale. When faces A and B are
just touching each without putting anything between the studs 32nd division of the circular scale coincides
with the reference line. When a glass plate is placed between the studs, the linear scale reads 4 divisions
and the circular scale reads 16 divisions. Find the thickness of the glass plate. Zero of linear scale is not
hidden from circular scale when A and B touches each other.
11. The pitch of a screw gauge is 1 mm and there are 100 divisions on its circular scale. When nothing is put
in between its jaws, the zero of the circular scale lies 6 divisions below the reference line. When a wire is
placed between the jaws, 2 linear scale divisions are clearly visible while 62 divisions on circular scale
coincide with the reference line. Determine the diameter of the wire.

12. Read the normal screw gauge

*Main scale has only mm marks.
"Circular scale has 100 divisions
*ln complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm.

13. Read the screw gauge

*Main scale has 1 mm marks.
2
Circular scale has 50 division.
*In complete rotation, the screw advances by 1 mm
2

14. Read the screw gauge shown below:

*Main scale has 1 mm marks.
2
*Circular scale has 50 division.
*In complete rotation, the screw advances by mm.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 1

physics Classwork Problem
15. A wire of resistance R  100.0  and length I = 50.0 cm is put between the jaws of screw gauge. Its
reading is shown in figure. Find its resistivity in correct significant figures and maximum permissible error
in p (resistivity).
16. In a complete rotation, spindle of a screw gauge advances by 1 mm. There are 50 divisions on circular
2
scale. The main scale has 1 mm marks  (is graduated to 1 mm or has least count.= 1 mm)If a wire is
2 2 2
put between the jaws, 3 main scale divisions are clearly visible, and 20 division of circular scale co-inside
with the reference line. Find diameter of wire in correct S.F .
17. In the previous question if the mass of the wire is measured as 0.53 kg and length of the wire is
measured by an mm scale and is found to be 50.0 cm, find the density of the wire in correct significant
figures.

18. Find the thickness of the wire.

19. Find the thickness of the wire.

20. Read the vernier

21. Read the special type of Vernier

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 2

physics Classwork Problem

22. Find the thickness of the object using the defected vernier callipers

23. The main scale of a vernier callipers reads 10 mm in 10 divisions. 10 divisions of Vernier scale coincide
with 9 divisions of the main scale. When the two jaws of the callipers touch each other, the fifth division of
the vernier coincides with 9 main scale divisions and the zero of the vernier is to the right of zero of main
scale. When a cylinder is tightly placed between the two jaws, the zero of vernier scale lies slightly to the
left of 3.2 cm and the fourth vernier division coincides with a main scale division. The diameter of the
cylinder is.

24. In the previous question if the length of the cylinder is measured as 25 mm, and mass of the cylinder is
measured as 50.0 gm, find the density of the cylinder in proper significant figures.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 3

physics Classwork Problem

2. Basic Mathematics
1. Solve the following given equations
(a) 5 x  y  8 (b) 2 x  2 y  4
3
2. Given that sin 30   1 and cos30 

. Determine the values of sin 60  , sin120 , sin 240 sin 300 and
2 2
sin   30   .
 1 
3. Find the value of sin 1 1 4. Find the value of cos  1  .
2
2
5. If y  f  x   x  3 x  5 find f  0 and f 1
 x4
 ,x  4
6. Evaluate the left- and right-hand limits of the function f  x    x  4 at x  4
0, x4

1  x2 ,if 0  x  1
7.Evaluate the left- and the right-hand limits of the function defined by f  x   
2  x, if x  1
at x  1 . Also, show that lim f  x  does not exist.
x 1

e1/ x  1 x 3  x 2 log x  log x  1

8. Show lim 1/ x does not exist. 9. Evaluate lim
x 0 e 1 x 1 x2  1
3
10. Evaluate lim x  h  x 11. Evaluate lim x  x3  x x  3
h 0 h x 1 x 1
sin2 x  sin 2 y   1 
12.Evaluate lim 13. Solve lim  x  x 2  log  1   
x y x2  y 2 x 
  x 
14. Find from definition the derivatives of
1 cot x
(i) x 2 e x (ii) x sin x (iii) x 2 cos x (iv) (v) 3
cos x (vi) e
f  x
15.a. Find the derivative of y  3x2 15.b.. Find the derivative of y  x3  3x2
16.a. Find the derivative of y  sin  x 2  16.b. If y  sin x  cos x , then find dy
dx
1
17.a. Find the slope of the function y  sin x  2  3 log e x at x  
x 2
2
17.b. If y  x sin x ,find dy 18. If we have 2 y  y  x  x  9  0 , then calculate dy
2 3

dx dx
19. Consider a function y  sin x  cos x .Find the maximum value of the function .
20. The distance travelled by a body as a function of time is given by x  t 3  3t 2  6 where x is m and t is in
S find the maximum and minimum displacement of the body from the origin, Also, find the time at which it
occurs
21. Find the minimum and maximum values of the function y  x3  3x2  6 . Also find the values xat which
these occur.
22. Find the values of x,at which y  Asin x has minima and maxima. A is some positive- constant.
2

23. Find the rate of change in area of a square of side 4 cm when its side is increasing at the rate of 0.01 cm per
second

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 4

physics Classwork Problem

3. Vector
1. We can order events in time, and there is a sense of time, distinguishing past, present and future. Is time a vector?
2. The sum of magnitude of two forces acting at a point is 18 and the magnitude of their resultant is 12.If resultant is
at 90° with force of smaller magnitude, what are magnitudes of forces?
3. A particle undergoes three successive displacements in a plane. The first time it moves 4m south-west the second
time 5m east and third time 6 m in direction 60  north of east. Draw a vector diagram and determine total
displacement of particle from starting point.
4. Construct a vector of magnitude 6 unit making an angle of 30° with y -axis.

5. A bird moves with velocity of 20 ms 1 in the direction making angle 60° with eastern line and 60° with vertically
upward. Represent the velocity vector in rectangular form.
6. Four coplanar forces act on a body at point O as shown in diagram by use of rectangular component find direction
and magnitude of resultant force.
100 N
110 N

30o 45o x
20o O 80 N
160 N
7. A particle has the following displacements in succession: (i) 12 m towards east, (ii) 5 m towards north, and(iii) 6m
vertically upwards. Find the magnitude of the resultant displacement
z
y N
 6m
d

5m
E
12 m x

8. If the vectors 2iˆ  2 ˆj  2kˆ,5iˆ  yjˆ  kˆ and iˆ  2 ˆj  2kˆ are coplanar, then find the value of y .
9. Three vectors A, B and C are such that A  B  C and their magnitude are 5, 4, 3. Find angle between A & C

10. For what value of a are the vectors A  aiˆ  2 ˆj  kˆ and B  2aiˆ  ajˆ  4kˆ perpendicular to each other?

11. Find the component of a  2iˆ  3 ˆj along the direction of vector iˆ  ˆj .

12. Find the area of triangle formed by tips of the vectors a  iˆ  ˆj  3kˆ, b  4iˆ  3 ˆj  kˆ and c  3iˆ  ˆj  2kˆ.
13. If a particle of mass m is moving with constant velocity v parallel to a x  axis in x  y plane as shown in
figure, calculate its angular momentum with respect to origin at any time t.
y
14. Find the value of a for which the vectors 3iˆ  3ˆj  9kˆ and iˆ  ajˆ  3kˆ are
parallel.
m v
15. Prove that the four points  4 iˆ  5 ˆj  kˆ  ,  ( ˆj  kˆ ) , 3iˆ  9 ˆj  4 kˆ 
b 
r  
and 4  iˆ  ˆj  kˆ are coplanar.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 5

physics Classwork Problem

4. One Dimensional Motion


1. A particle moves in x  y plane such that its position vector varies with time r   2 sin 3t  iˆ 2 1  cos 3t  ˆj .
Find the equation of the trajectory of the particle
2. A particle: moves in a semicircular path of radius R from O to A then it moves parallel to z -axis covering a
distance R up to B . Finally it moves along BC parallel to y -axis through a distance 2 R . Find the ratio of D is
y
C

A'

O A x

B
z
3. A particle is moving In a circle of radius R ,
(a) What is its displacement when it covers (i) half the circle, (ii) full circle?
(b) What is its distance when it covers (i) Half the circle, (ii) Full circle?
4. Calculate the average speed and the average velocity in the following cases mentioned.
Case I:For a train that travels from one station to another at a uniform speed of 40 kmh -1 and returns to first
station at a speed of 60 kmh -1 .
Case II: For a man who walks at a speed of 1 m s  1 for the first one minute and then runs at a speed of 3 m s  1
for the next one minute along a straight track.
Case III: For a man who walks 720 m at a uniform speed of 2ms1 , then runs at a uniform speed of 4ms1 for 5
minute and then again walks at a speed of 1ms 1 for 3minutes.
(Please consider all uniform speeds to be the average speeds in respective intervals).

5 . A body moves along a straight line. Its distance xfrom a point on its path at a time t after passing that point, is
2 3
given by xt  8t  3t where xt , is in meter and t in second. Find
(a) the instantaneous velocity at t 1s
(b) instant and position at which the body is at rest
(c) the acceleration at t  4s
(d) the average velocity and average speed during the interval t 0 s to t  4 s

6. A particle traversed one third the distance with a velocity v 0 . The remaining part of the distance was covered
with velocity v1 , for half the time and with a velocity v 2 , for the remaining half of time. Assuming motion to be
rectilinear, find the mean velocity of the particle averaged over the whole time of motion.

7. A particle travels along a straight line with a velocity v= 12  3t 2  ms  1 , where t is in seconds. When t 1s,
the particle is located 10 m to the left of the origin. Calculate the
(a) acceleration when t  4 s (b) displacement from t 0 to t  10 s and
c) distance the particle travels from t  0to t  10 s .
8. A car travelling at 20 ms 1 takes a U  turn in 20 s without changing Its speed. What is the average
acceleration of the car?
9. Consider a particle initially moving with a velocity of 5 ms 1 which starts decelerating at a constant rate of
2 ms  2
1. Determine the time at which the particle becomes stationary.
2. Find the distance travelled in the 2 nd second.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 6

physics Classwork Problem

10. In a car race, car A takes a time of t s , less than car B at the finish and passes the finishing point with a
velocity v more than car B . Assuming that the cars start from rest and travel with constant accelerations a1 and
a2 , respectively , show that v  a1a2t .
11. A point moving with constant acceleration from A to B in a straight Line AB has velocities uand v at A
and B respectively.(a) Find Its velocity at C , the midpoint of A and B .(b) Find the ratio v if
u
time taken from A to C is twice the time to go from C to B .
12. A body starts with an initial velocity of 10 ms 1 and moves along a straight line path with constant
acceleration. When the velocity of the body is 50 ms 1 the acceleration is reversed in direction. Find the velocity
of the particle as it reaches the starting point.
13. Two particles P and Q move in a straight line AB towards each other. P starts from A with a velocity
u1 , and an acceleration a1 . Q stalls from B with velocity u 2 and an acceleration a2 . They pass from each
other at midpoint of AB and arrive at other ends of AB with equal velocities. Prove that
 u1  u2  a1  a2   8  a1u2  a2u1 
14. A car starts moving rectilinearly, first with an acceleration of 5ms 2 (initial velocity zero), then moves
uniformly and finally decelerating at the same rate till it stops. The total time of journey is 25 s. The average
speed during the interval is 72 kmh -1 . Calculate the time for which the car was in uniform motion.
15. The speed of a train increases at a constant rate  from zero to v and then remains constant for an interval
and finally decreases to zero at a constant rate  . If l is the total distance travelled by the train then find the
total time taken to complete the journey. At what value of v is the time of travel shortest? What is the value of
the shortest time?
16. Two road rally checkpoints A and B are located on the same highway and are 12 km apart .The speed
limits for the first 8 km and the last 4 km of the section of highway are 100 kmh -1 and 70 kmh -1 respectively.
Drivers must stop at each checkpoint and the specified time between points A and B is 25 min. Knowing that
3
at driver accelerates and decelerates at the same constant rate, determine the magnitude of his acceleration if he
travels at the speed limit as much as possible.

dv  t 
17. The motion of a body is given by the equation  6  3v  t  ,when v t  in the speed in ms1 and t in
dt
seconds. If the body was at rest at t  0 Then test the correctness of the following result
(a) the terminal speed is 2 m s  1 '
(b) the magnitudes of initial acceleration is 6 ms  2
(c) the speed varies with time as v  t  =2 1  e 3t  ms 1
(d) the speed is 1ms 1 when the acceleration is half the initial value
18. A particle is subjected to an acceleration a t t2 where  and  are positive constants. The position and
velocity of the particle at t  0 are x0 and v0 respectively. Find the expression for the velocity  v  and position
 x  of the particle at time t .
19. The velocity of a particle moving in the positive direction of x-axis varies as v   x , where t  10 is a
positive constant. Assuming that at moment t 0 , the particle was located at the point x  0 . Find
(a) the time dependence of the velocity and the acceleration of the particle
(b) the mean velocity of the particle averaged over the time that the particle takes cover first s meters of the
path.
20. A particle having a velocity v  v0 at t 0 is decelerated at the rate a   v where  is a positive
constant. After what time and distance will the particle will be at rest?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 7

physics Classwork Problem
21. The velocity of a particle travelling along a straight line is v  v0  kx , where k is constant. If x  0 when
t  0, determine the position and acceleration of the particle as a function of time.
22. A particle is dropped from the top of a tower h m high and at the same moment another particle is projected
upwards from the bottom. They meet when the upper one has descended a distance h . Show that the velocities
n
of the two when they meet are in the ratio 2: ( n- 2) and that the initial velocity of the particle projected up is
ngh
2
23. Two particles 1 and 2 are projected simultaneously with velocities v1 and v2 respectively. Particle 1 is
projected vertically up from the top of a cliff of height it and particle 2 is projected vertically up from the bottom
of the cliff. If the bodies meet (a) above the top of the cliff, (b) between the top and bottom of the cliff, and (c)
below the bottom of the cliff, find the time of meeting of the particles.
B

v1
t0
A
v1

C
t0
24. . (a) Show that the velocity acquired by a particle in sliding down an inclined plane is the same as that
acquired by a particle falling freely from rest through a distance equal to the height of the inclined plane, (b) Find
the time taken in sliding a particle down the whole length of the incline.
25. . Ball 1 is released from the top of a smooth inclined plane, and at the same instant ball 2 is projected from
the foot of the plane with such a velocity that they meet halfway up the incline.
Determine:
a. the velocity with which balls are projected and
b. the velocity of each ball when they meet.
26. The position versus time graph for a certain particle moving along the x -axis is shown. Find the average
velocity in the time intervals (a) 0 to 2 s , (b) 2 s to 4 s, and (c) 4 s to 7s
x  m
10

6
4

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8
t s 
-2

-4
-5
-6

27. The position-time  x  t  graphs for two children A and B returning from their school O to their
homes P and Q , respectively, are shown in. Choose the correct entries in the brackets below.
a.  A / B  lives closer to school than  B / A b.  A / B  starts from the school earlier than  B / A .
c.  A / B  walks faster than  B / A d. A and B reach home at the (same/different) time.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 8

physics Classwork Problem
e.  A / B  overtakes on the road (once/twice).
x
Q

P
A B

O t

28.Describe the motion shown by the following velocity-time graphs.

A
A v

C t
0 t 0
B C

D D
(a) (b)

29. The velocity versa curve of a moving point is show in. Find the retardation of the particle for the portion CD

v C
60

40

B
20

A D
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 t

30. As soon as a car just starts from rest in a direction, a scooter moving with a uniform speed over takes the car.
Their velocity-time graph is shown in calculate
1. The difference between the distances travelled by the car and the scooter in 15 s
2. The distance of car and scooter from the starting point at that instant.
v  m s 1 

60

45 A can B
E F Scooter
30 G
15
C D
O 5 10 15 20 25 30 t s 

31. The velocity-time graph of a body moving along a straight line is given below find:
(a) Average velocity in whole time of motion
(b) Average speed in whole time of motion
(c) Draw acceleration vs time graph.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 9

physics Classwork Problem
v  m s 1 

+10

0 t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

-10

32. A particle moves along x -axis with initial speed v0  5 ms 1 . If its acceleration varies with time as shown in
a  t graph in,
a. Find the velocity of the particle at t =4 s .
b. Find the time when the particle 10 starts moving along  x direction.
a  m s 2 

0
t s 
1 2 3 4

-10

33. Consider the following displacement-time graph. Draw the velocity-time graph and acceleration-time graph
and analyze the motion of the particle regarding its velocity and acceleration.

34. Consider the following velocity-time graph plot the acceleration-time graph and analyze the motion of the
particle from A to E.

35. Consider the graph of the coordinate of a spider crawling along the x -axis. (a) Graph its velocity and
acceleration as functions of time, (b) In a motion diagram show the position, velocity, and acceleration of the
spider at the five times: t  2.5 s, t  10 s, t  20 s, t  30 s and t  37.5 s
x m

Parabola
1.0

0.75

0.5
Straight line Straight line

0.25

Parabola Parabola

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
t s 

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 10

physics Classwork Problem
36. A local train leaves station A ; it gains speed at the rate of 1 ms 2 for first 6 s and then at the rate of 1.5 ms 2
until it has reached the speed of 12 ms 1 . The train maintains the same speed until it approaches station B
brakes are then applied, giving the train a constant deceleration then and bringing it to a stop in 6 s. If the total
running time of train is 40 s. Find (a) the distance between stations A and B . (b) draw acceleration-time,
velocity-time, and position-time radiation of motion.
37. A hot-air balloonist, rising vertically with a constant velocity of magnitude 20 m s 1 . releases a sandbag at
an instant when the balloon is 25 m above the ground. After it is released, the sandbag is in free fall. Sketch
a y  t , v y  t , and y  t graphs for the motion, taking origin at ground.
38. At the height of 75 m, a particle A is thrown up with V  10 ms 1 and B particle is thrown down with
V  10 ms 1 and C particle released with V  0 m s 1 . Draw graphs of each particle.
a. Displacement-time b. Speed-time c. Velocity-time d.Acceleration-time

39. The v  s and v 2  s graph are given for two particles. Find the accelerations of the particles at s  0 .
v  ms 1  v 2  ms 1 

20 20

s m s m
O (i) 50 O (ii) 50
40. The velocity-displacement for a jet plane on a straight runway is shown in. Determine the speed and
acceleration of the jet plane at s  150 m .
v 2  m 2 s 2 

60
50

s  m
O 100 200 250

41. Referring to a  x graph, find the velocity when the displacement of the particle is 100 m. Assume initial
velocity as zero.
a  m s 2 

s  m
O 50 150

42.Referring to the v 2  v diagram of a particle, find the displacement of the particle during the last two seconds.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 11

physics Classwork Problem
v 2  m 2 s 2 

2000

1500

s  m
O 50 100 250

43. For a particle moving along the x  axis, the v  t graph is shown below. OAAB , BC , CD and DE are
1 2
straight lines, but EF is a curve having equation v   t  10 
2
v
F
8

A B
4

C 8 E G
O 2 4 6 10 12 14 t s

-4
D

(a) Find, the distance travelled and displacement of the particle in 6 s.

(b) Find, the distance travelled and displacement of the particle in 10 s.
(c) Find, the distance travelled and displacement of the particle from 10 s to 14 s.
(d) Find, the displacement of the particle from 0 s to 14 s.
(e) Find the average spaced and average velocity of the particle
(i) from 0 to 6 s. (ii) from 0 to 10 s. (iii) from 0 to 14 s.
(f) Find the acceleration of the particle at 1 s, 3 s, 6 s, 9 s, and 12 s.
(h) Find the average acceleration of the particle from 0 to 1 s, 0 to 14 s, 2 to 8 s, and 4 to 14 s.
(h) Draw the acceleration—time graph for this situation.
44. A ball is dropped from a height of 80 m on a floor. At each collision with the floor, the ball loses one-tenth
of its speed. Plot the speed-time graph of its motion between t = 0 to 11.2 s (Take g = 10 ms-2 ).

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 12

physics Classwork Problem

5. Relative Velocity
1. A police van moving on a highway with In speed of 30 km h  1 fires a bullet at a thief's car speeding
a same direction with a speed of 192 km h  1 . If the speed of the bullet is 150 m s 1 . With what speed does
the bullet hit the thief’s car?
2. An elevator is moving with an upward acceleration a. A coin is dropped from rest from the roof of the
elevator, relative to you. After what time the coin will strike the base of the elevator?
3. Two cars 1 und 2 move with velocities v1 and V2 respectively, on a straight road in same direction,
When the cars are separated by a distance d , the driver of car It applies brakes and the car moves with
uniform retardation Simultaneously, car 2 starts accelerating with a2 . if v1  v2 ,find the minimum initial
separation between the cars to avoid between them.
4. Let us consider a boat which moves with a velocity v bw  5km h 1 relative to water. At time t  0 , the
boat passes through a piece of cork floating in water while moving downstream . If it turns back at time t  t1
. when and where does the boat meet the cork again? Assume t1  30min .
5. A lift is moving up with acceleration a. A person inside the lift throws the ball upwards with a velocity u
relative to hand.
(a) What is the time of flight of the ball?
(b) What is the maximum height reached by the ball in the lift?
6. Two trains, each having a speed of 30 kmhr -1 are travelled towards each other on the same straight track. A
bird that can fly at 60 kmhr -1 flies off one train, when they are 60 km apart and heads directly for the other
train. On reaching the other train, it flies directly back to the first and so on.
(a) How many trips can the bird make from one train to the other before they crash?
(b) What is the total distance the bird travels?
7. Two objects A and B are moving along the directions as shown in Fig. 5.10. Find the magnitude and
direction of the relative velocity of B w.r.t. A .
20ms1 x

30o
A
10ms1 y
B

8. An aero plane pilot wishes to fly due west. A wind of 100 kmhr -1 is blowing towards south.
1. If the speed of the plane (its speed in still air) is 300 kmhr -1 in which direction should the pilot head?
2. What is the speed of the plane with respect to ground?Illustrate with a vector diagram.
9. A block slips along an incline of a wedge. Due to reaction of the block on the wedge, it slips backwards. An
observer on the wedge will see the block moving straight down the incline. Discuss how to find the absolute
velocity of the block w.r.t wedge.


vM  V m

vm  v
M 

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 13

physics Classwork Problem
10. Two roads intersect at right angle, one goes along the x  axis another along the y  axis. At any instant
two cars A and B are moving along y and x directions, respectively, meet at intersection. Draw the
direction of motion of car A as seen from car B
y

VA
car A VB
x
car B

11. Two roads one along the y  axis and another along a direction at angle  with x  axis are as shown in
the figure. Two cars A and car B are moving along the roads. Consider the situation of the diagram. Draw
the direction of
y

Road
VA
VB

car A car B x

1. Car B as seen from car A .2. Car A as seen from car B .

12. Consider the situation given in the diagram. Two cars are moving along road 1 and road 2. Draw the
direction of the motion of
(i) Car B as seen from car A (ii) Car A as seen from car B .
y
Road 1

 Road 1

vA vB
A 1 2 B
A x

13. On a frictionless horizontal surface; assumed to be x  y plane, a small trolley A is moving along a
straight line parallel to the y  axis (sec figure} with a constant velocity of  
3  1 ms 1 . At a particular
instant, when the line OA makes an angle of 45° with the x  axis, a ball is thrown along the surface from the
origin O . Its velocity makes an angle  with the x  axis and it hits the trolley.
y

45o
x
O

(a) The motion of the ball is observed from the faint of the trolley. Calculate the angle  made by the
velocity vector of the ball with the x  axis in this frame.
4
(b) Find the speed of the ball with respect to the surface, if  
3

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 14

physics Classwork Problem
14. The distance between two moving particles P and at any time is a. If v, be their relative velocity and
Q
if uand vbe the components of v r , along and perpendicular to PQ , then show that their closest distance is
av au
and that the time that elapses before they arrive at their nearest distance is 2 .
vr vr
15. Car A and car B start moving simultaneously in the same direction along the line joining them. Car A with
a constant acceleration a  4 m / s 2 :.While car B moves with a constant velocity v  1m / s . At time t 0, car
A is 10 m behind car B. Find the time when car A overtakes car B.
16. Two ships A and B are 10 km apart on a line running south to north. Ship A farther north is streaming
west at 20 km/h and ship B is streaming north at 20 km/h. What is their distance of closest approach and
how long do they’ take to reach it?
17. A man can row a boat with 4 km/h in still water. If he is crossing a river where the current is 2 km/h.
(a) In what direction will his boat be headed, if he wants to reach a point on the other bank, directly opposite
to starting point?
(b) If width of the river is 4 km, how long will the man take to cross the river, with the condition in part(a)?
(c) In what direction should he head the boat if he wants to cross the river in shortest time and what is this
minimum time?
(d) How long will it take him to row 2 km up the stream and then back to his starting point?
18.A river flows due south with a speed of2.0 ms1 . A man steers a motorboat across the river; his velocity
relative to the water is 4 ms1 due east. The river is 800 m wide.
1. What is his velocity (magnitude and direction) relative to the earth?
2. How much time is required to cross the river?
3. How far south of his starting point will he reach the opposite bank?

19. The current velocity of river grows in proportion to the distance from its bank and reaches the maximum
value v0 in the middle. Near the banks the velocity is zero. A boat is moving along the river in such a manner
that it is always perpendicular to the current. The speed of the boat in still water is u. Find the distance
through which the boat crossing the river will be carried away by the current if the width of the river is l .
Also determine the trajectory of the boat.
20. A man wants to swim in a river from A to B and back from B to A always following line . The distance
between points B is S. The velocity of the river current is constant over the entire width of the river. line AB
makes an angle  with the direction of current. With what velocity u and at what angle the line AB should
the man swim to cover distance AB back in time f?
B



A

21. A person standing on a road has to hold his umbrella at 60° with the vertical to keep the rain away
He throws the umbrella and starts running at 20 ms 1 . He find that rain drops are hitting his head vertically.
Find the speed of the rain drops with respect to (a) the road and (b) the moving person.
22. To a man walking at the rate of 3 km h -1 the rain appears to fall vertically. When he increases his speed
to6 kmhr -1 .It appears to meet him at an angle of 45 will, vertical. Find the speed of rain.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 15

physics Classwork Problem
23. An aircraft flies at 400 kmhr -1 in still air. A wind of 200 2kmhr 1 is blowing from the south. The pilot
wishes to travel from A to a point B north east of A . Find the direction he must steer and time of his
journey if AB  1000km .
24. A helicopter flies horizontally with constant velocity in a direction  east of north north between two
points A and B , at distance d apart. Wind is blowing from south with constant speed u; the speed of
helicopter relative to air is nu, where n  1 . Find the speed of the helicopter along AB . The helicopter
returns from B to A with same speed nu relative to air in same wind. Find the total time for the journeys.
North


East
A
Wind

25. A, B, C, and D are four trees, located at the vertices of a square. Wind blows from A to B with uniform
speed. The ratio of times of flight of a bird from A to B and from B to A is n. At what angle should the bird fly
from the direction of wind flow, in order that it starts from A and (a) reaches C, (b) reaches D?
26. Two particles are located on a horizontal plane at a distance 60 m. At t both the particles are
simultaneously projected at angle 45° with velocities 2 ms 1 and 14 ms 1 , respectively. Find
(i) Minimum separation between them during motion
(ii) At what time separation between them is minimum?
u1  2 ms -1 u 2  14 ms -1
B

A 45o 46o B
1 60 m 2

27.Two cars A and B are moving west to east and south to north respectively along crossroads. A moves
with a speed of 20ms 1 ’ and is 500 m away from point of intersection of cross roads and B moves with a
speed of 15ms 1 and is 400 m away from point of intersection of cross roads. Find the shortest distance
between them?
28. Three particles A, B , and C arc situated at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side l at t  0 . The
particle A heads towards B, B towards C , C towards A with constant speeds v. Find the time of their
meeting.
29. A swimmer can swim in still water at a rate 4.0km/h. If he swims in a river flowing at 3.0 km/h and keeps
his direction (with respect to water) perpendicular to the current, find his velocity with respect to the
ground.
30. An aero plane flies along a straight path A to B and returns back again. The distance between A and B is
l and the aero plane maintains the constant speed v w.r.t wind. There is a steady wind with
a speed uat an angle  with line AB . Determine the expression for the total time of the trip.
31. Find the time an aero plane having velocity v takes to fly around a square with side a if the wind is
blowing at a velocity u along one side of the square.
32. Particles A and B are moving as shown in the diagram at t  0 . Find their velocity of separation
(i) at t  0 (ii) at t  1 sec
4 m/s

A
3m

3 m/s

4m B x

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 16

physics Classwork Problem
33. Two cars A and B are moving west to east and south to north respectively along crossroads. A
moves with a speed of 72kmh 1 ’ and is 500 m away from point of intersection of cross roads and B moves
with a speed of 54 kmh -1 and is 400 m away from point of intersection of cross roads. Find the shortest
distance between them?
34. ‘ A ’ moves with constant velocity u along the ‘ x ’ axis. B always has velocity towards A . After how
much time will B meet A if B moves with constant speed v . What distance will be travelled by A and
B.

Au


B

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 17

physics Classwork Problem

6. Projectile Motion
1. A particle moves in the X  Y plane with a constant acceleration of 1.5 m/s 2 in the direction making
an angle of 37° with the X  axis. At t  0 the particle is at the origin and its velocity is 8.0 m/s along
the X  axis. Find the velocity and the position of the particle at t  4.0 s.
Y

a  1.5 m/s 2

37o
X
u  8.0 m/s
t3
2. A particle moves in the x  y plane according to the rule x  t , y  t 
2
, where t is time.
3
(I) Find the displacement of the particle from t  0 to t  3 s.
(ii) Find the distance traveled by the particle from t  0 to t  3 s.
3. At what point on a projectile’s trajectory, its speed is minimum? If a stone is thrown with a speed v0
at an angle 0 with horizontal, find the velocity of the stone when its line of motion makes an angle 
with horizontal.
4. 1. With what velocity v0 should a ball be projected horizontally from the top of a tower so that the
horizontal distance on the ground is  H , where H is the height of the tower.
2. Also determine the speed of the ball when it reaches the ground.
v

H
5. A man is sitting in an open car which is travelling along a road at a speed of 30 m s  1 . The man stands
up and throws a ball at a speed of 15 ms 1 , relative to himself at an angle  to the horizontal. The
moment the man throws the ball, the driver of the car begins to accelerate at a constant rate of
17.32 ms 2 , in the direction in which it was initially travelling.
(i) Find the value of  if the man in the car catches the ball.
(ii) Find the time at which the man catches the ball if the instant at which ball was thrown is t  0 .
Assume that time at which the ball travels contains the line of motion of the car, and that g =10 ms 2 .
6. From a point at a height h above the horizontal ground a particle A is projected with a velocity
u in an upward direction making an angle  with the horizontal. Another particle B is projected
with the same velocity u but in a downward direction exactly opposite to A . The two particles will
strike the ground at a distance x apart. Find x .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 18

physics Classwork Problem
u sin 
u

 u cos
u

x1 x2

7. Two boys simultaneously aim their guns at a bird sitting on a tower. The first boy releases his shot
with a speed of 100 ms 1 at an angle of projection of 30°. The second boy is ahead of the first by a
distance of 50 m and releases his shot with a speed of 80 ms 1 . How must he aim his gun so that both
the shots hit the bird simultaneously? What is the distance of the foot of the tower from the two boys
and the height of the tower? With what velocities and when do the two shots hit the bird?
8. A particle moves in the plane x  y with constant acceleration adirected along negative y -axis. The
equation of motion of particle has the form Ax  Bx 2 A and B are positive constants. Find the
velocity of particle at the origin of the co-ordinates.
9. A particle is projected at angle  with horizontal. Calculate the time when it is moving perpendicular
to initial direction. Also calculate the velocity at this position
y
Initial direction

x
O

10. Two inclined planes OA and OB having Inclination (with horizontal) 30° and 60°, respectively,
intersect each othere at O as shown in Fig. A particle is projected from point P with velocity
u  10 3 ms 1 along a direction perpendicular to plane OA. If the particle strikes plane OB
perpendicularly at Q. calculate the
a. velocity with which particle strikes the plane OB.
b. time of flight. c. vertical height h of P from O. d. maximum height from O, attained by the particle.
De. distance PQ.
B
Q
A u

P
h
30o 60o
O

11.A mango in a tree is located at a horizontal and vertical distance of 30 m and 40 m, respectively, from
the point of projection of a stone. Find the minimum speed and the critical angle of projection of the
stone so as to hit the mango.
12. A shell bursts on contact with the ground and the fragments fly in all the directions with speeds up to
39.2 ms 1 . Show that a man 78.4 m away is in danger for 4 2 s.
13. A stone is projected from a point on the ground in such a direction so as to hit a bird on the top of a
telegraph post of height h and then attain a maximum height of 2h above the ground. If at the instant of
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 19
physics Classwork Problem
projection the bird were to fly away horizontally with a uniform speed then calculate the ratio between
the horizontal velocity of the bird and the stone, if the stone still hits the bird while descending.
14. A particle A is projected with an initial velocity of 60 m/s at an angle 30° to the horizontal. At the
same time a second particle B is projected in opposite direction with initial speed of 50 m/s from a
point at a distance of 100 m from A . If the particles collide in air, find (a) the angle of projection  of
particle B , (b) lime when the collision takes place and (c) the distance of P from A , where collision
occurs.  g  10 m / s 2 
60 m/s 50 m/s

30o 
A B
100 m
15. Two guns situated at the top of a hill of height 10 m , fire one shot each with the same speed
5 3 ms 1 at some interval of time. One gun fires horizontally and the other fires upwards at an angle of
60° with the horizontal. The shots collide in air at a point P . Find
(a) the time interval between the firings and
(b) the coordinates of the point P . Take origin of coordinates system at the foot of the hill right below
the muzzle and trajectory in x  y plane.
16. Two particles are simultaneously thrown from the roofs of two high buildings as shown in figure.
Their velocities are v A  2 ms 1 and vn  14 ms 1 respectively. Calculate the minimum distance
between the particles in the process of their motion. Also find the time when they are at closes distance.

A 45o

45o B
20 m

11 m

22 m

17. From points A and B at the respective heights of 2 m and 6 m , two bodies are thrown
simultaneously towards each other; one is thrown horizontally with a velocity of 8 m s  1 and the other,
downward at an angle of 45° to the horizontal at an initial velocity such that the bodies collide in flight.
The horizontal distance between points A and B equals 8 m . Calculate the initial velocity v 0 of the
body thrown at an angle 45°, the co-ordinates  x, y of the point of collision, the time of flight t of the
bodies before colliding and velocities vA , vB of the two bodies at the instant of collision. The trajectories
lie in a single plane.
18. A ball starts falling with zero initial velocity on a smooth inclined plane which forms an angle 
with the horizontal. Having fallen through a height h, the ball rebounds elastically off the inclined plane.
At what distance from the impact point will the ball rebound for the second time?
19. A large heavy box is sliding without friction down at smooth inclined plane of inclination  . From a
point P on the bottom of box, a particle is projected inside the box. This initial speed of particle with
respect to box is u and the direction of projection makes and angle  with the bottom as shown in the
figure.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 20

physics Classwork Problem

Q

n
P

(a) Find the distance along the bottom of box between point of projection P and point Q where the
particle lands. (Assume that the particle docs not hit any other surface of the box. Neglect air
resistance)
(b) If the horizontal displacement of a particle as seen by an observer on ground is zero, find the
speed of with respect to ground at the instant the particle was projected.
20. A particle projected with velocity u strikes at right angles a plane through the point of projection
inclined at an angle  to the horizon. Show that the height of the point struck above the horizontal

plane through the point of projection is

2 u 2  sin 2   and that the time of flight up to that instant
 
g  1  3 sin 2  
2u
is, t 
g 1  3sin 2 

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 21

physics Classwork Problem

7. Circular Motion
1. Two points are moving with uniform velocities uand valong the perpendicular axes, OX and OY . The motion is
directed toward O , the origin. When t  0 , they are at a distance aand b respectively from O .
an  bv
(a) Calculate the angular velocity of the line joining them at time t .(b) Show that it is greatest when t  2
u  v2

2. A particle P moves along a circle of radius R so that its radius vector r , relative to the point O at the
circumference rotates with constant angular velocity  . Find the magnitude of the velocity' of the particle and the
direction of its total acceleration.
3. A rigid body is spinning with an angular velocity of 4 rads 1 about an axis parallel to 3 ˆj  kˆ passing through the
point iˆ  3 ˆj  kˆ . Find the velocity of the particle at the point 4iˆ  2 ˆj  kˆ .
3 ˆj  kˆ

4 ,  2 , 1


r

1, 3,  1
O

4. A particle moves on a circle of radius r with centripetal acceleration as function of time as

ac  k 2rt 2 , where k is a positive constant. Find the following quantities as function of time at an instant:
1. The speed of the particle 2. The tangential acceleration of the particle
3. The resultant acceleration, and 4. Angle made by the resultant with tangential direction.
5. A stone tied to an inextensible string of length l 1m is kept horizontal. If it is released, find the angular speed of the
stone when the string makes an angle   30 with horizontal.
   
dv dv d v dv
6. What does and represent ? (b)Can these be equal? (c)Can  0 while 0
dt dt dt dt
 
d v dv
(d)  0 while 0
dt dt
7.A balloon starts rising from the earth's surface. The ascension rate is constant and equal to v0 . Due to the wind, the
balloon gathers the horizontal velocity component vx  ky , where kis a constant and y is the height of ascent. Find
the dependence of the following quantities on y .
(a) The horizontal drift of the balloon x  y  .
(b) The total tangential acceleration of the balloon.
(c) The normal acceleration of the balloon.
8. A particle is projected with a speed umaking an angle  with the horizontal. Find the radius of curvature at the
point where the particle velocity makes an angle  with the horizontal. Assume the particle to move under gravity in
2
the absence of any air drag.
9. Find the ratio of the radius of curvature at the highest point of projectile to that just after its projection if the angle
of projection is 30°.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 22

physics Classwork Problem

8. Newton’s Laws of Motion

1. In a particular crash test, a car of mass 1500 kg collides with a wall as show n . The initial and final
  ˆ 1 , respectively. If the collision lasts 0.150s , find the
velocities of the car are vi  15.0ims
ˆ 1 and v f  5.0ims
impulse caused by the collision and the average force exerted on the car.
2. Wind with a velocity 100 km h  1 blows normally against one of the walls of a house with an area of
108 m 2 . Calculate the force exerted on the wall if the air moves parallel to the wall after striking it and has a
3
density of 1.2 kg m .
3. For the situation given in figure, find the acceleration of each body for the following two cases

A B F

(a) if the thread has a mass m (b) if the thread is massless

It is given that masses of A and B are M 1 and M 2 respectively and the horizontal surface is smooth.
l 2l
4. A spring of force constant k and natural length l is cut into two parts of lengths and . Find the new
3 3
force constant of the divided parts.
5. In the arrangement shown in figure, what should be the mass of block A so that the system remains at

rest. Also find force exerted by string on the pulley Q . g  10 m / s 2 
Q

2 kg

P A
30o

2 kg

6. An aerostat of mass m starts coining down with a constant acceleration a. Determine the ballast mass to
be dumped from the aerostat to reach the upward acceleration of the same magnitude. The air drag is to be
neglected.
7. A painter of mass 100 kg is raising himself and the crate (such an arrangement is called Bosun's chair) on
which he stands as shown. When he pulls the rope the force exerted by him on the crate's floor is 450 N.
If the crate weighs 25 kg then, find the acceleration of the system and the tension in the rope.
CRATE

8. A man of mass 60 kg is standing on a weighing machine (2) of mass 5 kg placed on ground. Another
similar weighing machine is placed over man’s head. A block of mass 50 kg is put on the weighing machine

(1). Calculate the readings of weighing machines (1) and (2) g  10 m / s 2 

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 23

physics Classwork Problem
50 kg
weighing machine

weighing machine

9. . Two blocks with masses m1  0.2 kg and m2  0.3 kg hang one under other as shown in figure. Find

the tensions in the strings (massless) in the following situations : g  10 m / s 2 
T1

m1
T2
m2

(a) the blocks are at rest(b) they move upward at 5 m/s(c) they accelerate upward at 2 m/s 2
(d) they accelerate downward at 2 m/s 2
(e) if maximum allowable tension is 10 N. What is maximum possible upward acceleration ?
10. Two blocks ‘ A ’ and ‘ B ’ of same mass ‘ m ’ attached with a light string are suspended by a spring as
shown in figure Find the acceleration of block ‘ A ’ and B ' just after the string is cut.
g (upwards), g (downwards)

A m

B m

11. Two blocks are kept in contact as shown in figure. Find

50 N
30o

100 N
10 kg 20 kg

(a) forces exerted by surfaces (floor and wall) on blocks.

(b) contact force between two blocks.
12. A 5 kg block has a rope of mass 2 kg attached to its underside and a 3 kg block is suspended from the other
end of the rope. The whole system is accelerated upward at 2 m/s 2 by an external force F0 .
F0

5 kg

2 kg

3 kg

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 24

physics Classwork Problem
(a) What is F0 ? (b) What is the net force on rope ?

(c) What is the tension at middle point of the rope ? g  10 m / s 2 
For calculating the value of F0 consider two blocks with the rope as a system.
13. A 60 kg painter stands on a 15 kg platform. A rope attached to the platform and passing over an
overhead pulley allows the painter to raise himself along with the platform.
(i) To get started, he pulls the rope down with a force of 400 N. Find the acceleration of the platform as
well as that of the painter.
(ii) What force must he exert on the rope so as to attain an upward speed of 1 m/s in 1s?
(iii) What force should he apply now to maintain the constant speed of 1 m/s?

400 N

14. In the arrangement shown in, the strings are light and inextensible. The surface over which blocks are
placed is smooth. Find: a. the acceleration of each block b. the tension in each string

4kg 2kg 1kg

15. The system shown is in equilibrium. Find the acceleration of the blocks A, B, and C’, all of equal masses m
at the instant when (assume springs to be ideal).

A
B

a. The spring between ceiling and A is cut. b. The string (inextensible) between A and B is cut.
c. The spring between B and C is cut. Also find the tension in the string when the system is at rest the above
three cases.
16.A chain of mass m is attached at two points A and B of two fixed walls as shown in figure. Due to its
weight a sag is there in the chain such that at point A and B it makes an angle  with the normal to the
wall. Find the tension in the chain at : (Assume tension is always along, the length of chain).

A B
 
(a) point A and B (b) mid point of the chain
17. Two particles of masses 10 kg and 35 kg are connected with four strings at points B and D as shown
in Fig

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 25

physics Classwork Problem

C
30o T E
3
A B
45o
T4 o T2
37 T1
100 N

D
350 N
Determine the tensions in various segments of the string.
18. A block of mass M is being pulled with the help of a string of mass m and length L . The horizontal
force applied by the man on the string is F .
Pull

M m
Determine
a. Find the force exerted by the string on the block and acceleration of system.
b. Find the tension at the mid point of the string.
c. Find the tension at a distance x from the end at which force is applied.
Assume that the block is kept on a friction less horizontal surface and the mass is uniformly distributed in
the string.
19. Two blocks of mass 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are suspended from a rigid support Sby two inextensible wires each
of length 1 m (see figure). The upper wire has negligible mass and the lower wire has a uniform mass of
0.2 kg/m. The whole system of blocks, wires and support have an upward acceleration of 0.2 m/s 2 . The
acceleration due to gravity is 9.8 m/s 2 .
a) Find the tension at the midpoint of the lower wire.
b) Find the tension at the midpoint of the upper wire

2.9
kg

1.9
kg
20. A smooth semicircular wire track of radius R is fixed in a vertical plane (figure). One end of a massless
3R
spring of natural length is attached to the lowest point O of the wire track. A small ring of mass m
4
which can slide on the track is attached to the other end of the spring. The ring is held stationary at point
mg
P such that the spring makes an angle 60 o with the vertical. The spring constant k  . Consider the
R
instant when the ring is making an angle 60 o with the vertical. , The spring is released

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 26

physics Classwork Problem

C
P
60
O
(a) Draw the free body diagram of the ring,
(b) Determine the tangential acceleration of the ring and the normal reaction.
21. In the pulley configuration shown, cylinder A has a downward velocity of 0.3 ms 1 . Determine the
velocity of B .

A
B
22. Consider identical pulleys A , B , C , D and E as shown A and B are fixed which C , D and E are
free to move. The pulleys are connected by light inextensible string. All the pulleys have identical masses
say M each. At a particular instant, it is observed that C and D move down with velocity,
VC  2 ms-1 and VD  2 ms-1 . Calculate the velocity of pulley E at that instant. Also find the acceleration
in the pulleys and the tension in the string.

Datum
A B

T T yC
T C T T
 T
yD
T
Mg T
T
yE
D
T
T Mg
T
E

Mg
23. Figure shows a rod of length  resting on a wall and the floor. Its lower end A is pulled towards left with
a constant velocity u . As a result of this, end A starts moving down along the wall. Find the velocity of the
other end B downward when the rod makes an angle  with the horizontal.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 27

physics Classwork Problem

l
vR
y
u A  x

24.

m1
v1  m2 v2

In Fig a ball of mass m1 and a block of mass m2 are joined together with an inextensible string.
The ball can slide on a smooth horizontal surface. If v1 and v2 are the respective speeds of the ball and the
block, then determine the constraint relation between the two.

25. A pulley-rope-mass arrangement is shown in Fig.. Find the acceleration of block m1 when the masses are
set free to move. Assume that the pulley and the ropes are ideal.

26. In the arrangement shown, find the tensions in the rope and accelerations of the masses m1 and m2 and
pulleys P1 and P2 when the system is set free to move. Assume the pulleys to be massless and strings are light
and inextensible.

P1

P2
m1
m2

27. In the arrangement shown in Fig., block B starts from rest and moves towards right with aconstant
acceleration. After time t, the velocity of A with respect to B becomes v. Determine the acceleration of A.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 28

physics Classwork Problem
28. In the arrangement shown, the three blocks move with constant velocities. Knowing that the relative
velocity of A with respect to C is 300 mms 1 upwards and that the relative velocity of B with respect to A
is 200 mms 1 downwards, find the velocity of each block.

A B C

29. In the system shown, if a 0 be the acceleration of block 1, then find the acceleration of block 2.

30. Determine the relationship which governs the velocities of the four cylinders. Express all velocities as
positive down. How many degrees of freedom are there?

D A

C B

31. Block C shown in figure is going down at acceleration 2 ms 2 . Find the acceleration of A & B .

A B

32. In the arrangement shown, if the end A of the rope moves downward with a speed of 5 ms 1 ,
determine the speed of cylinder B .

A
5 ms-1
B

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 29

physics Classwork Problem
33. A block of mass m is placed on the inclined surface of a wedge as shown in Fig. Calculate the acceleration
of the wedge and the block when the block is released. Assume all surfaces are frictionless.
m

M


34. A rod of mass m is supported on a wedge of mass M shown in Fig.. Find the accelerations of rod a and
wedge A in the arrangement. The friction between all contact surfaces is negligible.

35. A plank of mass m rests symmetrically on two wedges B and C of mass M. What is the acceleration of
the plank? Neglect friction between all the contact surfaces.

36. The mass of wedge, shown, is M and that of the block is m. Neglecting friction at all the places and mass of
the pulley, calculate the acceleration of wedge. Thread is inextensible.

37. A block of mass M is connected with a particle of mass m by a light inextensible string as shown. Assuming
all contacting surfaces as smooth, find the acceleration of the wedge after releasing the system.

38. A man of mass M stands on a weighing machine in an elevator accelerating upwards with an acceleration
a . Draw the free-body diagram of the man as observed by observer A (stationary on the ground) and
observer B (stationary on the elevator). Also calculate the reading of the weighing machine.
M
B
a
A

39. A rail-road car is moving towards right with acceleration a. A man A accelerating toward left with an
acceleration of magnitude a/3 w.r.t. to car. A dog of mass m is following man A with an acceleration a/3
relative to the car. Observer B on ground is observing the dog and man A. Find the
a. net force experienced by the dog as seen by observer B standing on ground.
b. rate of change of linear momentum of the dog relative to the man ,A moving on trolley.
c. pseudo-force on the dog as seen from man A.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 30

physics Classwork Problem

40. A bead of mass m is fitted on to a rod an can move on it without friction At the initial moment the bead
is in the middle of the rod. The rod moves translationally in a horizontal plane with an acceleration a in a
direction forming an angle  with the rod. Find the acceleration of the bead relative to the rod.

41. A pulley with two blocks system is attached to the ceiling of a lift with the help of a spring a force constant
k The lift is moving upward with an acceleration a 0 . Find the deformation in the spring as observed by the
inertia, and non-inertial reference frame observer.

k a0

m2
m1

42. Figure shows a box of mass m is placed on a wedge of mass M on a smooth surface. How much force F
is required to be applied on M so that during motion m remains at rest on its surface.

F m

M


43. All the surfaces shown in figure are assumed to be frictionless. The block of mass m slides on the prism
which in turn slides backward on the horizontal surface. Find the acceleration of the smaller block with
respect to the prism.

M


44. Three blocks of mass m0 , m1 and m2 are connected as shown in the figure. All the surfaces are friction less
the string and the pulleys are light. Find the acceleration of m0 .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 31

physics Classwork Problem
m0
P1

P2

m1
m2

45. A bob of mass m is suspended from the ceiling of a train moving with an acceleration a as shown in
figure. Find the angle  in equilibrium position.

 a

46.
m2

F
M a
m1

Figure shows a large block of mass M , supporting two small masses m1 and m2 , connected by a light
frictionless thread. A force F is acting on M , such that the block m1 is sliding down, with an acceleration a
relative to M . Find the force F applied on M and also the acceleration of M . Assuming all surfaces are
frictionless.
47. In the arrangement shown in figure, a wedge of mass m3  3.45kg is placed on a smooth horizontal surface.
A small and light pulley is connected on its top edge. A light flexible thread passes over the pulley. Two blocks
having mass m1  1.3kg and m2 1.5kg are connected at the ends of the thread, m1 is on smooth horizontal

m1

m3 m

37o
surface and m2 rests on inclined surface of the wedge.
2 3
If the whole system is released from rest, All surfaces are smooth. Take g 10ms and tan  37  
4
(a) the tension in the string and (b) acceleration of m1 , and m3

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 32

physics Classwork Problem

9. Friction
1. In the following figure an object of mass M is kept on a rough table as seen from above. Forces are
applied on it as shown find the direction of static friction if the object does not move

M 20 N

15 N
2. Find the tension in the string in situation as shown the figure below. Forces 120 N and 100 N start
acting where the system is at rest and the maximum value of static friction on 10 kg is 90 N and that on
20 kg is 60N?
120 N 100 N
10 20

fs  90 N fs  60 N
3. Find the acceleration of the two blocks. The system is initially at rest and the friction coefficient are
as shown in the figure ?
 =0.5 10 A F  50 N
Smooth

10 B

4. Find the acceleration of the two blocks. The system is initially at rest and the coefficient are as shown
in the figure ?
 =0.5 10 A 101N
smooth

10 B

5. Find the acceleration of the two blocks. The system is initially at rest and the friction coefficient as
shown in the figure?
 =0.5 10 F  60 N
Smooth

20

6. In above example find maximum F for which two blocks will move together.

7. Initially the system is at rest, find out minimum value of F for which sliding starts between the two
blocks.
 =0.5
Smooth
10
20 F

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 33

physics Classwork Problem

8. In the figure given below force F applied horizontally or lower block, is gradually increased from
zero. Discuss the direction and nature of friction force and the acceleration of the block for different
2
values of F (Take g  10 m / s )
 A =B =0.3
Smooth
mA  10kg 120 N

mB  20 kg F

9. Consider the two blocks as shown in figure, A force F is applied on the lower block.
2 kg 1  0.2

F 4 kg 1  0.1

(a) Where does the sliding begins first?

(b) What is the minimum force at which any part of system starts sliding?
(c) At what value of force F will the sliding start at the other surfaces?
(d) For the following values of F , find the acceleration of the two blocks, nature, and value of
friction at both rough surfaces (i) 3N, (ii) 12 N (iii) 24 N.
10. A block of mass m lying on a horizontal surface (coefficient of static friction   s ) is to be brought
motion by a pulling force F. At what angle  with the horizontal should the force F be applied so that
its magnitude is minimum? Also find this minimum magnitude.
F


F
11. A block of mass M = 10 kg is placed on an inclined plane, inclined at angle   37 with horizontal.
The coefficient of friction between the block and inclined is   0.5 .

M
  0.5   0.5

  37o   37o

a. Calculate the acceleration of the block when it is released.

b. Now a force F = 75 N is applied on block as shown. Find out the acceleration of the block. If the
block is initially at rest.
c. In case (b), how much force should be added to 75 N force so that block the starts to move up
the incline.
d. In case (b), what is the minimum force by which 75 N Force should be replaced with so that the
block does not move?
12. . Block A of mass m and block B of mass 2m are placed on a fixed triangular wedge by means of a
mass less, in extensible string and a frictionless pulley as shown in figure. The wedge is inclined at 45
to the horizontal on both sides. The coefficient of friction between block A and the wedge is 2/3 and
that between block B and the wedge is 1/3. If the blocks A and B are released from rest,

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 34

physics Classwork Problem

B
A

m 45  45  2m

Find (a) the acceleration of A, (b) tension in the string and

(c) the magnitude and direction of the force of friction acting on A
13. Two blocks M and m are arranged as shown in the figure. If M  50 kg, then determine the
minimum and maximum values of mass of block m to keep the heavy block M stationary.

M
S  0.60 m
K  0.50 o
37

14. A bar of mass m is placed on a triangular block of mass M as shown In figure. The friction
coefficient between the two surface is  and ground is smooth. Find the minimum and maximum
horizontal force F required to be applied on block so that the bar will not slip on the inclined surface
of block.
m
F
M


15. An object of mass 10 kg Is to be kept as rest on an inclined plane making an angle of 37° to the
horizontal by applying a force F along the plane upward as shown in the figure. The coefficient of
static friction between the object and the plane is 0.2. Find the magnitude of force F . [Take
g  10 ms2 ]
g  10 ms 1

s  0.2

37o

sin 37o  0.6

cos37o  0.8

16. Figure shows two blocks in contact sliding down an inclined surface of inclination 30°. The friction
coefficient between the block of mass 2 kg and the incline is 1  0.20 and that between the block of
mass 4 kg and the incline is  2  0.30 . Find the acceleration of 2.0 kg block, g = 10 ms 2 .

2 kg
4 kg

30o

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 35

physics Classwork Problem

17. Consider the situation shown in figure. The horizontal surface below the bigger block is smooth. The
coefficient of friction between the blocks is  . Find the minimum and the maximum force F that can
be applied in order to keep the smaller blocks at rest with respect to the bigger block.
A
m

F
C B
m
M

18. Determine the magnitude of frictional force and acceleration of the block in each of the following
cases:

5 kg 5 kg 12 kg

100 N 500 N
37o
s  0.4 s  0.4 500 N s  0.4
k  0.3 k  0.3 k  0.3

Case I Case II Case III

19. . A small bar starts sliding down an inclined plane forming an angle  with the horizontal. The
friction coefficient depends on the distance x covered as   kx where k is a constant. Find the
distance covered by the bar till it stops and its maximum velocity over this distance.
20. The masses of the blocks A , B and C shown in Fig. (a) are 4 kg, 2 kg, and 2 kg, respectively. Block
A moves with an acceleration of 2.5 ms 2 .
C

A A

C B

(a) (b)

1. Block C is removed from its position and placed on block A , shown in Fig. (b). What is now the
acceleration of block C ?
2. The positions of the blocks A and B is subsequently interchanged. Find the new acceleration of
C . The coefficient of friction is the same for all the contact surfaces.
21. Two blocks of masses M and m are arranged as shown in the figure. There is no friction between
ground and M
m

M F

Coefficients of static and kinetic friction between M and m are s and k , respectively.
1. Calculate maximum possible value of F so that both the bodies moves together.
2. Find the accelerations of the blocks if F is greater than that found in part 1.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 36

physics Classwork Problem

22. Find the accelerations a1 , a2 , and a3 of the three blocks shown in figure, if a horizontal force of 10
2
N is applied on (1) 2 kg block, (2) 3 kg block, (3) 7 kg block (Take g  10 ms )

1  0.2 2 kg a1
2  0.3 3 kg a2
3  0 7 kg a3

23. Consider three blocks placed one over the other as shown in figure. Let us now pull the blocks with
the forces of magnitudes 18 N, 100 N, and 15 N. Take m1  m2  m3  10 kg. If the coefficients of static
and kinetic friction between all contacting surfaces are s  0.3 and k  0.2 , respectively, find the

(a) Friction at each surface (b) Acceleration of the blocks

18 N
m1
m2 100 N

15 N m3

24. . In the situation shown in figure, there is no friction between 2 kg and ground.
1 kg   0.5
F 2 kg   0.2
2 kg

(a) For what maximum value of force F can all three blocks move together?
(b) Find the value of force F at which sliding starts at other rough surfaces,
(c) Find acceleration of all blocks, nature, and value of friction force for following value of force F :
(i) 10 N (ii) 18 N and (iii) 25 N.
25. . In the figure masses m1 , m2 and M are 20 kg, 5 kg and 50 kg respectively. The coefficient of
friction between M and ground is zero. The coefficient of friction between m1 , and M and that between
m2 and ground is 0.3. The pulleys and the strings are mass less. The string is perfectly horizontal
between P1 , and m1 , and also between P2 and m2 .
P1 m1

P2 M
F
m2

The string is perfectly vertical between P1 and P2 . An external horizontal force F is applied to the mass
M. (Take g  10 m/s 2 .) (a) Draw a free body diagram of mass M, clearly showing all the forces.
(b ) Let the magnitude of the force of friction between m1 and M be f1 and that between m2 , and ground
be f 2 . For a particular force F it is found that f1  2 f 2 ,. Find f1 and f 2 . Write equations of motion of all
the masses. Find F, tension in the string and accelerations of the masses.
Given : m1  20 kg , m2  5kg , M  50 kg and   0.3 and g  10 m/s 2

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 37

physics Classwork Problem

10. Circular Dynamics

1. A hemispherical bowl of radius R is rotating about its axis of symmetry which is kept vertical. A small ball
kept in the bowl rotates with the bowl without slipping on its surface. If the surface of the bowl is smooth and
the angle made by the radius through the ball with the vertical


R 
N
r A

mg

2. A simple pendulum has a bob of mass m attached to a string of length L fixed at its upper end. The bob
oscillates in a vertical circle. When the string makes an angle  with the vertical, the speed of the bob is v .
Find the tension in the string and the magnitude of net force on the bob at that instant.
3. Two blocks of mass m1 10kg and m2  5 kg connected to each other by a massless inextensible string of
length 0.3 m are placed along a diameter of the turn table. The coefficient of friction between the table and m1
is 0.5 while there is no friction between m2 and the table. The table is rotating with an angular velocity of
10 rads -1 about a vertical axis passing through its center O . The masses are placed along the diameter of the
table on either side of the centre O such that the mass m1 is at a distance of 0.124 m from O . The masses are
 
observed to be at rest with respect to an observer on the turn table. g  9.8 ms 2 .

(a) Calculate the frictional force on m1 .

(b) What should be the minimum angular speed of the turn table so that the masses will slip from this
position?
(c) How should the masses be placed with the string remaining taut so that there is no frictional force acting
on the mass m1 ?
4. A turn of radius 20 m is banked for the vehicles going at a speed of 36 km h 1 . If the coefficient of static
friction between the road and the tyre is 0.4, what are the possible speeds of a vehicle so that it neither slips
down nor skids up?
5. A 1500 kg car moving on a flat horizontal road negotiates a curve as shown . If the radius of the curve is
20.0 m and the coefficient of static friction between the tyres and dry pavement is 0.50, find the maximum
speed the car can have and still make the turn successfully.
6. A civil engineer ’wishes to redesign the curved roadway in such a way that a car will not have to rely on
friction to round the curve without skidding. In other words, a car moving at the designated speed can
negotiate the curve even when the road is covered with ice. Such a ramp is usually banked, which means that
the roadway is tilted toward the inside of the curve. Suppose the designated speed for the ramp is to be
10.0 ms  1 and the radius of the curve is 20.0 m . At what angle should the curve be banked?
7. A track consists of two circular parts. ABC and CDE of equal radius 100 m and joined smoothly as shown in
figure. Each part subtends a right angle at its centre. A cycle weighing 100 kg together with the rider travels at
a constant speed of 18 kmh  1 on the track.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 38

physics Classwork Problem

B
C E
A
D

1. Find the normal contact force by the road on the cycle when it is at B and at D.
2. Find the force of friction exerted by the track on the tyres when the cycle is at B , C . and D.
3. Find the normal force between the road and the cycle just before and just after the cycle crosses C.
4. What should be the minimum friction coefficient between the road and the tyre, which will ensure that the cyclist
can move with constant speed?
8. An inclined plane of angle  is fixed onto a horizontal turntable, with its line of greatest slope in same
plane as a diameter of turntable. A small block is placed on the inclined plane a distance r from the axis of
rotation of the turn-table and the coefficient of friction between the block and the inclined plane is  . The
turntable along with incline plane spins about its axis with constant minimum angular velocity  .

r

a. Find an expression for the minimum angular velocity, C . to prevent the block from sliding down the
plane, in terms of g, r,  and the angle of the plane  .
b. Now a block of same mass but having coefficient of friction (with inclined plane) 2 is kept instead of
the original block. Find the ratio of friction force acting between block and incline now to the friction force
acting in part (a).
9. A turn of radius 20 m is banked for the vehicle of mass 200 kg going at a speed of 10 ms 1 . Find the direction
and magnitude of frictional force acting on a vehicle if it moves with a speed (a) 5 m s  1 (b) 15 ms 1 . Take
g=10 ms2 and assume that friction is sufficient to prevent slipping.

10. Two balls of mass m1 and m2 suspended by two threads of lengths l1 and l2 at the end of a freely hanging
rod. Determine the angular velocity  at which the rod must be rotated about the vertical axis so that it
remains vertical.

l1 l2

m1
m2

11. A vehicle whose wheel track is 1.6 m wide and whose centre of gravity is 1 m above the road, centered
between the wheels, takes a curve whose radius is 50 m, on a level road. Taking g=10 ms2 , find the speed at
which the inner wheel would leave the road.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 39

physics Classwork Problem

11. Work Power Energy

1.Two unequal masses of 3 kg and 2 kg are attached at the two ends of a light inextensible string passing over
a smooth pulley as shown in figure. If the system is released from rest, find the work done by string on both the
2
blocks in 2 s. Take g  10ms

3 kg
2 kg
2. An inclined plane is moving up with constant velocity v . A block kept on the incline is at rest.

m  v


Calculate the work done by gravity, friction force, and normal reaction on the block in time interval t .
3. A force of 10 N is acting on a block of 20 kg on a horizontal surface with coefficient of friction  =0.2 .
Calculate the work done by the force.
m fs

Rough fs
m
F F M
M

Smoth

4. A block of mass m is placed on the block of mass M as shown in figure. The horizontal force F acts on
M during lime interval t . If the horizontal surface is smooth, assuming no relative sliding between the blocks,
find the
m
F
M

a. work done by friction on the blocks b. work done by F on the lower block system. The two blocks always
move together.
5.A block of mass m is kept over another block of mass M and the system rests on a horizontal surface. A
F
constant horizontal force F acting on the lower block produces an acceleration in the system. The
2m  M 
two blocks always move together. Consider displacement d of the system.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 40

physics Classwork Problem

m
F
M

a. Find the work done by friction on bigger block.

b. Find the coefficient of kinetic friction between the bigger block and the horizontal surface.
c. Find the frictional force acting on the smaller block.
d. Find the work done by the force of friction on the smaller block by the bigger block.
e. Find the work done by static friction on bigger block.
6.
100 m

F  120 N
20 kg 10 A B
kg

(i) Find work done by force F on A during 100 m displacement.

(ii) Find work done by force F on B during 100 m displacement.
(iii) Find work done by normal reaction on B and A during the given displacement.
(iv) Find out the kinetic energy of block A & B finally.
7. A bob of pendulum is released at rest from extreme position as shown in figure. Find work done by tension
from A to B , B to C and C to A .

8. In the above question find out work done by gravity from A to B and B to C .
9.

The system is released from rest. When 10 kg block reaches at ground then find .
(i) Work done by gravity on 10 kg (ii) Work done by gravity on 5 kg
(iii) Work done by tension on 10 kg (iv) Work done by tension on 5 kg .
10. The velocity block A of the system shown in figure is VA at any instant. Calculate velocity of block B at that
instant.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 41

physics Classwork Problem
11.a) A block of mass m is released from top of an incline plane of inclination  . The coefficient of friction
between the block and incline surface is     tan   . Find work done by normal reaction, gravity & friction,
when block moves from top to the bottom.

b)What is kinetic energy of block of mass m at bottom in above problem.

12. A block of mass m is placed on another block of mass M . Here M  30 kg, m  10 kg, and   0.5 and
there is no friction between the ground and M . At t  0 , a force F  400 N starts acting on M . Calculate the
work done by friction force on block m in the time interval of 2 s is seen by (i) observer 1, (II) observer 2.
Observer1

Observer 2

m
F
M

13.Consider the case where m  30 kg, M  10 kg,   0.5 . At t  0 the force F= 200 N starts acting on m .
Calculate the work done by friction force on block m in time interval of 2 s as seen by (a) (i) Observer 1, (ii)
Observer 2.(b) Now if the force F is increased to 800 N, then again calculate the work done.
Observer 1

Observer 2
F
m
 0
M
 
   
14. An object is displaced from position vector r1  2iˆ  3 ˆj m to position vector r2  4iˆ  6 ˆj m under a force

 
F  3x2iˆ  2 yˆj N . Calculate the work done by this force.
15. A person is pulling a mass m from the ground on a rough hemispherical surface up to the top of the
hemisphere with the help of a light in extensible string as shown in figure. The radius of the hemisphere is R .
Find out the work done by the tension in the string.The body is moved very very slowly such that its
acceleration is almost zero.


R m

16. A man (1) strands on an elevator moving with an initial velocity v0 and upward acceleration a . A man (2)
is standing on the elevator. Elevator starts with initial velocity v0 at time t  0 . Consider time interval t .

2 1

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 42

physics Classwork Problem
a. What is the work done by normal contact force and gravity on the man (1) as observe by man (2) standing on
the elevator and man (3) standing on ground?
b. What is the net work done by normal contact force between man (1) and elevator?
17. A block of mass m1 moves with an acceleration a12 relative to a trolley a2 as shown in figure.The block is
being observed by two observers (2) and (3). The observer (2) is at rest with respect to trolley which is moving
with acceleration a2 while the observer (3) is moving on ground with acceleration a3 . What is the work done
by the pseudo force as observed by the observers (2) and (3) on the block during time t ? Assume zero initial
velocities of the bodies and observers.
2
3
a12
1
a2
a3 Trolley

18. The kinetic energy of a body is increased by 21%. What is the percentage increase in the magnitude of
linear momentum of the body?
19. The only force acting on a 2.0 kg body as it moves along the x  axis varies as shown in figure. The velocity
1
of the body at x  0 is 4.0 ms .
(a) What is the kinetic energy of the body at x  3.0 m?
(b) At what value of x will the body have a kinetic energy of 8.0 J?
(c) What is the maximum kinetic energy attained by the body between x  0 and x  5.0 m?
Fx  N 

4
+1 2 3 4 5
0
x  m
-4

20. A body of mass m  0.3 kg is taken up an inclined plane to length l = 10 m and height h=5 m and then
allowed to slide down to the bottom again. The coefficient of friction between the body and the plane is  =
0.15. What is the (i) Work done by the gravitational force over the round trip?
(ii) Work done by the applied force over the upward journey?
(iii) Work done by frictional force over the round trip?
(iv)Kinetic energy of the body at the end of trip? How is the answer to
(iv) related to the first three answers?
21. A 4.00 kg particle moves from the origin to position C , having coordinate x  5.00 m and y  5.00 m. One
force on the particle is the gravitational force acting in the negative y direction. Using equation
 
W  F r cos   F r , calculate the work done by the gravitational force on the particle as it goes from O to
C along (a) OAC , (b) OBC , and (c) OC . Your results should all be identical.Why ?

B C
(5.00, 5.00)m

O A x

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 43

physics Classwork Problem

 
22. A force acting on a particle moving in the x  y plane is given by F  2 yiˆ  x ˆj N , where x and y are
2

in metres. The particle moves from the origin to a final position having coordinates x  5.00 m as shown in

figure. Calculate the work done by F on the particle as it moves along (a) OAC , (b) OBC , and (c) OC . (d) Is

F conservative or non-conservative? Explain.
y

B C
(5.00, 5.00)m

o A x

23. A uniform rod of mass M and length L is held vertically upright on a horizontal surface as shown in the
figure. Find the potential energy of the rod if the zero potential energy level is assumed at the horizontal
surface.

y
L M
O x

 a  b
24. The potential energy of a particle in a certain field has the form U   
2   
,where a and b are
r  r
positive constants and r is the distance from the centre of the field. Find the value of r0 corresponding to the
equilibrium position of the particle; examine whether this. position is stable.
25.(a) Find out positions of equilibrium and determine whether they are stable, unstable or neutral
F

E
A

B D F G x
C

25.(b)Identify the points of equilibrium and discuss their nature.

U

E
A

B D F G x
C

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 44

physics Classwork Problem
2
26. The potential energy function for a particle in a region of space is given by U  2x  3y3  2z , in joule.
Calculate the force acting on the particle at the point 1, 2,3 m . Assume that x , y and z are expressed in
metre.

 
27. Force acting on a particle in a conservative force field is F  2 xiˆ  3 y 2 ˆj . Find the potential energy
function, if it is zero at origin.
28. A chain of length l  80 cm and m  2 kg mass is hanging from the end of a plane so that the length l0 of
the vertical segment is 50 cm as shown in the figure. The other end of the chain is fixed by a nail. At a certain
instant the nail is pushed out, what is the velocity of the chain at the moment it completely slides off the plane?
Neglect the friction.

l0

29. One end of a light spring of natural length d and spring constant k is fixed on a rigid wall and the other is
attached to a smooth ring of mass m which can slide without friction on a vertical rod fixed at a distance d
from the wall. Initially the spring makes an angle of 37 o with the horizontal as shown in figure. When the
3
system is released from rest, find the speed of the ring when the spring becomes horizontal. Take sin 37 o    5
.

A Ring

h
o
37

d Rod

30. Consider the situation shown in figure. Mass of block A is m and that of block B is 2m . The force
constant of spring is K . Friction is absent everywhere. The system is released from rest with the spring
unstretched. Find

(a) the maximum extension of the spring xm .

xm
(b) the speed of block A when the extension in the spring is x  .
2
x
(c) net acceleration of block B when extension in the spring is x  m .
4

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 45

physics Classwork Problem
31. Two blocks A and B each having mass of 0.32 kg are connected by a light string passing over a
smooth pulley as shown in figure. The horizontal surface on which the block A slides is smooth. The block A
1
is attached to a spring of force constant 40 Nm whose other end is fixed to a support 0.40 m above the
horizontal surface.
S

A m

B m

Initially, when the system is released to move, the spring is vertical and unstretched. Find the velocity of the
1
block A at the instant it breaks off the surface below it. (Take g  10 ms ).
32. A system consists of two identical cubes, each of mass m , linked together by a compressed light spring of
force constant k . The cubes are also connected by a thread which is burnt at a certain moment. At what values
of initial compression x0 of the spring, will the lower cubes bounce up after the thread is burnt through?
m

33. A small disc A slides down with initial velocity equal to zero from the top of a smooth hill of height H
having a horizontal portion. What must be the height of the horizontal portion h to ensure the maximum
distance s covered by the disc? What is it equal to?
34. A block A of mass m is held at rest on a smooth horizontal floor. A light frictionless, small pulley is fixed at
a height of 6 m from the floor. A light inextensible string of length 16 m, connected with A passes over the
pulley and another identical block B is hung from the string.
Initial height of B is 5 m from the floor as shown in figure. When the system is released from rest, B starts to
move vertically downwards and A slides on the floor towards right.

P
y

6m
B
5m
A

(a) If at an instant, string makes an angle  with the horizontal, calculate relation between velocity u of A
and v of B .
 
(b) Calculate v when B strikes the floor. g  10 ms 2 .Take cos 37 o  0.8  
35. Two blocks arc connected by a string, as shown in fig. They are released from rest. Show that after they
have moved a distance L , their common speed is given by v  2  m2   m1  gL /  m1  m2  , in which  is the
coefficient of kinetic friction between the upper block and the surface. Assume that the pulley is mass less and
friction less.
m1

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 46

physics Classwork Problem

m2
36. An object is attached to vertical spring and slowly lowered to its equilibrium position. This stretched the
spring by an amount d. If the same object is attached to the same vertical spring but permitted to fall instead,
then through what distance does it stretch the spring?
37. A 3.2 kg block starts at rest and slides a distance d down a friction less 30.0 o incline, where it runs into a
spring. The block slides an additional 21.0 cm before it is brought to rest momentarily by compressing the
1
spring, whose spring constant is 431 Nm .
(a) What is the value of d ?
(b) What is the distance between the point of first contact and the point where the block's speed is the
greatest?

30 0
38. A body of mass m was slowly hauled up the hill as shown in the figure by a force F which at each point
was directed along a tangent to the trajectory. Find the work performed by this force, if the height of the hill is
h , the length of its base is l and the coefficient of friction is  .

F h
m

l
39. A body of mass m is thrown at an angle  to the horizontal with the initial velocity u . Find the mean
power developed by gravity over the whole time of motion of the body and the instantaneous power of gravity
as function of time.
40. A water pump, rated 400 W,has an efficiency of 75%. If it is employed to raise water through a height of 40
m, find the volume of water drawn in 10 min.
41. A vehicle of mass m is drawn by a constant power P. Express the instantaneous velocity v of the vehicle as
a function of displacement s, assuming the vehicle to start from rest.
42. A pump is required to lift 1000 kg of water per minute from a well 20 m deep and eject it at a rate, of 20
ms  1 .
(a) How much work is done in lifting water?
(b) How much work is done in giving it K E ?
(C) What HP (horsepower) engine is required for the purpose of lifting water?
43. An elevator has a mass of 1000 kg and carries a maximum load of 800 kg. A constant frictional force of 4000
N retards its upward motion, as shown in the figure.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 47

physics Classwork Problem

motor

Mg

(a) What must be the minimum power delivered by the motor to lift the elevator at a constant speed of 3 m/s ?
(b) What power must the motor deliver at any instant if it is designed to provide an upward acceleration of 1
2
m/s ?
44. A block moves with constant velocity 1 m / s under the action of horizontal force 50 N on a horizontal
surface. What is the power of external force and friction?

45. A stone is projected with velocity at an angle  with horizontal. Find out
(i) Average power of the gravity during time t
(ii) When is average power zero ?
(iii) What isPinst zero?
(iv) When is Pinst negative ?
(v) When is Pinst positive ?
46. A heavy particle is suspended by a string of length l from a fixed point O . The particle is given a
horizontal velocity v0 . The string slacks at some angle and the particle proceeds on a parabola. Find the value
v0 if the particle passes through the point of suspension.

47. A particle is suspended vertically from a point O by an inextensible massless string of length L . A vertical
L
line AB is at a distance of from O as shown, the particle is given a horizontal velocity u . At some point, its
8
motion ceases to be circular and eventually the object passes through the line AB . At the instant of crossing
AB , its velocity in horizontal. Find u .
O A
L
8
L

u B

48. A heavy particle hanging from a fixed point by a light inextensible string of length l is projected
horizontally with speed gl . find the speed of the particle and the inclination of the string to the vertical at the
instant of the motion when the tension in the string is equal to the weight of the particle.
49. A spherical ball of mass m is kept at the highest point in the space between two fixed, concentric spheres
A and B (see fig.) The smaller sphere A has a radius R and the space between the two spheres has a width
d . The ball has a diameter very slightly less than d . All surfaces are frictionless. The ball is given a gentle
push (towards the right in the figure). The angle made by the radius vector of the ball with the upward vertical
is denoted by  .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 48

physics Classwork Problem

Sphere B

d R O

Sphere A
(a) Express the total normal reaction force exerted by the spheres on the ball as a function of angle  .
(b) LetN A and N B denote the magnitudes of the normal reaction forces on the ball exerted by the spheres A
and B respectively. Sketch the variations of N A and N B as function of cos  in the range 0     by
drawing two separate graphs in your answer book, taking cos  on the horizontal axis.

50. A particle tied to the end of a string oscillates along a circular arc in a vertical plane. The other end of the
string is fixed at the centre of the circle. If the string has a breaking strength of twice the weight of the particle,
then
(a) Find the maximum distance that the particle can cover in one cycle of oscillation. The length of the
string is 50 cm .
(b) Find the tension in the extreme position
(c) Find the acceleration of the particle at the bottom and extreme position.

51. In the given system, when the ball of mass m is released, it will swing down the dotted arc.
(a) How fast will it reach the lowest point in its swing?
(b) A nail is located at a distance d below the point suspension. Show that d must be 0.6 l if the ball is swing
completely around a circle centered along nail.
(c) If d  0.6 l , find the change in tension in the string j after it touches the nail.
l A

52. A point mass m starts from rest and slides down the surface of a friction less solid sphere of radius r as
shown in figure. Measure angle from the vertical and potential energy from the top. Find
(a) The change in potential energy of the mass with angle
(b) The kinetic energy as a function of angle
(c) The radial and tangential accelerations as a function of angle
(d) The angle at which the mass flies off the sphere
(e) If there is friction between the mass and the sphere, does the mass fly off at a greater or lesser angle than in
part(d)?


r

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 49

physics Classwork Problem

12. Momentum
1. Four particles of mass 1 kg , 2 kg , 3 kg and 4 kg are placed at the four vertices A, B, C and D of a square
of side 1 m . Find the position of centre of mass of the particle.

2. A thin rod of length 3Lis bent at right angles at a distance L from one end. Locate the centre of mass of the
arrangement with respect to the corner. Take L  1.2 m .
3. If a homogeneous thin rod of mass m and l is given, from symmetry, we know that its centre of mass
coincides with the geometrical centre (mid-point) of the rod. Prove this by calculation for the centre of mass of
the rod.
4. Find the centre of mass of a thin semicircular ring of radius R .
5. Locate the centre of mass of a homogeneous semicircular disc of radius R and mass M .

Centre of mass of a complete circular disc (uniform) lies at the centre of the disc.

6. Find the centre of mass of a uniform solid cone of height h and semiangle  as shown in the figure.
7. A uniform lamina ABCDE is made from a square ABDE and an equilateral triangle BCD. Find the centre of
mass of the lamina.
y

A B

O x
a  C
 ,0
2  a
E D 2 3
a

8. Find the position of centre of mass of the uniform lamina.

Y

a
O X

R
9. A uniform disc of radius R , from which a hole of radius has been cut out from left of the centre and is
2
placed on the right of the centre of the disc. Find the CM of the resulting disc.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 50

physics Classwork Problem
y

 R  R 
  ,0  2 ,0 x
 2   
OR

10. Two particles A and B of mass 1 kg and 2 kg respectively are projected in the directions shown in figure
1 1
with speeds u A  200 ms and u B  55 ms . Initially they were 90 m apart. Find the maximum height
attained by the centre of mass of the particles. Assume acceleration due to gravity to be constant during entire
motion and take g  10 ms 2 .
B

uB
90m
uA

A
11. A shell is fired from a cannon with a speed of100 m / s an angle 60 with the horizontal (positive x
direction) . At the highest point of its trajectory, the shell explodes into two equal fragments One of the
fragments moves along the negative x -direction with a speed of 50 m / s . What is the speed of the other
fragment at the time or explosion.
12. A block of mass m is released from the top of a wedge of mass M as shown in figure. Find the displacement
of wedge on the horizontal ground when the block reaches the bottom of the wedge. Neglect friction
everywhere.
m
y
h M
x


13. A wooden plank of mass 20 kg is resting on a smooth horizontal floor. A man of mass 60 kg starts moving
from one end of the plank to the other end. The length of the plank is 10 m. Find the displacement of the plank
over the floor when the man reaches the other end of the plank.

10 m

14. A Plank of mass M and length L is at rest on a frictionless floor. The top surface of the plank has friction. At
one end of it a man of mass m is standing as shown in fig. If the man walks towards the other end, find the
distance, which the plank moves
(a) till the man reaches the centre of the plank,
(b) till the man reaches the other end of the plank

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 51

physics Classwork Problem
m

15.Two balls with masses m1  3 kg and m2  5 kg in the have initial velocities v1  v2  5 m/s directions . They
collide at the origin. (a) Find the velocity of the CM 3 s before the collision.
(b) Find the position of the CM 2 s after the collision.
m1
37o

v1

v2
m2

16. A 75 kg man stands at the rear end of a platform of mass 25 kg and length 4 m, which moves initially at
ˆ 1 over a frictionless surface. At t = 0, he walks at 2ms 1 relative to the platform and then stops at the front
4ims
end. During the period of walking, find the displacement of
(a) the platform ,(b) the man and (c) the center of mass
1
17. A projectile is fired at a speed of 100 ms at an angle of 37 above the horizontal. At the highest point,
the projectile breaks into two parts of mass ratio 1:3, the smaller coming to rest.Find the distance from the
launching point to the point where the heavier piece lands.
18. A man of mass m moves on a plank of mass M with a constant velocity u with respect to the plank, (i) If
the plank rests on a smooth horizontal surface, determine the velocity of the plank.
(ii) If the man travels a distance L with respect to the plank, find the distance travelled by the plank with respect
to the ground.
m
u CM

L
19. A man of mass m runs without sliding (means no kinetic friction only static friction)from rest from one end
of a boat of mass M and length M with an acceleration a relative to the boat. If the friction between water and
boat neglected, find the
y

Observer

m
M

x0 x
l

a. acceleration of CM of the system  M  m  b. acceleration of the man and boat

c. position of man at the time when he reaches to other end of the boat

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 52

physics Classwork Problem
d. frictional force e. work done by friction on boat f. total work done by friction
g. velocities of man and boat when the man reaches other end of the boat h. work done by man

20. A particle of mass m1  4 kg moves at 5 iˆ ms  1 , while 2 kg moves at 2iˆ ms  1 . Find the kinetic energy of
center of mass and the kinetic energy with respect to center of mass.
21. A liquid has been poured into a cylindrical vessel of mass M (the mass of the vessel bottom can be ignored)
and height H . The linear density of the liquid, which is the ratio of the mass of the liquid column to its height is
denoted by  . Calculate the height x of the column of liquid at which the common centre of mass of the liquid
H
plus the vessel is in the lowest position. Assume the centre of mass of vessel to be at from ground.
2

H x

22. A small sphere of radius R is held against the inner surface of larger sphere of radius 6R (as shown in
figure). The masses of large and small spheres are 4M and M respectively. This arrangement is placed on a
horizontal table. There is no friction between any surfaces of contact. The small sphere is now released.
y

6R
M
 L , 0 R x

4M

Find the coordinates of the centre of the large sphere, when the smaller sphere reaches the other extreme
position.
23. An explosion blows a rock into three parts. Two pieces go off at right angles to each other; 1.0 kg piece
with a velocity of 12 m / s and other 2.0 kg piece with a velocity of 8 m / s . If the third piece flies off with a
velocity of 40 m / s , compute the mass of the third piece.
24. A flat car of mass M is at rest on a frictionless floor with a child of mass m standing at its edge. If the child
jumps off from the car towards right with an initial velocity u , with respect to the car, find the velocity of the car
after its jump.
25. A flat car of mass M with a child of mass m is moving with a velocity v1 . The child jumps in the direction
of motion of car with a velocity u with respect to the car. Find the final velocities of the child and that of the car
after jump.
26. Two persons A and B . each of mass m are standing at the two ends of rail-road car of mass M . The
person A jumps to the left with a horizontal speed u with respect to the car. Thereafter, the person B jumps
to the right, again with the same horizontal speed u with respect to the car. Find the velocity of the car after
both the persons have jumped off.
m A Bm

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 53

physics Classwork Problem
27. Two identical buggies each of mass M moves one after due to inertia (without friction) with the some
velocity . A man of mass m rides the rear buggy. At a certain moment, the man jumps into the front buggy with
velocity relative to this buggy. Knowing that the mass of each buggy is equal to M . Find the velocity with which
the buggies will move after that.
v0 v0
m

M M

28. Two small discs of masses m1 and m 2 are connected by a weightless spring resting on a smooth horizontal
plane. The discs are set in motion with initial velocities v1 and v 2 , whose directions are mutually perpendicular
and in the same horizontal plane. Find the total energy E of the system with reference to the frame fixed to the
centre of mass.
v2

v1
m2 m1

29. Two smooth blocks of masses m1 and m 2 attached with an ideal spring of stiffness k and kept on a
frictional surface. If m1 is projected with a horizontal velocity v 0 , find the maximum compression of the
spring.
v0

m1 m2

30. Two identical blocks A and B , connected by a massless string, are placed on a frictionless horizontal plane.
A bullet having the same mass, moving with speed u , strikes block B from behind as shown. If the bullet gets
embedded into block B . then find
(a) the velocity of A , B , C after collision; (b) impulse on A due to tension in the string;
(c) impulse on C due to normal force of collision; (d) impulse on B due to normal force of collision.
m m
m u
A C B

31. A string AB of length 2 is fixed at A to a point on a smooth horizontal table. A particle of mass m attached to
B is initially at a distance  from A . The particle is projected horizontally with speed u at right angles to AB.
Find the impulsive tension J in the string when it becomes taut and the velocity of the particle immediately
afterwards.

u
B
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 54
physics Classwork Problem
32. Two particles A and B of equal mass m each are attached by a string of length 2l and initially placed
over a smooth horizontal table in the position shown in figure. Particle B is projected across the table with
speed u perpendicular to AB as shown in figure. Find the velocities of each particle after the string becomes
taut and the magnitude of the impulsive tension.
A

u
B
33.Three particles A, B and C of mass m , 2m and 3m respectively lie on a smooth horizontal table at the
vertices of an equilateral triangle. A and B as well as B and C are connected by light inextensible strings. C
is given a velocity v 0 parallel to AB as shown in figure. Show that A eventually begins to move with a velocity
2v0
.
19
A B
m 2m

3m v0
C

34. A cannon of mass m starts sliding freely down a smooth inclined plane at an angle  to the horizontal.
After the cannon covered the distance l , a shot was fired, the shell leaving the cannon in the horizontal
direction with a momentum P . As a consequence, the cannon is stopped. Assuming the mass of the shell to be
negligible, as compared to that of the cannon, determine the duration of the shot.

35. A ball is projected with a velocity u at an elevation from a point distance d from a smooth vertical wall in a
plane perpendicular to it. After rebounding from the wall, It returns to the point of projection, prove that
n 2 sin 2  gd 1  1/ e  . Hence, find the maximum distance d for which the ball can return to the point of
projection.

36. Two pendulum bobs of mass m and 2 m collide elastically at the lowest point in their motion. If both the
balls are released from a height H above the lowest point, to what heights do they rise for the first time after
collision?
37. Two blocks A and B of masses m and 2m respectively are placed on a smooth floor. They are connected
by a spring. A third block C of mass m moves with a velocity v 0 along the line joining A and B and collides
elastically with A , as shown in figure. At a certain instant of time t0 after collision, it is found that the
instantaneous velocities of A and B are the same. Further, at this instant the compression of the spring is
found to be x0 . Determine (i) the common velocity of A and B at time t0 and (ii) the spring constant.
B
C A
v0
m m 2m

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 55

physics Classwork Problem
38. A ball of negligible size and mass m is given a velocity v 0 on the centre of the cart which has a mass M and
is originally at rest. If the coefficient of restitution between the ball and walls A and B is e , determine the
velocity of the ball and the cart just after the ball strikes A . Also, determine the total time needed for the ball to
strike A , rebound, then strike B and rebound and then return to the centre of the cart. Neglect friction.

B v0 A

d d

39. A ball of mass m is dropped from a height h to hit the ground and then rebound to a certain height. The
process carries on and the ball continues to hit the ground time and again. The coefficient of restitution between
the ground and the ball is e . Find
(a)the average speed of the ball,
(b) the total momentum imparted to the floor by the ball,
(c) the total distance travelled by the ball before coming the rest.
(d) the total momentum imparted to the floor by the ball

40. A simple pendulum is suspended from a peg on a vertical wall. The pendulum is pulled away from the wall to
2
a horizontal position (see figure) and released. The ball hits the wall, the coefficient of restitution being
5
.What is the minimum number of collisions after which the amplitude of oscillation becomes less than 60
degrees?

41. Two balls of masses 2 kg and 4 kg are moved towards each other with velocities 4 m/s and 2 m/s,
respectively, on a frictionless surface. After colliding, the 2 kg ball returns back with velocity 2 m/s. Then find
(a) velocity of the 4 kg ball after collision(b) coefficient of restitution e ;
(c) impulse of deformation J D ;(d) maximum potential energy of deformation;
(e) impulse of reformation J R .
Just before
Just after
collision
collision
4 m/s 2 m/s 2 m/s
2 kg 4 kg 2 kg 4 kg

42. A ball of mass m makes an elastic collision with another identical ball at rest. Show that if the collision is
oblique, the bodies go at right angles to each other after collision.
43. A projectile is launched with initial velocity u making angle  with the horizontal. Assuming the
coefficient of restitution between the projectile and the ground to be e , find the following:
(a) the total horizontal distance travelled before it comes to rest.
(b) the total time lapsed before it comes to rest.
(c) the average horizontal velocity during the tenure.
th
(d) the launch angle of the projectile just after n impact.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 56

physics Classwork Problem
44. Two equal spheres of mass m are in contact on a smooth horizontal table. A third identical sphere impinges
2
symmetrically on them and is reduced to rest. Prove that e  and find the loss in KE .
3
45. Two spheres are moving towards each other. Both have the same radius but their masses are 2 kg and 4 kg.
1
If the velocities are 4 m/s and 2 m/s, respectively, and coefficient of restitution is e  , find
3
(a) the common velocity along the line of impact; (b) final velocities along line of impact;
(c) Impulse of deformation; (d) Impulse of reformation;
(e) Maximum potential energy of deformation; (f) loss in kinetic energy due to collision.
2 kg
4 m/s
A
R R
2 m/s
B
4 kg

46. Two smooth spheres A and B , of equal radius but masses , m and M are free to move on a horizontal
table. A is projected with speed u towards B which is at rest. On impact, the line joining their centres is
inclined at an angle  to the velocity of A before impact. If e is the coefficient of restitution between the
spheres, find the speed with which B begins to move. If A 's path after impact is perpendicular to its path
2 eM  m
before impact show that tan   .
M m
1
47. A ball of mass m  1kg falling vertically with a velocity v0  2 ms strikes a wedge of mass M  2 kg kept
on a smooth, horizontal surface as shown in figure. The coefficient of restitution between the ball and the wedge
1
is e  . Find the velocity of the wedge and the ball immediately after collision.
2
m

v0
M
30 o

48. A ball moving translationally collides elastically with an other stationary ball of the same mass. At the
moment of impact the angle between the straight line passing through the centres of the balls and the direction
of the initial motion of the striking ball is equal to   45 . Assuming the balls to be smooth, find the fraction 
of the kinetic energy of the striking ball that turned into potential energy at the moment of the maximum
deformation.
49. Two smooth spheres, A and B . having equal radii, lie on a horizontal table. A is of mass m and B is of
mass 3m . The spheres are projected towards each other with velocity vector 5iˆ  2 ˆj and 2iˆ  ˆj respectively
and when they collide the line joining their centers is parallel to the vector iˆ . If the coefficient of restitution
1
between A and B is . find the velocities after impact and the loss in kinetic energy caused by the collision.
3
Find also the magnitude of the impulses that act at the instant of impact.

50. A rocket, with an initial mass of 1000 kg , is launched vertically upwards from rest under gravity. The
rockets burns fuel at the rate of 10 kgs 1 . The burnt matter is ejected vertically downwards with a speed of
1
2000 ms relative to the rocket. If burning ceases after one minute find the maximum velocity of the rocket.
2
(Assume g to be constant and have a value 10 ms ).

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 57

physics Classwork Problem
51. A uniform chain of mass m and length l hangs on a thread and touches the surface of a table by its lower
end. Find the force exerted by the table on the chain when half of its length has fallen on the table. The fallen
part does not form heap.

52. A chain of length l and mass m lies in a pile on the floor. If its end A is raised vertically at a constant speed
v 0 , express in terms of the length y of chain which is off the floor at any given instant.
P
A

(a) the magnitude of the force P applied to end A .(b) energy lost during the lifting of the chain.
53. A rail road car of length L and mass ma when empty 15 moving freely on a horizontal track while being;
dm
loaded with sand from a stationary chute at a rate   . Assuming that the car was approaching the chute at
dt
a speed v 0 , determine
(a)the mass of the car and its load after the car has cleared the chute,(b)the speed of the car at that time.
54. A flat car of mass m0 starts moving to the right due to a constant horizontal force F . Sand spills on the flat
1
car from a stationary hopper. The rate of loading is constant and equals to  kgs . Find the time dependence of
the velocity and the acceleration of the flat car in the process of loading. The friction is negligibly small.

4 2
55. A cylindrical solid of mass 10 2 kg and cross-sectional area 10 m moving parallel to its axis (the X -axis)
3 1
with a uniform speed of 10 ms in the positive direction. At t =0 , its front face passes the plane x  0 . The
region to the right of this plane is filled with stationary dust particles of uniform density10 3 kgm 3 . When a
dust particle collides with the face of the cylinder, it sticks to its surface. Assuming that the dimensions of the
cylinder remains practically unchanged, and that the dust sticks only to the front face of the cylinder, find the x -
coordinate of the front of the cylinder at t  150 s .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 58

physics Classwork Problem

13. Rotational Dynamics

 r
1.The density of a sphere of mass M , radius R , varies with distance r from its centre as    0  1  .
 R
where 0 is a positive constant. Calculate the moment of inertia of this sphere about its diameter.
2. Four spheres, each of radius a and mass m , are placed with their centres on four corners of a square of side
b . Calculate the moment of inertia of the arrangement about any
(i) diagonal of the square and (ii) any side of the square.

a B
b
O 2

D C
R
3. A circular hole of radius is cut from a circular disc of radius R . The- disc lies in the xy  plane and its
2
centre coincides with the origin. If the remaining mass of the disc is M , then
i. determine the initial mass of the disc, and
ii. determine its moment of inertia about the z  axis.
y

R R/2
O x

4. Determine the point of application of force, when forces of 20 N and 30 N are acting on rod as shown
20 N

10 m 20 m D 70 m

A C B

30 N
5. A ladder of mass M and length L is supported in equilibrium against a smooth vertical wall and a rough
horizontal surface, as shown in figure. If  be the angle of inclination of the rod with the horizontal, then
calculate

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 59

physics Classwork Problem

Smooth
Rough

i. normal reaction of the wall on the ladder

ii. normal reaction of the ground on the ladder
iii. friction force between the ground and the ladder
iv. net force applied by the ground on the ladder
6.A uniform cube of side a and mass m rests on a rough horizontal table. A horizontal force F is applied normal
3a
to one of the faces at a point directly above the centre of the face, at a height above the base. What is the
4
minimum value of F for which the cube begins to topple about an edge?
7. A heavy block of length b and height h is placed at rest on a rough inclined plane of inclination  with the
horizontal, as shown in.
i. The normal reaction from the surface cannot pass through the centre mass. Why?
ii. If  is the coefficient of friction between the block and the inclined plane, then discuss the conditions of
translational and rotational equilibrium of the block.

b h


8. A tall block of mass M= 50 kg and base width b= 1 m and height h= 3 m is kept on a rough inclined surface

with coefficient of friction   0.8 . The angle of inclination with the horizontal is 37 . Determine whether the
block slides down or topples over.
9. The door of an almirah is 4 m high, 1 m wide and weighs 50 kg . The door is supported by two hinges
situated at a distance of 1.0 m from the ends. If the magnitude of each forces exerted by the hinges on the door
is equal, find this magnitude.
10. A horizontal force F is applied to a homogeneous rectangular block of mass m , width b and height h . The
block moves with constant velocity; the coefficient of friction is k .
b

H F
m
h

a. What is the greater height h at which the force F can be applied so that the block will slide without
tipping over?
b. Through which point on the bottom face of the block will the resultant of the friction and normal forces
H
act if h  ?
2

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 60

physics Classwork Problem
c. If the block is at rest and coefficient of static friction is s what are the various criteria for which sliding
or tipping occurs ?
11. . A motor rotates a pulley of radius 25 cm at 20 rpm. A rope around the pulley lifts a 50 kg block, as shown
in figure. What is the power output of the motor?
 
12. The ends A and B of a rod of length l have velocities of magnitudes v A  v and vB  2v , respectively. If

the inclination of vA relative to the rod is  , find the:

vA

A


vB

B

a)Inclination  of vB relative to the rod b)angular velocity of the rod
13. A block of mass m is attached at the; end of an inextensible string which wound over a rough pulley of mass
M and radius R . Assume the string does not slide over the pulley. Find the acceleration of the block when
released.
14. An extensible string is wound over a rough pulley of mass M 1 and radius R and a cylinder of mass M 2 and
radius R such that as the cylinder rolls down, the string unwounds over the pulley as well the cylinder. Find the
acceleration of cylinder M 2 .

M R

R
M2

15. A uniform cylinder of radius R is spinned about its axis to the angular velocity 0 and then placed into a
corner. The coefficient of friction between the corner walls and the cylinder is k . How many turns will the
cylinder accomplish before it stops?

0

16. A uniform rod AB of mass m and length 2l is suspended by two strings OA and OB of equal length
attached to a fixed point O . The rod is at rest in a horizontal position and each string makes an angle  with
the horizontal. If the string OB is cut, in what ratio the tension in OA will be instantaneously reduced?
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 61
physics Classwork Problem
O

 
A B

17. In the figure mass m1 slides without friction on the horizontal surface, the frictionless pulley is in the form of
a cylinder of mass M and radius R , and a string turns the pulley without slipping. Find the acceleration of
each mass, and tension in each part of the string.
m1 R M

m2
18. A uniform sphere of mass m and radius r rolls without sliding over a horizontal plane, rotating about a
horizontal axle OA. In the process, the centre of the sphere moves with a velocity v along a circle of radius R .
Find the kinetic energy of the sphere.
19. Two beads each of mass m are welded as shown. If the pivots are smooth, Find the ratio of translational and
rotational kinetic energy of system.
m m

l l
v
20. A uniform rod of length L and mass M is pivoted freely at one end as shown in figure.
(a) Find the angular acceleration of the rod when it is at angle  to the vertical.
(b) Assuming the rod to start from the vertical position, find the angular velocity as the function of  .
(c) Find the tangential linear acceleration of the free end when the rod is horizontal
o
21. A thin rod of mass M and length l is pivoted at one end. Initially the rod makes an angle of 60 with, the
vertical and is then released. Calculate the magnitude and direction of the force on the pivot when the rod is
horizontal.

22. A solid cylinder of mass m  4 kg and radius R  10 CM has two ropes wrapped around it, one near each
end. The cylinder is held horizontally by fixing the two free ends of the cords to the hooks on the ceiling
such that both the cords are exactly vertical. The cylinder is released to fall under gravity. Find the linear
acceleration of the cylinder.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 62

physics Classwork Problem

2T
T T

mg
23. A uniform circular disc of mass m , radius R and centre O is free to rotate about a smooth, horizontal axis
which is tangential to the disc at a point A . The disc is held in a vertical plane with A below O and is then
slightly displaced from this position. Find the angular velocity of the disc when its plane is next vertical.
24. A rough uniform rod, of mass m and length 4a , is held on a horizontal table perpendicularly to an edge of
the table, with a length 3a projecting horizontally over the edge. If the rod is released from rest and allowed to
turn about the edge without slipping then find its angular speed after turning through an angle  . Assuming;
that the rod has not started to slip, deduce an expression, in terms of  , for the angular acceleration, and hence
4
determine the reaction normal to the rod. Show that the rod begins to slip when tan   where  is the
13
coefficient of friction
2v
25. A uniform rod of length l is spinning with an angular velocity   while its centre of mass moves with a
l
velocity v . Find the velocity of the end A of the rod.
A

30 o


B

26. Due to slipping, points A and B on the rim of the disk have the velocities shown. Determine the velocities
of the centre point C and point F at this instant.
vB  6 ms 1
B

C 30 o

v A  2 ms 1
A
27. A rod of mass m is kept on a cylinder and sphere each of radius R .The masses of the sphere and cylinder are
m1 and m2 respectively. If the speed of the rod is V ,find the K.E of the system (rod+cylinder+sphere).Assume
that surface do not slide relative to each other
28. A uniform disc of radius R rolls perfectly over two horizontal plank A and B moving with velocities v
and 2v , respectively. Find the

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 63

physics Classwork Problem
v

R
C
2v

a. velocity of CM of the disc. b. angular velocity of the disc.

29. A uniform solid cylinder of mass M and radius 2R rests on a horizontal table top. A string is attached by a
yoke to a frictionless axle through the centre of the cylinder so that the cylinder can rotate about the axle. The
string runs over a pulley in the shape of a disk of mass M and radius R that is mounted on a frictionless axle
through its centre. A block of mass M is suspended from the free end of the string. The string does not slip over
the pulley surface and the cylinder rolls without slipping on the table top. After the system is released from rest,
what is the magnitude of the downward acceleration of the block?
M
R
2R M

30. A semi circular track of radius R  62.5 cm is cut in a block. Mass of block, having track, is M  1 kg and
rests over a smooth horizontal floor. A cylinder of radius r  10 cm and mass m  0.5 kg is hanging by thread
such that axes of cylinder and track are in same level and surface of cylinder is in contact with the track as
shown in figure. When the thread is burnt, cylinder starts to move down the track. Sufficient friction exists
between surface of cylinder and track, so that cylinder does not slip.

m
R

Calculate velocity of axis of cylinder and velocity of the block when it reaches bottom of the track. Also find
force applied by block on the floor at that moment g  10 ms  2
.
31. The disc of mass m , radius r is confined to roll without slipping at A and B . If the plates have the
velocities shown, determine the angular velocity of the disc. Also find the velocity of centre of mass of disc, the
location of instantaneous centre of zero velocity and total energy of the disc.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 64

physics Classwork Problem
v
A
r

B 2v

32. A rotating disc moves in the positive direction of the x axis. Find the equation y  x  describing the
position of the instantaneous axis of rotation, if at the initial moment, the centre c of the disc was located at the
point O after which it moved with constant velocity v while the disc started rotating counter-clockwise with
a constant angular acceleration  . Assume the initial angular velocity to be zero.
y

O c v x

33. Draw the direction of friction force in the following cases. If rolling object is
F
R
R/2
O

P
i. a ring ii. a disc iii. a solid sphere iv. a hollow sphere
34. A force of magnitude F is acting on a rolling body of mass m and radius R as shown in figure. What
happens if the pulling force F removed?
F
r

Discuss the different possibilities when the pulling force acts on the body.
i) At centre ii) Above centre iii) Below centre
35. . Consider a wheel rolls without slipping and its centre moves with constant acceleration a. Find the
accelerations of points O , P , Q and S when linear velocity of the centre of wheel is v .
Q

 v y
O a S

x
P

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 65

physics Classwork Problem
36 A force of magnitude F is acting on a rolling body of mass m and radius R as shown in Fig. What happens
when it enters on a smooth surface?

Rough Smooth

37 A rolling body of mass m and radius R is rolling on a rough surface without any pulling force as shown in
figure. What happens when it enters on a smooth surface?

0
v0

Rough Smooth
38 A uniform cylinder (mass M ) of radius R is kept on an accelerating platform (mass M ) as shown in Fig. If
the cylinder rolls without slipping on the platform, determine the magnitude of acceleration of the centre of
mass of the cylinder. Assuming the coefficient of friction   0.40 , determine the maximum acceleration the
platform may have without slip between the cylinder and the platform.
M

M a

39 The arrangement shown in figure consists of two identical uniform solid cylinders, each of mass M , radius
R on which two light threads are wound symmetrically. Find the tension of each thread in the process of
motion. The friction in the axle of the upper cylinder is assumed to be absent.

M R

R
M
2
40 A thin light thread is wound on a reel of mass 3 kg and moment of inertia 0.6 kgm . The inner radius is
R  10 cm and peripheral radius is 2R  20 cm . The reel is placed on a rough table and the friction is enough to
prevent slipping. Find the acceleration of the centre of reel and of hanging mass of 1 kg .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 66

physics Classwork Problem

2R R

41 A thread is wound around two discs on either sides. The pulley and the two discs have the same mass and
radius. There is no slipping at the pulley and no friction at the hinge. Find out the accelerations of the two discs
and the angular acceleration of the pulley.

1 2

o
42 A sphere of mass 10 kg is placed on the inclined surface of a rough wedge of inclination 30 . If the mass of the
wedge is also 10 kg, calculate the acceleration of the wedge when sphere is allowed to roll down without
2
slipping. Neglect friction between ground and wedge. Take g  10 ms .

30 o
43. In the arrangement shown a spool of mass m , moment of inertia i is placed on a plank of mass M . There
is no friction between the plank and the surface inclined at an angle  . If friction between spool and plank is
m
sufficient enough to prevent slipping, find the angular acceleration of the spool and the value of ratio   for
M 
which plank will

R 2R


(i) ascend (ii) descend (iii) will remain stationary
44 In the arrangement shown in figure, the string is wrapped around a uniform cylinder which rolls without
slipping. The other end of the string is passed over a light, frictionless pulley and is connected to a falling weight.
Find the acceleration of the falling mass m in terms of only the mass of the cylinder M , the mass m and g .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 67

physics Classwork Problem

m1

45 A cylinder of mass M , radius R is sandwiched between two planks having masses M and 2M . Two
constant horizontal forces F and 2F are applied on the planks as shown. Determine the acceleration of the
centre of mass of cylinder, top plank and bottom plank if there is no slipping at the top and bottom of cylinder.
Also find the friction between the planks and cylinder and the angular acceleration of the cylinder.
M
F

M
R
2M
2F Smooth

46 A solid sphere of mass M and radius R rolls without slipping on a horizontal surface shown in the figure.
Find the total angular momentum of the sphere with respect to the origin O fixed on the ground.


v

O
47 Find the angular momentum of a disc about the axis shown in fig. in the following situations.
y
(c)
(d) y 
(a) z z
(b)
' M
 v M
R v
d R
M R d
M R O
x O
x
d z z

48. A billiard ball (of radius R ) initially at rest is given a sharp impulse by a cue. The cue is held horizontally at
a distance h above the central line as shown figure. The ball leaves the cue with a speed V0 . It rolls and
9 4
slides while moving forward and eventually acquires a final speed of V0 . Show that h  R .
7 5


v0

 mg

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 68

physics Classwork Problem

2
49. A man of mass 100 kg stands at the rim of a turntable of radius 2 m and moment of inertia 4000 kg m
mounted on a vertical frictionless shaft at its centre. The whole system is initially at rest .The man now walks
along the outer edge of the turn able with a velocity of 1 m/s relative to the earth.
a. With what angular velocity and in what direction does the turntable rotate?
b. Through what angle will it have rotated when the man reaches his initial position on the turntable?
c. Through what angle will it have rotated when the man reaches his initial position relative to the earth?
1
50. A man of mass m  80 kg runs at a speed u  4 ms along the tangent to a disc-shaped platform of mass
M  160 kg and radius R  2 m. The platform is initially at rest but can rotate freely about an axis through its
1
center. Take I  MR 2 .
2

(a) Find the angular velocity of the platform after the man jumps on.
(b) He then walks to the center. Find the new angular velocity. Treat the man as a point particle.
51. A uniform rod of mass m  5.0 kg and length = 90 CM rests on a smooth horizontal surface. One of the ends
of the rod is stuck with Impulse J  3.0 Ns in a horizontal direction perpendicular to the rod as shown in fig. As
a result the rod obtains momentum p  3.0 Ns. Find
a. the angular velocity of the rod about a vertical axis passing through its centre of mass.

b. instantaneous velocity of point A s later.
8
c. the force with which one-half of the rod will act on the other in the process of motion.


vCM B
A
mg C x

J N
At time t  0

52. A homogeneous rod AB of Length L  1.8 m and mass M is pivoted at the centre O in such a way that it
can rotate freely in the vertical plane (shown in figure). The rod is initially in the horizontal position. An insect
S of the same mass M falls vertically with speed V on the point C , midway between the points O and B .
Immediately after falling, the insect moves towards the end B such that the rod rotates with a constant angular
velocity  .
S
V

A B
O C
L L L
2 4 4
(a) Determine the angular velocity  in terms of V and L .
(b) If the insect reaches the end B when the rod has turned through an angle of 90o , determine V .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 69

physics Classwork Problem
53. A vertically oriented uniform rod of mass M and length l can rotate about its upper end. A horizontally
flying bullet of mass m strikes the lower end of the rod and gets stuck in It; as a result, the rod swings through
an angle a Assuming that m  M , find
a. the velocity of the flying bullet
b. the momentum change in the system bullet rod during the impact; what causes that change of
momentum;
c. at what distance x from the upper end of the rod the bullet must strike for the momentum of the system
bullet-rod to remain constant increases or decreases during the Impact.
54. A boy of mass m runs on ice with velocity v0 and steps on the end of a plank of length l and mass M which
is perpendicular to his path.
M

m
v0
(a)Describe quantitatively the motion of the system after the boy is on the plank. Neglect friction with the
ice.
(b)One point on the plank is at rest immediately after the collision. Where is it?
55. A rod AB of mass M and length L is lying on a horizontal frictionless surface. A particle of mass m
travelling along the surface hits the end A of the rod with a velocity v0 in a direction perpendicular to AB .
The collision is completely elastic. After the collision the particle comes to rest.
a. Find the ratio m / M .
b. A point P on the rod is at rest immediately after the collision. Find the distance AP .
c. Find the linear speed of a point P at time  L / 3v0 after the collision.
56. Two uniform rods A and B or length 0.6 m each and of masses 0.01 kg and 0.02 kg respectively are rigidly
joined end to end. The combination is pivoted at the lighter end, P as shown in figure, such that it can freely
rotate about point P in a vertical plane. A small object of mass 0.05 kg, moving horizontally, hits the lower end
of the combination and sticks to it. What should be the velocity of the object so that the system could just be
raised to the horizontal position?
P

l A

l B

m v

57. Consider a uniform solid cylinder of mass m and radius r rolling (without slipping) down at an angle 
with the horizontal, as shown in Fig.. Find the speed of its centre of mass when the cylinder reaches the bottom.

h

58. A sphere of mass m and radius R is placed at rest on a plank of mass M which is placed on a smooth
horizontal surface as shown in the figure. The coefficient of friction between the sphere and the plank is  . At
t  0 , a horizontal velocity v0 is given to the plank. Find the time after which the sphere starts rolling.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 70

physics Classwork Problem
m
R

M
v0

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 71

physics Classwork Problem

14. Gravitation
1. Three identical bodies, each of mass m, are located at the vertices of an equilateral triangle with side r . At
what speed must they move if they all revolve under the influence of one another's gravitation in a circular orbit
circumscribing the triangle while still preserving the equilateral triangle?

2. A solid sphere of lead has mass M and radius R . A spherical hollow is dug out from it . Its boundary passing
through the centre also touches the boundary of the solid sphere. Deduce the gravitational force on a mass m
placed at P , which is at a distance r from O alone the line centres.

O P
O
r
R

3. Find the field strength at a point along the axis of a thin rod of length L and mass M, at a distance d from one
end.
4. There are two concentric shells of masses M 1 , and M2 and radii R1 and R2 . Find the force on a particle of
mass m when the particle is located at
(i) r1  R2 (ii) R1  r2  R2 (iii) r3  R1

5. A sphere of radius R has its centre at the origin. It has uniform mass density  0 except that there is a
1 1
spherical hole of radius r  R whose centre is at x  R , as shown in figure. Find the gravitational field at
2 2
points on the x -axis for x  R .
y

r
x
R

6. Calculate the gravitational field due to a uniform rod AB at a point P at perpendicular distance a from the
rod as shown in figure. Assume that the rod has a linear mass density  .
A


a
N  P

7. Mass M is distributed uniformly along a line of length 2 L . A particle of mass m 0 is at a point that is at
distance a above the centre of the line on its perpendicular bisector (point P in figure). For the

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 72

physics Classwork Problem
gravitational force that the line exerts on the particle, calculate the component perpendicular and parallel to the
line. What happens when a  L ?
P

a
L L

8. .Calculate the gravitational field at the centre of a uniform wire in the form of an arc of radious r. The wire
subtends an angle  at the centre
9. Calculate the gravitational field at point P that lies on the axis of a uniformly disc at a distance x from the
centre. Assume the disc to have a radius R and uniform surface mass density  .

10. Calculate the gravitational field intensity at the centre of the base of a hollow hemisphere of mass M and
radius R. (Assume the base of hemisphere to be open)

11. (a) Find the height from the earth's surface where g will be 25% of its value on the surface of earth (R =6400
km), (b) Find the percentage increase in the value of g at a depth 4 km from the surface of earth.

12. On a planet whose size is the same and mass four times as that of our earth, find the amount of done to lift
2
3 kg mass vertically upwards through 3 m stance on the planet. The value of g on the surface of earth 10 m s .
13. There are two thin wire rings, each of radius R, whose axes coincide. The masses of the rings are m1 and
m 2 . Find the gravitational potential difference between the centres of the rings separated by a distance a . Also
calculate the work done to move a mass m 0 from centre of first ring to the centre of other ring.
14. Calculate the gravitational field intensity and potential at the centre of the base of a solid hemisphere of
mass m. radius R.

15. Find the gravitational field E g for the potential V  kxy .
16. Gravitational potential in some region of space is V  x, y , z   V0 exp  az  cos ax , where a is a positive
constant. Find the gravitational field everywhere.

17. A Gravitational field is given by E g   k(yiˆ  xj)
ˆ .Find the gravitations potential generating such a field.


18. Find the potential function V  x, y  of a gravitation field Eg  2axyiˆ  a x  y
2 2
 ˆj where a is a constant.
19. Find the gravitational potential energy of a point mass m 0 and a thin uniform rod of mass m0 and length l , if
they are located along a straight line at a distance a measured from the centre of the rod.
m0 m0

20. Distance between centres of two stars is 10a. The masses of these stars are M and 16M and their radii are a
and 2a, respectively. A body is fired straight from the surface of the larger star towards the smaller star. What
should be its minimum initial speed to reach the surface of the smaller star?
21. Calculate the self-gravitational potential energy of matter forming (a) a thin uniform shell of mass M and
radius R, and (b) a uniform sphere of mass m and radius R.
22. Two particles of masses m 1 and m 2 , initially at rest at infinite distance from each other, move under the
action of mutual gravitational pull. Show that at any instant their relative velocity of approach is
2G  m1  m2  / R2
, where R is their separation at that instant.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 73

physics Classwork Problem
R
23. Inside a fixed sphere of radius R and uniform density  , there is spherical cavity of radius such that
2
surface of the cavity passes through the centre of the sphere as shown in figure. A particle of mass m is released
from rest at centre B of the cavity. Calculate velocity with which particle strikes the centre .A of the sphere.
Neglect earth's gravity. Initially sphere and particle are at rest.
y

R
A 2
B x
R

6
24. Gravitational acceleration on the surface of a planet is g. where g is the gravitational acceleration on the
11
2
surface of the earth. The average mass density of the planet is times that of the earth. If the escape speed on
3
1 1
the surface of the earth is taken to be 11 kms , the escape speed on the surface of the planet in kms will be.
R
25. A very small groove is made in the earth, and a particle of mass m0 is placed at distance from the centre.
2
Find the escape speed of the particle from that place.
Me , R

R/2
m0

x2 y2
26. Suppose a planet is revolving around the sun in an elliptical path given by   1 Find time period of
a2 b2
revolution. Angular momentum of the planet about the sun is L of mass m
7
27. The Earth and Jupiter are two planets of the sun. The orbital radius the earth is 10 m and that of Jupiter is
4107 m. If the time period of revolution of earth is T = 365 days, find time period of revolution of the Jupiter.
28. Let the speed of the planet at the perihelion P in Fig. be v P and the Sun-planet distance SP be rP .Relate
rP , v P to the corresponding quantities at the aphelion  rA , vA  . Will the planet take equal times to traverse
BAC and CPB ?

P S S' A

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 74

physics Classwork Problem
29. A rocket starts vertically upward with speed v0 . Show that its speed v at height h is given by
2hg
v02  v 2  where R is the radius of the earth and g is acceleration due gravity at earth's surface. Deduce an
h
1
R
expression for maximum height reached by a rocket fired with speed 0.9 times the escape velocity.

R
30. There is a crater of depth on the surface of the moon (radius R). A projectile is fired vertically upward
100
from the crater with velocity, which is equal to the escape velocity v from the surface of the moon. Find the
maximum height attained by the projectile.
31. A sky lab of mass 2 103 kg is first launched from the surface of earth in a circular orbit of the radius 2R
(from the centre of earth) and then it is shifted from this circular orbit to another circular orbit of radius 3R.
Calculate the minimum energy required
(a) to place the lab in the first orbit
(b) to shift the lab from first orbit to the second orbit, Given R = 6400 km and g  10 ms2 .

32. Two satellites A and B of equal move in the equatorial plane of the earth, close to earth surface. Satellite A
moves in the same direction as that’s of the rotation of the earth while satellite B moves in the opposite
direction. Calculate the ratio of the kinetic energy of B to that of A in the reference frame fixed to the earth. (
6
g  9.8 m s 2 and radius of the earth = 6.37 10 km )

4
33. A satellite is revolving in a circular equatorial orbit of radius R  2 10 km from cast to west. Calculate the
interval after which it will appear at the same equatorial town. Given that the radius of the earth = 6400 km and
2
g (acceleration due to gravity) = 10 m s .
34. A satellite is launched into a circular orbit 1600 km above the surface of the earth. Find the period of
-2
revolution if the radius of the earth is R = 6400 km and the acceleration due to gravity is 9.8 m s . At what
height from the ground should it be launched so that it may appear stationary over a point on the earth’s
equator?

35. Two satellites S1 and S 2 revolve round a planet in coplanar circular orbits in the same sense. Their
periods of revolution are 1 h and 8 h respectively. The radius of the orbit of S1 is 104 km. When S 2 is closest to
S1 . Find
(a) the speed of S 2 relative to S1
(b) the angular speed of S 2 as actually observed by an astronaut in S1 .

36. An artificial satellite is moving in a circular orbit around the earth with a speed equal to half the magnitude
of escape velocity from the earth.
(a) Determine the height of the satellite above the earth's surface.
(b) If the satellite is stopped suddenly in its orbit and allowed to fall freely onto the earth, find the speed
with which it hits the surface of the earth.
37. In a double star, two stars (one of mass m and the other of 2m) distant d apart rotate about their common
centre of mass. Deduce an expression of the period of revolution. Show that the ratio of their angular
momentum about the centre of mass is the same as the ratio of their kinetic energies.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 75

physics Classwork Problem

15. Fluid Mechanics

1. A hollow metallic sphere has inner and outer radii, respectively, as 5 cm and 10 cm. If the mass of the sphere
is 2.5 kg, find (a) density of the material, (b) relative density of the material of the sphere.
2. Two immiscible of densities 2.5 g / cm3 and 0.8 g / cm3 are taken in the ratio of their masses as 2:3
respectively. Find the average density of the liquid combination.
3. Two miscible liquids of densities 1.2 gm/cc and 1.4 gm/cc are mixed with a proportion ratio of their volumes
equal to 3:5. What is the density of resulting liquid?
4. Two communicating cylindrical tubes contain mercury. The diameter of one vessel is four times larger than
the diameter of the other. A column of water of height 70 cm is poured into the narrow vessel. How much will
the mercury level rise in the other vessel and how much will it sink in the narrow one? How much will the
mercury level rise in the narrow vessel, if a column of water of the same height is poured into the broad vessel?
Original Hg level

Water
D x
y
A B

Hg

5. . In a simple hydraulic press, the cross-sectional area of the two cylinders is 5  10 4 m 2 and 10 2 m 2
respectively. A force of 20 N is applied at the small plunger.
F1
Area  A2

Area D
 A1 F2

A B
Liqui

a. What is the pressure produced in the cylinders?

b. What is the thrust exerted on the large plunger?
c. How much work is done by the operator, if the small plunger moves down 0.1 m?
6. A container ' A ' is having some fluid of density o .It is connected with a U-tube manometer shown in Fig .
Find the pressure of the container in both the cases given.

h2


A A
h1
o o h2
h1 C
BC B 
Case I Case II
7. Find out pressures at points A and B . Also find angle ‘  ’. A zig-zag tube open at N , having liquids of
densities 1 ,  2 and  3 , is placed in a vertical plane as shown in Fig. (The pressure at M is equal to
atmospheric pressure.)

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 76

physics Classwork Problem
N

l l
1  2 h
 
M B
8. A circular tube uniform of uniform cross section is filled with two liquids of densities 1 and  2 such that
half of each liquid occupies a quarter of volume of the tube. If the line joining the free surfaces of the liquid
makes an angle  with horizontal, find the value of  .

 2

1
9.Consider a regular tank of size  l  b  filled with a liquid of density  to a height H as shown in Fig. Find
the force at the base and on the walls of the tank.

 H

10. In the given figure the container slides down with acceleration ' a ' on an incline ' ' . Liquid is stationary
with respect to container. Find out-
(i) Angle made by surface of liquid with horizontal plane.
(ii) Angle if a  g sin 


11. Figure shows a cross-sectional view of a masonry dam whose length perpendicular to the diagram is 30 m.
The depth of water behind the dam is 10 m. The masonry of which the dam is constructed has a density of 3000
kg/m 3 .
a. Find the dimensions x and 2 x if the weight of the dam is to be 10 times the horizontal force exerted on it by
water.
b. Check the stability of the dam with respect to its overturning about the edge through point O.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 77

physics Classwork Problem
x

Dam 12 m

10 m Water

2x
12. Water and liquid are filled up behind a square wall of side l . Find out

A
h1  5 m Square wall
Water Side l  10 m

B h2  5 m
Liquid

2
C
a. pressures at A , B and C ;
b. forces in part AB and BC ;
c. total force and point of application of force. (neglect atmospheric pressure in every calculation)
13. Find the net downward thrust on the inclined surface of a bucket full of water of height h and radii a and
b.
b

h
a

14. Water is retained by a curved gate AB .Compute the horizontal and vertical components of the resultant of
the hydrostatic pressure distribution on the gate AB , which is a quarter of a cylinder. Assume that the gate is 4
m wide.
Water,
  1000kg / m3
1.5 m
B
3m

C
A
15. A solid hemisphere of radius R is made to just sink in a liquid of density  . Find

a. the vertical thrust on the curved surface

b. the vertical thrust on the flat surface
c. the side thrust on the hemisphere
d. the total hydrostatic force acting on the hemisphere.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 78

physics Classwork Problem
16. A cylindrical vessel of diameter 0.3 m height 0.6 m is filled two-thirds with a liquid of specific gravity 0.8.
The vessel is rotated about its axis. a. Determine speed of rotation when the liquid just starts spilling. Find the
speed of rotation when the base is just visible. What is the percentage of liquid left in the vessel?

17. A U-tube rotates with angular velocity co about the vertical axis AB. What is the difference in fluid level ' h '
in terms of  , the radii r1 and r2 and the fluid density  ?
18. A piece of ice is floating in water. What will happen to the level of water when all ice melts? What will
happen if the beaker is filled not with water but with liquid?
a. denser than water, b. lighter than water?
19. A glass sphere has a cavity inside it. Where placed in water, it floats with 20% of its volume above the water
surface. Find the volume of the cavity as a fraction of total volume (density of glass = 2.5 g/cc).
20. A rod of length 6 m has a mass of 12 kg. It is hinged at one end of the rod at a distance of 3 m below the
water surface.
Q
B

Y 
G
 B
G W
P X

(a) What must be the weight of a block that is attached to the other end of the rod so that 5 m of the
rod’s length is under water?
(b) Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted by the hinge on the rod. The specific
gravity of the material of rod is 0.5.
21. A solid sphere of mass m  2 kg and specific gravity s  0.5 is held stationary relative to a tank filled with
water as shown. The tank is accelerating vertically upward with acceleration a  2 ms 2 .

(a)Calculate tension in the thread connected between the sphere and the bottom of the tank.
(b)If the thread snaps, calculate acceleration of the sphere with respect to the tank (density of water is
 2
  1000 kg m 3 ) g  10 ms . 
22. . A critical block of wood of edge 3 cm floats in water. The lower surface of the cube just touches the free
end of a vertical spring fixed at the bottom of the pot. Find the maximum weight that can be put on the block
without wetting it. Density of wood 800 kg / m3 and spring constant of the spring  50 N / m3 .Take g  10 m / s 2
23.A broad pipe having a radius 10 cm branches into two pipes of radii 5 cm and 3 cm. If the velocity of flowing
water in the pipe of radius 3 cm is 5 cm/s. determine the velocities of water in the remaining two pipes. Given
that the rate of discharge through the main branch is 600 cm3 /s .
24. A horizontal cylinder of length l contains water. On the left a constant force F is applied on the piston and
on the right there is a small hole of area a . What is the velocity of the piston? Hence, calculate the work done in
emptying the vessel in time t .
25. A wide vessel with a small hole in the bottom is filled with water and kerosene. Find the velocity of water
flow if the thickness of water layer is h1  30 cm and that of kerosene is h2  20 cm.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 79

physics Classwork Problem

Kerosene 2 h2
Water 2 1 h1

hole reference

V1

26. . On the opposite sides of a wide vertical vessel filled with water, two identical holes are opened, each
having cross-sectional area ' a ' . The height difference between them is equal to h. Find the resultant force of
reaction water flowing out of vessel.

27.The side wall of a wide vertical vessel of height h  75 cm has a narrow slit (vertical) running all the way
down to the bottom of the vessel.

h A dx

The length of the slit is l  50 m and the width is b  1 mm. With the slit closed, water is filled to the top.
Find the resultant reaction force of water coming out as the slit is opened.
28. A tank is filled with liquid upto height ‘H’.A small hole is made at the bottom of the tank.Let t1 be the time
t1
taken to empty first half of the tank and t2 time taken to empty rest half of the tank.Then find
t2
29. A fixed container of height ‘H’ with large cross sectional area ‘A’ is completely filled with water.Two small
orifice of cross-sectional area ‘a’ are made,one at the bottom and the other on the vertical side of the container
H H
at a distance from top of the container.Find the time taken by the water level to reach a height of from
2 2
the bottom of the bottom of the container

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 80

physics Classwork Problem

16. Properties of Matter

1. Two rods A and B , each of equal length but different materials are suspended from a common
support as shown in the figure. The rods A and B can support a maximum load of W1  600 N and
W2  6000 N, respectively. If their cross-sectional areas are A1  10 mm 2 and A2  1000 mm 2 ,
respectively, then identify the stronger material.

A B

W1 W2

2. A bar of cross-section A is subjected to equal and opposite tensile forces at its ends. Consider a
plane section of the bar whose normal makes an angle  with the axis of the bar.

F  F

a. What is the tensile stress on the plane?

b. What is the shearing stress on this plane?
c. For what value of  is the tensile stress maximum?
d. For what value of  is the shearing stress maximum?
3. (a) Estimate the force with which a karate master strikes a board, assuming the hand's speed at
-1 -1
the moment of impact is 10.0 ms decreasing to 1.00 ms during a 0.002 s time internal of contact
between the hand and the board. The mass of his hand and arm is 1.00 kg. (b) Estimate the shear,
assuming this force it exerted on a 1.00 cm thick pine board that is 10.0 m wide, (c) If the maximum
6 2
shear stress a pine board can support before breaking is 3.60 10 N/m , will the board break?
-1
4. A 30.0 kg hammer, moving with speed 20.0 ms , strikes a steel spike 2.30 cm in diameter. The
-1
hammer rebounds with speed 10.0 ms after 0.110 s. What is the average strain in the spike
during the impact?
5. A rod of uniform cross-sectional area A length L has a weight W. It is suspended vertically from
a support. If the material of the rod is homogeneous and its modulus of elasticity is Y then
determine the total elongation produced in the rod due to its own weight.
6. A uniform rod of length L and mass M is pulled horizontally on a smooth surface with a force F.
Determine the elongation of rod if Young’s modulus of the material is Y .
7. Find out elongation in rod if Y  2 1011 N / m 2 and   104 kg / m3
  400 rad/sec

1.5 m
r  0.1m

6 2
8. A metal cube of side 10 cm is subjected to a shearing stress of10 N/m . Calculate the modulus
of rigidity if the top of the cube is displaced by 0.05 cm with respect to its bottom
9. Calculate the density of water near the bottom of the ocean where the pressure is about 500 atm
9 2
and density of water is 1025 kg/m 3 approximately. Take bulk modulus of water as 2.0 10 N/m .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 81

physics Classwork Problem
10. A steel bar ABCD 40 cm long is made up of three parts AB. BC and CD, as shown in Fig . The rod
is subjected to a pull of 25 kN. Determine the stress in the three parts and the total extension of the
rod. Young’s modulus for steel = 2 1011 Nm 2
50 mm 50 mm
dia dia
25 mm dia

F  25000N F  25000N
A B C D
100 nm 200 nm 100 nm
11. Three elastic wires PQ, PR and PS support a body P of mass M .as shown .The wires are of the
same material and cross-sectional area. The middle one is vertical. Find the loads carried by each
wire
b R b

Q S

12. A composite tube is made by striking a thin steel tube on a brass tube. If AS and AB are the
respective sectional areas of the steel and brass tubes and YS and YB their Young’s moduli, then
find the Young's modulus of single tube of the same length and total sectional area, which would
behave in the same fashion as that of the composite tube.

13. Two vertical rods of equal lengths, one steel and the other of copper, are suspended from the
ceiling at distance l apart and are connected rigidly to a rigid horizontal bar at their lower ends. It
AS and AC be their respective cross sectional areas YS and YC their respective Young's modulus,
where should a vertical force F be applied to horizontal bar in order that the bar remains
horizontal?
l

Steel Copper
x

14. A catapult consists of two parallel rubber strings, each of lengths 10 cm and cross-sectional
area 10 mm 2 . When stretched by 5 cm, it can throw a stone of mass 100 gm to a vertical height of
25 m. Determine Young's modulus of elasticity of rubber
15. A metal plate of area 0.10 m2 is connected to a 0.01 kg mass via a string that passes over an
ideal pulley (considered to be frictionless), as shown in the figure. A liquid with a film
thickness of 3.0 mm is placed between the plate and the table. When released, the plate moves
to the right with a constant speed of 0.085 ms 1 . Find the coefficient of viscosity of the liquid.
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 82
physics Classwork Problem
Film T

T
m  0.01kg

mg

16. As per shown figure the center solid cylinder starts with initial angular velocity 0 . Find out the
time after which the angular velocity becomes half.
0
mass , m

17. A sliding fit cylindrical body of mass of 1 kg drops vertically down at a constant velocity of 5 cms
1
. Find the viscosity of the oil.

14.9 cm
Oil
1kg 15 cm

15 cm

18. A powder comprising particles of various sizes is stirred up in a vessel filled to a height of 10
cm with water. Assuming the particles to be spherical, find the size of the largest particle that will
3
remain in suspension after 1 h (density of powder = 4 g/cm , viscosity of water = 0.01 poise).
19. Spherical particles of pollen are shaken up in water and allowed to settle. The depth of water is
2 102 m. What is the diameter of the largest particles remaining in suspension one hour later?
3 3 2
Density of pollen = 1.8  10 m , viscosity of water = 110 poise and density of water =
1102 Kg m 3 .
20. A cube of mass m  800 g floats on the surface of water. Water wets it completely. The cube is
10 cm on each edge. By what additional distance is it buoyed up or down by surface tension?
1
Surface tension of water = 0.07 Nm .
21. Find the maximum possible mass of a greased needle floating on water surface.
22. Calculate the work done against surface tension in blowing a soap bubble from a radius of 10
3
cm to 20 cm. if the surface tension of soap solution in 25 10 N/m.
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 83
physics Classwork Problem
23. A big drop is formed by coalescing 1000 small droplets of water .What will be the change in
surface energy. What will be the ratio between the total surface energy of the droplets and the
surface energy of the big drop ?
6
24. A water drop of radius 1mm is broken into 10 identical drops. Surface tension of water is 72
dynes/cm. Find the energy spent in this process.
25. A minute spherical air bubble is rising slowly through a column of mercury contained in a deep
jar. If the radius of the bubble at a depth of 100 cm is 0.1 mm, calculate its depth where its radius is
0.126 mm, given that the surface tension of mercury is 567 dyne/cm. Assume that the atmospheric
pressure is 76 cm of mercury.
26. A vessel filled with air under pressure P0 contains a soap bubble of diameter d. The air
pressure have been reduced n -fold, and the bubble diameter increased r-fold isothermally. Find
the surface tension of the soap-water solution.
27. Two separate air bubbles (radii 0.002 m and 0.004 m) formed of the same liquid (surface
tension 0.07N/ m) come together to form a double bubble. Find the radius and the sense of
curvature of the internal film surface common both the bubbles.
28. A vertical capillary with inside diameter 0.50 mm is submerged into water so that the length
of its part emerging outside the water surface is equal to 25 mm. Find the radius of curvature of the
3
meniscus. Surface tension of water is 73 10 N/m .
29. A glass rod of diameter d1  1.5 mm is inserted symmetrically into a glass capillary with
inside diameter d 2 = 2.0 mm. Then the whole arrangement is vertically oriented and brought in
contact with the surface of water. To what height will the liquid rise in the capillary)? Surface
3
tension of water  73 10 N/m .
30. Derive an expression for the height of capillary rise between two parallel plates dipping in a
liquid of density  separated by a distance d. The surface tension of the liquid is T.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 84

physics Classwork Problem

17-20. Heat
17. Thermal Expansion and Calorimetry

1. Liquid nitrogen has a boiling point of 195.81C at atmospheric pressure. Calculate this
temperature (a) in degrees Fahrenheit and (b) in kelvin.
2 Two ideal gas thermometers A and B use oxygen and hydrogen, respectively. The following
observations are made:
Temperature Pressure thermometer A Pressure thermometer B
Triple point of water 5
1.250  10 Pa 0.200  10 5 Pa
Normal melting point of sulphur 1.797  10 5 Pa 0.287  10 5 Pa
a.What is the absolute temperature of normal melting point of sulphur as read by thermometer A &
B?
b. What do you think is the reason for slightly different answers from A and B?
3. The lengths l1i  100 m of iron wire and l1c  100m of copper wire are marked off at t1  20 C
.What is the difference in lengths of the wires at t2  60 C ? The coefficients of linear expansion for
iron and copper are  i  1.2 105 K 1 and  c  1.7 105 K 1 .
4. An isosceles triangle is formed with a rod of length l1 and coefficient of linear expansion 1 for
the base and two thin rods each of length l2 and coefficient of linear expansion 2 for the two
pieces, if the distance between the apex and the midpoint of the base remain unchanged as the
l1 
temperature is varied show that 2 2 .
l2 1
5. A mercury thermometer is constructed as shown in Fig. The capillary tube has a diameter of
0.004 00 cm, and the bulb has a diameter of 0.250 cm, neglecting the expansion of the glass, find the
change in height of the mercury column with a temperature change of 30.0 o C .

A
h

Tt Tt  Tt
6. A small quantity of o liquid which does not mix with water sinks to the bottom at 20°C, the
3
densities of the liquid and water being 1021 and 998 kg/m , respectively . To what temperature
must the mixture be uniformly heated in order that the liquid forms globules which just float on
water? The cubical expansion of the liquid and water over the temperature ranges is 85  10 5 / K
and 45  10 5 / K respectively.
7. A long horizontal glass capillary tube open at both ends contains a mercury thread 1 m long at
0°C. A scale is etched on the glass tube. This scale is correct at 0 °C. Find the length of mercury
thread, as shown by this scale at 100 °C. Also find original length of thread at 100 °C. Given,
 mercury  18.2105 K 1 and glass  9 105 K 1 .
8. A glass bulb whose volume at 0 °C equal 10 cc in filled with mercury. It is then joined to stem of
diameter 0.2 cm at 0 C . What length of the stem will the liquid occupy at 60 °C ?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 85

physics Classwork Problem
5
Given, coefficient of volume expansion of mercury is 18 10 C 1 and coefficient of linear
6 1
expansion of glass is 9 10 C .
9. A hollow aluminum cylinder 20.0 cm deep has an Internal capacity of 2.000 L at 20 C . It is
completely filled with turpentine and then slowly warmed to 80 C . a. How much turpentine
overflows? b. If the cylinder is then cooled back to 20.0°C. how far below the cylinder’s rim does the
turpentine's surface recede?
Coefficient of volume expansion of turpentine 9x10-4 /oC
Coefficient of linear expansion of aluminum 0.24x10-4 /oC
10. Consider a cylindrical container of cross-section area A length h and having coefficient of
linear expansion c . The container is filled by liquid of real expansion coefficient  L up to height
h1 . When temperature of the system is increased by  then

h
h1

a. Find out new height, area and volume of cylindrical container and new volume of liquid.
b. Find the height of liquid level when expansion of container is neglected.
c. Find the relation between  L and c for which volume of container above the liquid level
(i) increases (ii) decreases (iii) remains constant.
d. On the surface of a cylindrical container a scale is attached for the measurement of level of
liquid filled inside it. If we increase the temperature or the system by  , then
(i) Find height of liquid level as shown by the scale on the vessel. Neglect expansion of liquid.
(ii)Find height of liquid level as shown by the scale on the vessel. Neglect expansion of container.

11. A solid body floats in a liquid at a temperature t  0 C and is completely submerged in it at

50 C . What fraction  of volume of the body is submerged in the liquid at 0C If
Ys  0.3 105 K 2 and of the liquid, Y1  8.0  105 K 1
12. A solid floats in a liquid at 20 C with 75% of it immersed. When the liquid is heated to 100 C
, the same solid floats with 80% of it immersed in the liquid. Calculate the coefficient of expansion
of the liquid. Assume the volume of the solid to be constant.
13. A sinker of weight W0 has an apparent weight W1 when placed in a liquid at a temperature T1
and W2 when weighed in the same liquid at a temperature T2 . The coefficient of cubical expansion of
the material of the sinker is  s . What is the coefficient of volume expansion of the liquid?

14. A baromator with a brass scale reads 755 mm on a day when the temperature is 25°C. If the
scale is correctly graduated at 0°C, find the true pressure at 0°C (In terms of height of Hg) given that
the coefficient of linear expansion of brass is 18  10 6 / K . Coefficient of cubical expansion of
mereury = 182  10 6 / K

15. Two rods of different metals having the same area of cross section A are placed between the
two massive walk as shown in Fig. The first rod has a length l1 , coefficient of linear expansion 1

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 86

physics Classwork Problem

and Young’s modulus Y1 . The corresponding quantities for second rod are l2 ,  2 and Y2 . The
o
temperature of both the rods is now raised by t C .
l1 l2

Y1 ,1 Y2 , 2

i. Find the force with which the rods act on each other (at higher temperature) in terms of
given quantities.
ii. Also find the length of the rods at higher temperature.
16. Two rods of equal cross sections, one of copper and the other of steel, are joined to form a
composite rod of length 2.0 m at 20°C; the length of the copper rod is 0.5 m. When the temperature
is raised to120°C, the length of composite rod increases to 2.002 m. If the composite rod is fixed
between two rigid walls and thus not allowed to expand, it is found that the lengths of the
component rods also do not change with increase in temperature. Calculate Young's modulus of
steel. (The coefficient of linear expansion of copper,  e  1.6 105 / C and Young's modulus of
copper is 1.3  1013 N/m 2 .)
17. A copper and a tungsten plate having a thickness d  2 mm each are riveted together so that at
0 C they form a flat bimetallic plate. Find the average radius of curvature of this plate at t = 200°C.
The coefficients of linear expansion for copper and tungsten are acn  1.7  105 /K and
 w  0.4  10 5 / K . respectively.
d 
18. Two metal strips, each of length L and thickness   at temperature T0 are riveted together
2
so that their ends coincide. One strip is made of metal A having coefficient of linear expansion  A
and the other with a coefficient B , where  A   B . When this bimetallic strip is heated to a
temperature T0  T  , the bimetallic strip bends into the arc of the circle. Assuming that the
thickness d of the bimetallic strip remains constant at new temperature, calculate the radius of the
circle.
19. A clock with a brass pendulum shaft keeps correct time at a certain temperature.
a. How closely must the temperature be controlled if then clock is not to gain or lose more than 1 s
a day? Does then answer depend on the period of the pendulum?

b. Will an increase of temperature cause the clock to gain or lose?  brass  2 10 / C
5

2
20. A pendulum gives correct time at 20 °C at a place where g  9.8 ms . The pendulum consists
2
of a light steel rod connected to a heavy ball. If it is taken to a different place where g  9.788 ms .
At what temperature will it give correct time? Coefficient of linear expansion of steel is
12  10 6 C 1 .
21. A surveyor’s 30 m steel tape is correct at a temperature of 20°C. The distance between two
points, as measured by this tape on a day when the temperature is 35°C, is 26 m. What is the true

distance between the point?  steel  1.2 10 / C
5

22. At room temperature ( 25C )the length of a steel rod is measured using a brass centimetre
scale. The measured length is 20 cm. If the scale is calibrated to read accurately the temperature
0 C , find the actual length of steel rod at room temperature
23. A meter scale is made of steel and measures correct length at 16 °C. What will be the percentage
error if the scale is used (a)on a summer day when temperature is 46 C and

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 87

physics Classwork Problem

(b)on a winter day when the temperature is 6°C ?Coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 11  10 6
C 1
24. Some Water at 0°C is placed in a large insulated enclosure (vessel). The water vapour formed is
pumped out continuously. What fraction of the water will ultimately freeze, if the latent heat of
vapourization is seven times the latent heat of fusion?
25. How much heat is supplied to convert 40 g of ice at -10 °C to steam at 100 °C?
26. The molar heat capacity of a certain substance varies with temperature T as C  a  bT where
a  27.2 Jmol 1 K 1 and b  4  10 3 Jmol 1 K 2 . How much heat is necessary to change the
temperature of 2 mol of this substance from 27 °C to 427 °C ?
27. Three liquids P, Q and R are given. It is observed that 4 kg of P at 60 °C and 1 kg of R at 50 °C,
when mixed produce a resultant temperature of 55 °C. A mixture of 1 kg of P at 60 °C and 1 kg of Q
at 50°C shows a temperature of 55 °C. Find the resulting temperature when 1 kg of Q at 60 °C is
mixed with 1 kg of R at 50 °C
28. Determine the final result when 200 g of water and 20 g of ice at C are in a calorimeter having
a water equivalent of 30 g and 50 g of steam is passed into it at 100 C
29. In a calorimeter (water equivalent = 40 g) are 200 g of water and 50 g of ice all at 0°C. 30 g of
water at 90°C is poured into it. What will be the final condition of the system?
30. 1kg ice at -20°C is mixed with 1 kg steam at 200°C. Then find equilibrium temperature and
mixture content.
o
31. A substance is in the solid form at 0 C . The amount of heat added to this substance and its
temperature are plotted in the following graph.
o
(in C )

120
C
100
80
A B
t 60
40
20
0
1000 2000 2600
Q (in Calories)

If the relative specific heat capacity of the solid substance is 0.5, find from the graph
(i) the mass of the substance;
(ii)specific latent heat of the melting process and
(iii)the specific heat of the substance in the liquid state.
Specific heat capacity of water = 1000 cal/kg/K
32. Two bodies of equal masses are heated at a uniform rate under identical conditions. The change
in temperature in the two cases is shown graphically. What are their melting points?
Find the ratio of their specific heats and latent heats.

100
Temperature

80 I
60 II
40
20
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 88

physics Classwork Problem

18.Transmission of Heat
33. A closed cubical box made of perfectly insulating material has walls of thickness 8 cm and the
only way for the heat to enter or leave the box is through the solid, cylindrical, metallic plugs each
of cross-sectional area 12 cm 2 and length 8 cm fixed in the opposite walls of the box. The outer
surface A is kept at 100°C while the outer surface B of other plug is kept at 4°C. K of the material
of the plugs is 0.5 cal/C/cm . A source of energy generating 36 cal/s is enclosed inside the box. Find
the equilibrium temperature of the inner surface of the box assuming that it is same at all points on
the inner surface.
34. A rigid box contains one mole of a monatomic ideal gas. The walls of the box have total surface
area A , thickness D and thermal conductivity k . Initially the gas is at a temperature T0 and
T0
pressure P0 . The temperature of the surroundings is . Find the temperature and pressure of the
2
gas as a function of time.
35. n moles of a monatomic gas at temperature T1 are trapped under a piston having area A ,
length l , density  and thermal conductivity K . P0 and T0 are pressure and temperature of the
atmosphere. Find length of the gas column as a function of time. Neglect friction and heat loss
through the walls of container and sides of piston.
P0 , T0

T1

36. Three cylindrical rods A , B and C of equal lengths and equal diameters are joined in series as
shown in Fig. Their thermal conductivities are 2K, K and 0.5 K. respectively. In steady state, if the
free ends of rods A and C are at 100o C and 0o C , respectively, calculate the temperature at the
two junction points. Assume negligible loss by radiation through the curved surface. What will be
the equivalent thermal conductivity?
L TAB TBC
A B C
o
100 C 2K K 0.5 K 0o C
37. A double-pane window used for insulating a room thermally from outside consists of two glass
sheets each of area 1m 2 and thickness 0.01 m separated by a 0.05 m thick stagnant air space. In the
steady state, the room glass interface and the glass-outdoor interface are at constant temperatures
of 27 °C and 0 °C respectively. Calculate the rate of heat flow through the window pane. Also find
the temperatures of other interfaces. Given thermal conductivities of glass and air as 0.8 and
0.08 W m 1 K 1 respectively.
38. A steam pipe of radius 5 cm carries steam at 100 °C. The pipe is covered by a jacket of
insulating material 2 cm thick having a thermal conductivity 0.07Wm 1 K 1 . If the temperature at
the outer wall of the pipe jacket is 20 °C, how much heat is lost through the jacket per metre length
in an hour?
39. A point source of heat of power P is placed at the centre of a spherical shell of mean radius R .
The material of the shell has thermal conductivity K. Calculate the thickness of the shell if
temperature difference between the outer and inner surfaces of the shell in steady state is T.
40. Three identical rods of length 1 m each, having cross-sectional area of 1 cm 2 each and made of

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 89

physics Classwork Problem

aluminium, copper and steel, respectively, are maintained at temperatures of 12 o C , 4 o C and

50o C , respectively, at their separate ends. Find the temperature of their commons junction.
[ K Cu  400 W/m-K, K Al  200 W/m-K, K steel  50 W/m-K]
50o C

Steel

12o C Aluminium

Copper

4o C

41. The thickness of ice on a lake is 5 cm and the temperature of air is -20 °C. Calculate how long
will it take for the thickness of ice to be doubled. Thermal conductivity of ice = 0.005 cal
cm -1 sec -1 C 1 , density of ice  0.92 gcc 1 and latent heat of ice is 80 calg 1 .
42. A rod of length L with thermally insulated lateral surface consists of a material whose heat

conductivity varies with temperature as K  where  is a constant. The ends of the rod are kept
T
at temperatures T1 , and T2  T1  T2  . Find the function T  x where x is the distance from the end
whose temperature is T, and the flow density.
43. 100 units of energy is incident on a surface. In this 20 units are of wavelength  1 , 30 units are
of wavelength  2 and rest 50 units are other wavelengths. The total 60 units of energy is absorbed
by the surface. In this 60 units, 5 units are of  1 and 25 units are of  2 . Find a, a1 and a  2 .
44. A solid copper sphere of density  , specific heat c and radius r is at temperature T1 .It is
suspended inside a chamber whose walls are at temperature 0 K. What is the time required for the
temperature of sphere to drop to T2 ? Take the emmissivity of the sphere to be equal to e.
45. A body cools down from 60°C to 55 C in 30 s. Using Newton’s law of cooling, calculate the time
taken by same body to cool down from 55°C to 50°C. Assume that the temperature of surrounding
is 45°C.
46. A body cools from 60°C to 50°C in 10 min. Find its temperature at the end of next 10 min if the
room temperature is 25°C. Assume Newton’s law of cooling holds.
47. A hot body placed in air is cooled down according to Newton’s law of cooling, the rate of
decrease of temperature being k times the temperature difference from the surrounding. Starting
from t = 0, find the time in which the body will lose half the maximum heat it can lose.

48. Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivities of 0.01 and 0.81 respectively. The outer surface
areas of the two bodies are same. The two bodies emit total radiant power at the same rate. The
wavelength B corresponding to maximum spectral radiancy from B is shifted from the wavelength
corresponding to maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from A by 1 μm. If the temperature
of A is 5802 K, calculate (a) the temperature of B and (b) the wavelength B .
49. The top of an insulated cylindrical container is covered by a disc having emissivity 0.6 and
conductivity 0.167 WKm 1 and thickness 1 cm. The temperature is maintained by circulating oil as
shown.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 90

physics Classwork Problem

Oil out

Oil in

(a) Find the radiation loss to the surroundings in Jm 2 s if temperature of the upper surface of disc
is 127o C and temperature of surroundings is 27 o C .(b) Also find the temperature of the circulating
oil.
 17 
Neglect the heat loss due to convection.  Given  =  10 8 Wm 2 K 4 
 3 
50. One end of a rod of length L and cross-sectional area A is kept in a furnace of temperature T1 .
The other end of the rod is kept at a temperature T2 . The thermal conductivity of the material of the
rod is K and emissivity of the rod is e . It is given that T2  Ts  T , where  T  Ts , T s being
the temperature of the surroundings. If T  T1  Ts  , find the proportionality constant. Consider
that heat is lost only by radiation at the end where the temperature of the rod is T2 .
T1
Insulated
Furnace
T1 Rod T2

Insulated

L
51.The intensity of solar radiation just outside the earth's atmosphere is measured to be 1.4 kW/m 2 .
If the radius of the sun 7  10 8 m , while the earth-sun distance is 150  10 6 km , then find
i. The intensity of solar radiation at the surface of the sun,
ii. the temperature at the surface of the sun assuming it to be a black body,
iii. the most probable wavelength in solar radiation.
52. The earth receives solar energy at the rate of 2 cal cm 2 per min. Assuming the radiation to be
black body in character, estimate the surface temperature of the sun. Given that  = 5.67
 10 -8 W/m 2 /K 4 and angular diameter of the sun = 32 min of arc.

19.Kinetic Theory of Gas

53. (a) Calculate (i) root-mean-square speed and (ii) the mean energy of 1 mol of hydrogen at STP
3
(given that density of hydrogen is 0.09 kg /m ).
27
(b) Given that the mass of a molecule of hydrogen is 3.34 10 kg , calculate Avogadro’s
number.
(c) Calculate Boltzmann’s constant.

54. Two vessels having equal volume contain molecular hydrogen at one atmosphere and
helium at two atmospheres respectively. What is the ratio of rms speed of hydrogen molecule to
that of helium molecule, assume that both the samples are at the same temperature?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 91

physics Classwork Problem

55. One gram mole NO2 at 57 °C and 2 atm pressure is kept in a vessel. Assuming the molecules
to be moving with R.M.S. velocity, find the number of collisions per second, which the molecules
make with one square meter area of the vessel wall.
56. A cubical box of side 1 meter contains helium gas (atomic weight 4) at a pressure of
100 Nm 2 . During an observation time of 1 second, an atom travelling with the root mean square
speed parallel to one of the edges of the cube, was found to make 500 hits with a particular wall
25
without any collision with oilier atoms. Take R  Jmol -1K 1 and k  1.38  10 23 JK 1
3
(a) Evaluate the temperature of the gas.
(b) Evaluate the average kinetic energy per atom.
(c) Evaluate the total mass of helium gas in the box.

57. One gram-mole of oxygen at 27 C and 1 atm pressure is enclosed in a vessel. Assuming
molecules to be moving with vrms , find the number of collisions per second which the molecules
make with 1 m 2 area of the vessel wall.
58. A glass bulb of volume 400 cm 3 is connected to another bulb of volume 200 cm 3 by means
of a tube of negligible volume. The bulbs contain dry air and are both at a common temperature and
pressure of 20°C and 1.000 atm, respectively. The larger bulb is immersed in steam at 100°C and
the smaller in melting ice at 0 C . Find the final common pressure.
59. Explain whether
(c)
(a) (b)

P2 V2
C2 P1 V1
P P
C1 T2 V
T1

V
1 2 1 2
T T
(a) T2  T1 (b) P2  P1 and
(c) V2  V1 or otherwise in Fig. (a), (b) and (c), which represent isothermal, isobaric, and
isochoric processes for the same mass of an ideal gas, respectively.
60. The three diagrams below depict three different processes for a given mass of an ideal gas. What
information can be drawn regarding the change of
(b)
(c)
(a)

1
2
2
P P
V 1 2
1

T T V
(a) pressure, (b)volume and
(c) temperature of the gas from the plots as shown in Fig. (a), (b) and (c), respectively.
61. A vessel contains a mixture of 7 g of nitrogen and 11 g of carbon dioxide at temperature T =
1 1
290K. Is pressure of the mixture P = 1 atm, calculate its density ( R  8.31Jmol K ) .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 92

physics Classwork Problem

62. Two perfect gases at absolute temperatures T1 and T2 are mixed . There is no loss of energy.
Find the temperature of the mixture if the masses of the molecules are m1 , and m2 and the number
of molecules in the gases are n1 and n 2 .
63. One mole of a monatomic gas is mixed with 3 moles of a diatomic gas. What is the molar

specific heat of the mixture at constant volume? R  8.31 Jmol K
1 1

64. 1 g mole of oxygen at 27 °C and 1 atmospheric pressure is enclosed in a vessel.
(a) Assuming the molecules to be moving with vrms , find the number of collisions per second
which the molecules make with one square meter area of the vessel wall.
(b) The vessel is next thermally insulated and moved with a constant speed v0 . It is then
suddenly stopped. The process results in a rise of temperature of the gas by 1 °C. Calculate the
speed v0 . Given, k B  1.38  1023 JK -1 and N A  6.02  1023 mol1 .
65. An ideal gas has a specific heat at constant pressure CP   5 / 2  R . The gas is kept in a
closed vessel of volume 8.3  10  3 m 3 at a temperature of 300 K and a pressure of 1.6  10 6 N / m 2 .
An amount of 2.49  10 4 J of heat energy is supplied to the gas. Calculate the final temperature and
pressure of the gas  R  8.3 J/molK  .
 5
66. A gaseous mixture enclosed in a vessel consists of 1 g mole of gas A with   1   and
 3
 7
another gas B with   2   at a temperature T. The gases A and B do not react with each other
 5
and assume to be ideal. Find the number of gram moles of the gas B, if  for the gaseous mixture is
 19 
 .
 13 
67. How much heat energy should be: added to the gaseous mixture consisting of 1 g of hydrogen
and 1 g of helium to raise its temperature from 0°C to 100°C
a. at constant volume, b. at constant pressure (R = 2 cal/mol K)?
68. Calculate the specific heat capacity Cv of a gaseous mixture consisting of v1 moles of a gas of
adiabatic exponent  1 and v2 moles of another gas of adiabatic exponent  2 .
69. A vessel of volume 2  10 2 m 3 contains a mixture of hydrogen and helium at 47°C
2
temperature and 4.15  10 5 N/m 2 pressure. The mass of the mixture is 10 kg Calculate the
masses of hydrogen and helium in the given mixture.
70. A gaseous mixture enclosed in a vessel of volume V consists of one gram mole of a gas A with
CP 5
   and another gas B with   7 at a certain temperature T. The gram molecular weights of
CV 3 5
the gases A and B are 4 and 32 respectively The gases A and B do not react with each other and are
19
assumed to be idea.The gaseous mixture follows the equation; PV 13  constant in adiabatic
processes.
(a) Find the number of gram moles of the gas B in the gaseous mixture.
(b)Compute the speed of sound in the gaseous mixture at T = 300 K
(c) If T is raised by 1 K from 300 K. find the percentage change in the speed of sound in the
gaseous mixture.
20.Thermodynamics
71.Figure shows a movable piston containing an ideal gas. The piston is quickly pushed down from
piston 2.The piston is held at piston 2 until the gas is again at 0 C and then slowly raised back to
position 1.Represent the whole operation on a P-V diagram. If 100g of ice melts during the cycle,
how much work done on the gas?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 93

physics Classwork Problem

72. Consider the shown diagram where the two chambers separated by piston-spring arrangement
contain equal amounts of certain ideal gas. Initially when the temperatures of the gas in both the
chambers are kept at 300 K. The compression in the spring is 1 m. The temperature of the left and
the right chambers are now raised to 400 K and 500 K respectively. If the pistons are free to slide,
find the final compression in the spring.

300 K 300 K

Vacuum

1m 1m
73. An ideal gas is enclosed in a cylinder with a movable piston on top of it. The piston has a mass of
8000 g and an area of 5.00 cm 2 and is free to slide up and down, keeping the pressure of the gas
constant. How much work is done on the gas as the temperature of 0.200 mol of the gas is raised
from 20.0°C to 300°C?
74. The cylinder shown in the figure has conducting walls and temperature of the surrounding is T
, the piston is initially in equilibrium, the cylinder contains n moles of a gas. Now the piston is
displaced slowly by an external agent to make the volume double of the initial.
Find work done by external agent in terms of n , R , T

n
moles

75. A non conducting piston of mass m and area of cross section A is placed on a non conducting
cylinder as shown in figure. Temperature, spring constant, height of the piston are given by
T , K , h respectively. Initially spring is relaxed and piston is at rest. Find a. Number of moles

K
Patm
mass  m
Area=A
T
h

b. Work done by gas to displace the piston by distance d when the gas is heated slowly.
c. Find the final temperature

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 94

physics Classwork Problem

76. When a thermodynamic system is taken from an initial state I to a final state F along the
path IAF, as shown in Fig the heat energy absorbed by the system is Q  55 J and the work done by
the system is W  25 J. If the same system is taken along the path IBF , the value of Q  35 J .

A F

I B

V
a. Find the work done along the path IBF .
b. If W  15 J for the curved path FI , how much heat energy is lost by the system along this
path?
c. If U I  10 J , what is U F ? d. U B  20 J , what is Q further process BF and IB ?
77. How much work is done on the steam when 1.00 mol of water at 100°C boils and becomes
1.00 mol of steam at 100°C at 1.00 atm pressure? Assuming the steam to behave as an ideal gas,
determine the change in the internal energy of the material as it vapourizes.
78. An ideal gas initially at 30 K undergoes an isobaric expansion at 2.50 kPa. If the volume
increases from 1.00 m 3 to 3.00 m3 and 12.5 kJ is transferred to the gas by heat, what are (a) the
change in its internal energy and (b) its final temperature?
79. The volume of a monatomic ideal gas Increases linearly with pressure, as shown in Fig.Calculate
8105 Pa
B

4 105 Pa A

O 0.2 0.5 m
3

Calculate (a) increase in internal energy, (b) work done by the gas and (c) heat supplied to the gas.
80. A sample of 2 kg monatomic helium (assumed ideal) is taken through the process ABC and
another sample of 2 kg of the same gas is taken through the process ADC (shown in figure). Given
molecular mass of helium = 4.
P  104 Nm 2 

B C
10

5
A D
V  m3 
10 20
(a) What is the temperature of helium in each of the states A , B , C and D ?
(b)Is there any way of telling afterwards which sample of helium went through the process ABC
and which went through the process ADC ? Write Yes or No.
(c) How much is the heat involved the process ABC and ADC ?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 95

physics Classwork Problem

81. P  V diagram of n moles of an ideal gas is as shown in figure. Find the maximum temperature
between A and B .
P
A
2P0

P0 B

V0 2V0 V
82. As a result of isobaric heating by T = 72 K, one mole of a certain ideal gas obtains an amount
of heat Q = 1.60 kJ. Find the work done by the gas, the increment in its internal energy, and the
value of  .
83. Six grams of hydrogen gas at a temperature of 273 K was isothermally expanded to five times
its initial volume and then isochorically heated so that the pressure in the final state becomes equal
to that in the initial state. Find the total amount of heat absorbed by the gas during the entire
process.
84. Two moles of an ideal gas at temperature T0  300 K was cooled isochorically so that the
pressure was reduced to half. Then, in an isobaric process, the gas expanded till its temperature got
back to the initial value. Find the total amount of heat absorbed by the gas in the process.
85. One mole of a perfect gas, initially at a pressure and temperature of 105 N / m 2 and 300 K,
respectively, expands isothermally until its volume is doubled and then adiabatically until its
volume is again doubled. Kind the final pressure and temperature of the gas. Find the total work
done during the isothermal and adiabatic processes. Given   1.4 . Also draw the P  V diagram
for the process.
P
1

V 1 V2 V3 V
86. 1 mole of an ideal monatomic gas is expanded till the. temperature of the gas is doubled under
the process V 2T  constant. The initial temperature of the gas is 400 K. Find the total work done
in the process, in terms of R.
1
87. A gas undergoes a process such that P  .If the molar heat capacity for this process is
T
C  33.24Jmol -1K -1 , find the degrees of freedom of the molecules of the gas.
88. Three moles of an ideal gas at 300 K are isothermally expanded to five times its volume and
heated at this constant volume so that the pressure is raised to its initial value before expansion. In

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 96

physics Classwork Problem

 Cp 
the whole process 83.14 kJ heat is required. Calculate the ratio   of the gas. ( log e 5  1.61 and
 Cv 
R  8.31 Jmol-1 K 1 )
89. A piston divides a closed gas cylinder into two parts, the piston is kept pressed such that one
part has a pressure P0 and volume 5V0 and the other part has 8P0 and volume V0 ;the piston is now
left free, Find the new pressure and volume for the isothermal and adiabatic process    1.5  .
90. A rectangular box as shown in the figure has a partition which can slide without friction along
the length of the box. Initially each of the two chambers of the box has one mole of monatomic ideal
 5
gas     at a pressure P0 , volume V 0 and temperature T0 . The chamber on the left is slowly
 3
heated by an electric heater.

P0 , V0 P0 , V0
T0 T0

The walls of the box and the partition are thermally insulated. The gas in the left chamber expands,
 243 
pushing the partition until the final pressure in both chambers becomes   P0 . Calculate
 32 
(a) the final temperature of the gas in each chamber
(b) the work done by the gas in the right chamber
91. A cylindrical container having non-conducting walls is partitioned in two equal parts such that
the volume of the each parts is equal to V 0 . A movable non-conducting piston is kept between the
V0
two parts. Gas on left is slowly heated so that the gas on right is compressed upto volume
. Find
8
pressure and temperature on both sides if initial pressure and temperature, were P0 and T0
respectively. Also find heat given by the heater to the gas. (number of moles in each part is n )
non conducting walls
non conducting movable
piston

P0
V0 P0 , V0 , T0 monoatomic
T0 ,

Diatomic
92. An adiabatic piston of mass m equally divides an insulator container of volume V 0 and length l
. A light spring connects the piston to the right wall. Mass of the piston is m . In equilibrium
pressure on both sides of the piston is P0 . The container starts moving with acceleration a
towards the right. Find the stretch x of the spring when acceleration of the piston equals
acceleration of container. (Assume that x  l ). The gas in the container has the adiabatic
exponent (ratio of CP and CV )  .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 97

physics Classwork Problem
l

k
a

93. An ideal gas is taken through a cyclic thermodynamic process through four steps. The amounts
of heat involved in these steps are Q1  5960 J , Q2   5585 J , Q3  2980 J and Q4  3645 J
respectively. The corresponding quantities and work involved are
W1  2200 J , W2  825 J , W3  1100 and W4 respectively,
(a) Find the value of W4 (b) What is The efficiency of the cycle?

94. A sample of an ideal gas has pressure p0 , volume V0 and temperature T0 . It is isothermally
expanded to twice its original volume. It is then compressed at constant pressure to have the
original volume V0 . Finally, the gas is heated at constant volume to get the original temperature. (a)
Show the process in a V-T diagram (b) Calculate the heat absorbed in the process.
V
b
2V0

V0 c
a

T0 T
95. Figure shows the indicator diagram corresponding to n moles of an ideal gas taken along the
cyclic process ABCDA . Find the efficiency of the cycle.

2P0 B C
P
Pressure

P0
A
D

V0 2V0
Volume V 

 
96. Three moles of an ideal gas C p  7 R / 2 at pressure PA and temperature TA is isothermally
expanded to twice its initial volume. It is then compressed at a constant pressure to its original
volume. Finally, the gas is compressed at constant volume to the original pressure PA .
a. Sketch P—V and P—T diagrams for the complete process.
b.Calculate the net work done by the gas and net heat supplied to the gas during the complete
process.
97. An ideal gas is taken round a cyclic thermodynamic process ABCA as shown in Fig. If the
internal energy of the gas at point A is assumed zero while at B it is 50 J. The heat absorbed by
the gas in the process BC is 90 J.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 98

physics Classwork Problem
P
C
30

20
A
 Nm 
2
B
10 B
A
D E
0
1 2 3
V  m3 
a. What is the internal energy of the gas at point C ?
b. How much heat energy is absorbed by the gas in the process AB ?
c. Find the heat energy rejected or absorbed by the gas in the process CA .
d. What is the net work done by the gas in the complete cycle ABCA ?
98. A fixed mass of oxygen gas performs a cyclic process ABCA . Find the efficiency of the process.
P

3P B

B
P C
A

T
99. n moles of a diatomic gas has undergone a cyclic process ABC . Temperature at a is T0 . Find
P

2P0 B a. Volume at C ?
C
b. Maximum temperature?
c. Total heat given to gas?
P0
A d. Is heat rejected by the gas, if
yes how much heat is rejected?
e. Find out the efficiency
V0 V V

100. The P  V diagram of 0.2 mol of a diatomic ideal gas is shown in figure. Process BC is
adiabatic. The value of  the gas is 1.4. (a)Find the pressure and volume at points A , B and C
P
B
600 K

A C
1 atm
300 K 455 K

V
(b) Calculate Q , W and U All for each of the three processes.
(c) Find the thermal efficiency of the cycle. Take 1 atm  1  105 Nm 2

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 99

physics Classwork Problem

21. Simple Harmonic Motion

1. What is time-period of x  A sin  t    ?
2. Find the period of the function. y  sin t  sin 2t  sin 3t
3. Identify which of the following functions represent simple harmonic motion.
iax -ax 2
i. y  Ae ii. y  ae iii. y=asin t iv. y  a sin t  b cos t v. y  sin t  cos 2t
 3
4. A particle starts form point x  A and move towards negative extreme as show following
2
t0
O
A A
 3
A
2
(a) find the equation of the SHM
(b) Find the time taken by the particle to go directly from its initial position to negative extreme.
(c) find the time taken by the particle to reach at mean position.
5. A particle executes SHM with an angular frequency   4 rad/s . If it is at its extreme position initially,
then find the instants when it is at a distance 3 / 2 times its amplitude from the mean position.
1
6. A particle executes SHM with amplitude 8 cm and a frequency 10 s . Assuming the particle to be at a
displacement 4 cm initially, in the positive direction, determine its displacement equation and the maxi- mum
velocity and acceleration.
7. Write the equation of SHM for the situations shown below:
t=0
a.
x=-A x=0 x=A

t=0
b.
x=-A x=0 x=A
t=0
c.
x=-A x=0 A/2 x=A
8. If x=A/2 at , t=0 find phase constant  in x  A sin  t    . At t=0 , a particle executing SHM is going
along x -axis..
9.Figure shows the displacement-time graph of a particle executing SHM with a time period T . Four points 1,
2, 3 and 4 are marked on the graph where the displacement is half that of the amplitude.
x

A
A 2
1
2
O
A
3 4
2A

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 100

physics Classwork Problem
a. Identify the points of same displacement but with opposite direction of motion. Find the time difference
between them.
b. Identify the points where the particles move in the same direction. Find the time difference between
them.
10. Two particles execute SHM with same frequency and amplitude along the same straight line. They
cross each other, at a point midway between the mean and the extreme position. Find the phase difference
between them.
11. A particle executes SHM with amplitude A and angular frequency  . At an instant the particle is at a
distance A/5 from the mean position and is moving away from it. Find the time after which it will come back to
this position again and also find the time after which it will pass through the mean position.
12. Two particles executing SHM with some angular frequency and amplitudes A and 2A on same straight
line with some mean position cross each other in opposite direction at a distance A/3 from mean position. Find
the phase difference in the two SHMs.
13. A particle executes SHM with an amplitude of 10 cm and frequency 2 Hz. At t=0 , the particle is at a
point where potential energy and kinetic energy are same. Find the equation of displacement of particle.
 
14. A particle of mass 0.2 kg undergoes SHM according to the equation x  t   3sin   t  .
 4 
I. What is the total energy of the particle if potential energy is zero at mean position?
II. What are the kinetic and potential energies of the particle at time t=1s ?
III. At what time instants is the particle’s energy purely kinetic?
15. A particle of mass m is located in a unidimensional potential field where potential energy of the particle
depends on the coordinates x as: U  x   U 0 1  cos Ax  ; U 0 and A are constants.
Find the period of small oscillations that the particle performs about the equilibrium position.
1
16. A 2 kg mass is attached to a spring of force constant 600 Nm and rests on a smooth horizontal surface.
1
A second mass of 1 kg slides along the surface toward the first at 6 ms .
(a) Find the amplitude of oscillation if the masses make a perfectly inelastic collision and remain together
on the spring. What is the period of oscillation?
(b) Find the amplitude and period of oscillation if the collision is perfectly elastic.
(c) For each ease, write down the position x as a function of time t for the mass attached to the spring,
assuming that the collision occurs at time t = 0 . What is the impulse given to the 2 kg mass in each case?
1
17. A 2 kg block is attached to a spring fox which k  200 Nm . It is held at an extension of 5 cm and then
released at t = 0 . Find
A A
(d) the displacement as a function of time (b) the velocity when x   (c)the acceleration when x  
2 2
18. Figure shows a system consisting of a massless pulley, a spring of force constant k and a block of mass m .
If the block is slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium position and released, find the period of
its vertical oscillation in cases (a), (b) and (c).
(c)

(b)
(a)
k
k

k m
m m

19. A 7 kg disk is free to rotate about a horizontal axis passing through its centre C . Determine the period of
oscillation of the disk if the springs have sufficient tension in them to prevent the string from slipping on the
1
disk as it oscillates. The radius of the disk is 10 cm and spring constant of both the springs is 600 Nm .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 101

physics Classwork Problem

k k

20. A 14 kg uniform cylinder can roll without sliding on at 30° incline. A belt is attached to the rim of the
cylinder and a spring holds the cylinder at rest in the position shown. If the cylinder is moved 50 mm down the
incline and released, determine:

k  500N / m

30o

(a) the period of vibration

(b) the maximum acceleration of the centre of the cylinder..
21. A mass m is connected to a spring of mass ms , and oscillates in SHM on a smooth horizontal surface. The
force constant of the spring is k. find the time period of oscillation.
22. A solid cylinder is attached to a mass-less spring so that it can roll without slipping along a horizontal
surface. Calculate the period of oscillation made by the cylinder if m  mass of cylinder and k  spring constant.

k R

23. The system shown in the figure can move on a smooth surface. The spring is initially compressed by 6 cm
and then released. Find a. time period b. amplitude of 3 kg block c. maximum momentum of 6 kg block.
2
1
k  800 N / m
N/m 6 kg
3 kg

24. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of a car accelerating uniformly on a horizon road. If the
acceleration is a0 and the length of the pendulum is l . Find the time period of small oscillations about the mean
position.
25. A ball is suspended by a thread of length l at the point O on an incline wall us shown. The inclination of the
wall with the vertical is
P
O


l

Q
(a) the thread is displaced through a small angle  away from the vertical and
(b) the ball is released. Find the period of oscillation of pendulum. Consider both cases.a.    b.   
26. Figure shows two identical simple pendulums of length l . One is tilled at an angle  and imparted an initial
velocity v1 toward mean position and at the same time other one is projected away from mean position at a

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 102

physics Classwork Problem
velocity v2 at an initial angular displacement  . Find the phase difference in oscillations of these two
pendulums.
(ii)
(i)




l
v2

v1 A
27. In previous question, if the second pendulum bob is thrown at velocity v2 at an angle  from mean
position, but on other side of mean position, find the phase difference in the two SHMs now as shown in the
figure.
(I) (II)

 
l l
l
V2

A
V1
28. Derive an expression for the angular frequency of small oscillation of the bob of a simple pendulum when
it is immersed in a liquid of density  .Assume the density of the bob as  and length of the string as l .
29. What is the period of a pendulum formed by pivoting a metre stick so that it is free to rotate about a
horizontal axis passing through the 75 cm mark?
30. A uniform disc of radius 5.0 cm and mass 200 g is fixed at its centre to a metal wire, the other end of which
is fixed to a ceiling. The hanging disc is rotated about the wire through an angle and is released. If the disc
makes torsional oscillations with time period 0.20 s, find the torsional constant of the wire.

31. Consider a solid cylinder of density  s , cross-sectional area A and height h floating in a liquid of density
 l , as shown in Fig.   l   s  . It is depressed slightly and allowed to oscillate vertically. Find the frequency of
small oscillations.

h
s
l
32. . A V-shaped glass tube of uniform cross section in kept in a vertical plane as shown. A liquid is poured in
the tube. In equilibrium the level of liquid in both limbs of tube are equal. Find the angular frequency of small
oscillations of liquid.

 

33. Find the amplitude and initial phase of a particle in SHM, whose motion equation is given as
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 103
physics Classwork Problem
y  A sin t  B cos t
34. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the following equations
 
 
y1  10 sin   12t  1 and y2  5 sin 3 t  3 cos 3 t Here t is in seconds.
4
Find out the ratio of their amplitudes. What are the time periods of the two motions?
35. A force F  10 x  2 acts on a particle of mass 0.1 Kg, where k is in m and F in newton. If it is released
form rest at x  0 , find: a. amplitude; b. time period; c. equation of motion.
36. A person normally weighing 60 Kg stands on a platform which oscillates up and down harmonically at a
1
frequency 2.0sec and an amplitude 5.0 cm. if a machine on the platform gives the person’s weight against
2
time, deduce the maximum and minimum reading it will show, take g  10m / sec .
37 . A closed and isolated cylinder contains ideal gas. An adiabatic separator of mass m , cross-sectional area A
divides the cylinder into two equal parts, each with volume V0 and pressure P0 in equilibrium. Assuming that
the separator can move without friction, find the oscillation frequency when the separator is slightly displaced.

PL PR
P0 , V0 P0 , V0

x
38.Two non-viscous incompressible and immiscible liquids of densities  and 1.5 are poured into the two
limbs of a circular tube of radius R and small cross-section kept fixed in a vertical plane as shown in fig. Each
liquids occupied one-fourth the circumference of the tube.
(a) Find the angle  that the radius of the interface makes with the vertical in equilibrium position
(b) If the whole liquid column is given a small displacement from its equilibrium position, show that the
resulting oscillation are simple harmonic..Find the time period of these oscillation

R
O

39.Two identical balls A and B each of mass 0.1kg,are attached to two identical massless springs. The spring
mass system is constrained to move inside a rigid smooth pipe bent in the form of the circle as the form of a
circle as shown in figure. The pipe is fixed in a horizontal plane. The centres of the ball can move in a circle of
radius 0.06m. Each spring has a natural length of 0.06 and spring constant 0.1N/m. Initially both the balls are

displaced by an angle   rad with respect to the diameter PQ of the circle(shown in figure)and released
6
from rest.

A B
0.06 m
 /6  /6
P Q

(a) Calculate the frequency of oscillation of ball B

(b)Find the speed of ball A when A and B are at the two ends of the diameter PQ
(c)What is the total energy of the system?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 104

physics Classwork Problem

22 -24. Wave
0.8
1. y  x, t   represents a moving pulse where x and y are in meter and t in second.
 4 x  5t 2  5
 
Then select the correct alternative(s).
(A) Pulse is moving in positive x -direction. (B) In 2 s it will travel a distance of 2.5 m.
(C) Its maximum displacement is 0.16 m. (D) It is a symmetric pulse.

2. A wave pulse is travelling along  x direction on a string at 2 m/s. Displacement y (in cm) of the
2
particle at x  0 at any time t is given by 2 / t  1 . Find  
(i) Expression of the function y   x, t  , i.e., displacement of a particle at position x and time t.
(ii)Draw the shape of the pulse at t = 0 and t = 1 s.

3 A pulse moving to the right along the x -axis is represented by the wave function
2
y  x, t   2
Where x and y are measured in centimeters and t is measured in seconds.
 x  3.0t  1
Find expression for the wave function at t = 0, t = 1.0 s. and t = 2.0 s and plot the shape of pulse at
these lines.
A
4. A wave is travelling along X -axis. The disturbance at x = 0 and t = 0 is and is increasing,
2
where Ais amplitude of the wave. If y  Asin  kx  t    determine the initial phase  .

5. A transverse wave is travelling along a string from left to right. The figure represents the shape of
string (snap shot) at a given instant. At this instant
(a)which points have an upward velocity? (b)which points will have downward velocity?
(c)which points have zero velocity?
(d)which points have maximum magnitude of velocity?
y

C v
B
D
I
A
E
F H

G
6. Figure shows a snapshot of a sinusoidal travelling wave taken t  0.3s . The wavelength is 7.5 cm
and the amplitude is 2 cm. If the crest P was at x  0 at t = 0, write the equation of travelling wave.
y

t  0.3s
2 cm

x
1.2 cm

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 105

physics Classwork Problem
7.(a) Write the expression for y as a function of x and t for a sinusoidal wave travelling along a rope
in the negative x direction with the following characteristics: A= 8.00 cm,  = 80.0 cm, f = 3.00 Hz,
and y  0, t   0 at t = 0. (b) Write an expression for y as a function of x and t for the wave in part (a)
assuming that y  x,0  0 at the point x = 10 cm.

8. Given the equation for a wave on a string y  0.03sin  3x  2t  where y and x are in metres and t is
in seconds.
a. At t=0, what are the values of the displacement at x = 0,0.1 m, 0.2 m, and 0.3 m?
b. At x= 0.1 in what are the values of the displacements at t = 0,0.1 s, and 0.2 s?
c. What is the equation for the velocity of oscillation of the particles of the string?
d. What is the maximum velocity of oscillation?
e. What is the velocity of propagation of the wave?
1
9. Figure shows the shape of a progressive wave at time t  0 . After a time t  , the particle at
80
the origin has its maximum negative displacement. If the wave speed is 80 units, then find the
equation of the progressive wave.
y

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x

-5

10. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m hangs from a ceiling
(a) Find the speed of transverse wave in the rope at a point 0.5 m distant from the lower end.
(b) Calculate the time taken by a transverse wave to travel the full length of the rope
( g  9.8 ms2 )
11.Two waves in the same medium are represented by y  t curves in the figure Find the ratio of
their average intensities?
y

5
Wave 1

2 Wave 2

12. Two wires of different densities are soldered together end to end and are then stretched under
tension T. The wave speed in the first wire is twice that in the second wire.
(a) If the amplitude of incident wave is A, what are amplitudes of reflected and transmitted waves?
(b) Assuming no energy loss in the wire, find the fraction of the incident power that is reflected at
the junction and fraction of the wine that is transmitted.

13. The linear mass density of a non-uniform wire under constant tension decreases gradually
along the wire so that an incident wave is transmitted without reflection. The wire is uniform for
  x  0 . In this region, a transverse wave has the form y  x, t   0.003cos  25 x  50t  where
y and x are in metres and t is in seconds. From x  0 to x  20 m the linear mass density

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 106

physics Classwork Problem

decreases gradually from 1 to 1 1

. For 20  x   , the linear mass density is  
.(a) Find the
4 4
wave velocity for large value of x (b) Find the amplitude of the wave for large value of x .
(c) Give y  x, t  for x  20 m .

14. A long wire PQR is made by joining two wires PQ and QR of equal radii. PQ has length 4.8 m
and mass 0.06 kg. QR has length 2.56 m and mass 0.2 kg. The wire PQR is under a tension of 80 N. A
sinusoidal wave pulse of amplitude 3.5 cm is sent along the wire PQ from the end? No power is
dissipated during the propagation of the wave-pulse. Calculate
a. The time taken by the wave pulse to reach the other end R of the wire, and
b. The amplitude of the reflected and transmitted wave pulses after (he incident wave pulse crosses
the joint Q.

15. A harmonic wave is travelling on string 1. At a junction with string 2 it is partly reflected and
partly transmitted. The linear mass density of the second string is four times that of the first string,
and the boundary between the two strings is at x= 0. If the expression for the incident wave is
Yi  Ai cos  k1 x  1t  .
a. What are the expressions for the transmitted and that reflected waves in terms of Ai , k1 ,
and 1 ?
b. Show that the average power carried by the incident wave is equal to the sum of the average
power carried by the transmitted and reflected waves.
16.Find the displacement amplitude of a sound wave having a frequency of 100 Hz and a pressure
amplitude of 10 Pa . If another sound wave of frequency 300 Hz has displacement amplitude of 10 7
m, find the pressure amplitude of this wave. Speed of sound in air is 340 ms 1 and density of air is
1.29 kgm 3 .
17. The equation of a sound wave in air is given by p   0.02  sin   3000  t   9.0  x  , where all
variables are in SI units, (a) Find the frequency, wavelength and the speed of sound wave in air. (b)
If the equilibrium pressure of air is 1.01  10 5 N/m 2 , what are the maximum and minimum
pressures at a point as the wave passes through that point?
18. The velocity of sound in hydrogen at 0°C is1200 m/s . When some amount of oxygen is mixed
with hydrogen, the velocity decreases to 500 m/s. Determine the ratio of H2 to O2 , by volume in
this mixture, given that the density of oxygen is 16 times that of hydrogen.

19. The figure shows an instantaneous displacement position graph of a sound wave travelling
along the positive x  axis. Identify the points of
y

B C
A x

i. maximum pressure ii. minimum pressure and iii. atmospheric pressure

(or normal pressure).
20. The faintest sounds the human ear can detect at a frequency of 1000 Hz correspond to an
intensity of about 1.00  10 12 W/m 2 , which is called threshold of hearing. The loudest sounds the ear
can tolerate at this frequency correspond to an intensity of about 1.00 W/m 2 , the threshold of pain.
Determine the pressure amplitude and displacement amplitude associated with these two limits.
Take speed of sound = 343 m/s and density of air  1.20 kg/m3 .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 107

physics Classwork Problem
21. A family ice show is held at an enclosed arena. The skaters perform to music with level 80.0
dB. This level is too loud for your baby, who yells at 75.0 dB. (a) What total sound intensity engulfs
you? (b) What is the combined sound level?

22. A firework charge is detonated many metres above the ground. At a distance of 400 m from
the explosion, the acoustic pressure reaches a maximum of 10.0 N/m 2 . Assume that the speed of
sound is constant at 343 m/s throughout the atmosphere over the region considered, the ground
absorbs all the sound falling on it, and the air absorbs sound energy at the rate of 7.00 dB/km. What
is the sound level (in decibels) at 4.00 km from the explosion?
23.A person, standing between two parallel hills, fires a gun. He hears the first echo after 1.5 s and
the second after 2.5 s. If the speed of sound is 332 ms 1 , calculate the distance between the hills.
When will he hear the third echo?
24. . A police siren emits a sinusoidal wave with frequency fs  300 Hz . The speed of sound is
340 m/s. (a) Find the wavelength of waves if the siren is at rest in the air. (b) If the siren is moving
at 30 m/s, then find the wavelengths of the waves in front of and behind the source.
25. If a listener L is at rest and the siren in previous illustration is moving away from L at a
speed of 30 m/s, what frequency does the listener hear?

26. Standing at a crosswalk, you hear a frequency of 560 Hz from the siren of an approaching
ambulance. After the ambulance passes, the observed frequency of the siren is 480 Hz. Determine
the ambulance’s speed from these observations. Speed of sound = 343 m/s.
27. Two ships are moving along a line due east. The trailing ship has a speed relative to land- based
observation point of 64.0 km/h, and the leading ship has a speed of 45.0 km/h relative to that point.
The two ships are in a region of the ocean where the current is moving uniformly due west at 10.0
km/h. The trailing ship transmits a sonar signal at a frequency of 1200.0 Hz. What frequency is
monitored by the leading ship? Use 1520 m/s as the speed of sound in ocean water.
28. To permit measurement of her speed, a sky diver carries a buzzer emitting a steady tone at
1800 Hz. A friend on the ground at the landing site directly below listens to the amplified sound he
receives. Assume the air is calm and the sound speed is 343 m/s independent of altitude. While the
sky diver is falling at terminal speed, his friend on the ground receives waves of frequency 2150
Hz. What is the sky diver’s speed of descent? (b) Suppose the sky diver can hear the sound of the
buzzer reflected from the ground. What frequency does she receive?

29. Two trains A and B simultaneously start moving along parallel tracks from a station along
same direction. A starts with constant acceleration 2 m/s 2 from rest, while B with the same
acceleration but with initial velocity of 40 m/s. Twenty seconds after the start, passenger of A
hears whistle of B. If frequency of whistle is 1194 Hz and velocity of sound in air is 322 m/s,
calculate frequency observed by the passenger.
30. A train approaching a railway crossing at a speed of 120 km/h sounds a short whistle at
frequency 640 Hz when it is 300 m away from the crossing. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
what will be the frequency heard by a person standing on a road perpendicular to the track through
the crossing at a distance of 400 m from the crossing?

31. Your clock radio awakens you with a steady and irritating sound of frequency 600 Hz. On
morning, it malfunctions and cannot be turned off. In frustration, you drop the clock radio out of
your fourth-story dorm window, 15.0 m from the ground. Assume the speed of sound is 343 m/s. As
you listen to the falling clock radio, what frequency do you hear just before you hear it striking the
ground?

32. A submarine (sub A ) travels through water at a speed of 8.00 m/s, emitting a sonar wave at
frequency of 1400 Hz. The speed of sound in the water is 1533 m/s. A second submarine (sub B) is
located such that submarines are travelling directly towards each other, second submarine is
moving at 9.00 m/s.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 108

physics Classwork Problem
a. What frequency is detected by an observer riding on sub B as the submarines approach each
other?
b. The submarines barely miss each other and pass. What frequency is detected by an observer
riding on sub B as the submarines recede from each other?
1
33. A whistle of frequency 540 Hz rotates in a circle of radius 2 m at an angular speed of 15 rads .
What is the lowest and highest frequency heard by a listener, a long distance away at rest with
respect to the centre of the circle? Can the apparent frequency be ever equal to actual?
Given that the velocity of sound in air is 330 ms -1
vs D

R
A
O C

B vs

34. A source of sonic oscillations of frequency f 0  1700 Hz and a receiver are located at the same
point. At the moment t = 0 , the source starts receding from the receiver with constant acceleration
a  10 ms 2 . Assuming the velocity of sound to be equal to v  340 ms 1 , find the oscillation
frequency registered by the stationary receiver t = 10 seconds after the start of motion.
35. Two vehicles A and B are moving towards each other with same speed u. They blow horns of
the same frequency f . Wind is blowing at speed w in the direction of motion of A . The driver of
vehicle A hears the sound of horn blown by vehicle B and the sound of horn of his own vehicle
after reflection from the vehicle B. Find the frequency and wavelength of both sounds received by
A . Velocity of sound is v .

36. A source emitting a sound of frequency f is placed at a large distance from an observer. The
source starts moving towards the observer with a uniform acceleration a . Find the frequency
heard by the observer corresponding to the wave emitted just after the source starts. The speed of
sound in the medium is v .
37. A train approaching a hill at a speed of 40 km/h sounds a whistle of frequency 580 Hz when it
is at a distance of 1 km from a hill. A wind with a speed of 40 km/h is blowing in the direction of
motion of the train . Find
(a)the frequency of the whistle as heard by an observer on the hill.
(b)the distance from the hill at which the echo from the hill is heard by the driver and its frequency.
(Velocity of sound in air = 1200 km/h)
38. . Two pulses travelling on the same string are described by
5 5
y1  2
and y2  2
 3x  4t  2  3x  4t  6 2
a. In which direction does each pulse travel?
b. At what instant do the two cancel everywhere?
c. At what point do the two pulses always cancel?
39. Two travelling sinusoidal waves described by the wave functions
y1   5.00 m  sin   4.00 x  1200t   and y2   5.00 m  sin   4.00 x  1200t  0.250 
where x, y1 and y2 are in metres and t is in seconds, (a) what is the amplitude of the resultant
wave? (b) What is the frequency of resultant wave?
40. . In a Quinck's experiment, the sound intensity being detected at an appropriate point,
changes from minimum to maximum for the second time, when the slidable tube is drawn apart by
9.0 cm. If the speed of sound in air be 336 m/s, then what is the frequency of this sounding source?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 109

physics Classwork Problem
41. . Consider a string fixed at one end. A travelling wave given by the wave equation
y  A sin   t  kx  is incident on it. Show that at the fixed end of a string the wave suffers a phase
change of  , i.e., as it travels back as if the wave is inverted.
42. Consider the following wave functions:
a. y  A sin  t  kx  , b. y  A sin  kx   t  c. y  A cos   t  kx  d. y  A cos  kx   t 
e. y  A sin   t  kx  , f. y  A cos   t  kx 
Write the equations of reflected wave after reflection from a free and a fixed boundary. Also find the
resulting stationary waves formed by the superposition of its reflected wave.
43. Two sinusoidal waves combining in a medium are described by the wave functions
y1   3.0 cm  sin   x  0.60t  y 2   3.0 cm  sin   x  0.60 t 
where x is in centimeters and t is in seconds. Determine the maximum transverse position of un
element of the medium at  a  x  0.250 cm,  b  x  0.500 cm and  c  x  1.50 cm d) Find the three
smallest values of x corresponding to antinodes.
44. The displacement of the medium in a sound wave is given by the equation yt  A cos  ax  bt 
where A . a and b are positive constants. The wave is reflected by an obstacle situated a. x = 0. The
intensity of the reflected wave is 0.64 times that of the incident wave.
(a) What are the wavelength and frequency of incident wave ?
(b) Write the equation for the reflected wave.
(c)In the resultant wave formed after reflection, find maximum and minimum value of the particle
speeds in the medium.
(d) Express the resultant wave as a superposition of a standing wave and a travelling wave. What
are positions of the antinodes of the standing wave? What the direction of propagation of travelling
wave ?

45. The vibration of a string of length 60 cm fixed at both ends are represented by the equation
x
y  4 sin   cos  96  where x and y are in cm and t in second.
 15 
(a) What is the maximum displacement at x  5 cm ?
(b) Where are the nodes located along the string?
(c) What is the velocity of the particle at x = 7.5 cm and t  0.25 s ?
(d) Write down the equations of component waves whose superposition gives the above wave
46. The following equations represent transverse waves:
z1  A cos  kx   t  , z 2  A cos  kx   t  and z3  A cos  ky   t  .
Identify the combination of the wave which will produce
(a) a standing wave
(b) a wave travelling in the direction making an angle of 45 with the positive x and positive y -
axis. In each case find the position at which the resultant intensity is always zero.
47. A standing wave is formed by two harmonic waves, y1 = A sin  kx   t  and
y2 = A sin  kx   t  travelling on a string of density  , area of cross-section S, in opposite
directions. Find the total mechanical energy between two adjacent nodes on the string.
48. Consider a wave propagating in the negative x -direction whose frequency is 100 Hz .At t = 5s,
the displacement associated with the wave is given by y  0.5 cos  0.1x  where x and y are
measured in centimeters and t in seconds. Obtain the displacement (as a function of x ) at t = 10 s.
What is the wavelength and velocity associated with the wave?
49. A string on a cello vibrates in its first normal mode with a frequency of 220 Hz. The vibrating
segment is 70.0 cm long and has mass of 1.20 g. (a) Find the tension in the string, (b) Determine the
frequency of vibration when the string vibrates in three segments.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 110

physics Classwork Problem
50. A string 120 cm in length sustains a standing wave with the points of the string at which the
displacement amplitude is equal to 3.5 mm being separated by 15.0 cm. Find the maximum
displacement amplitude. To which overtone do these oscillations correspond?
51. The fundamental frequency of a sonometer wire increases by 6 Hz if its tension is increased
by 44%, keeping the length constant. Find the change in the fundamental frequency of the
sonometer wire when the length of the wire is increased by 20%, keeping the original tension in the
wire constant.
52. . Middle C on a piano has a fundamental frequency of 262 Hz, and the first A above middle C
has a fundamental frequency of 440 Hz.
a. Calculate the frequencies of the next two harmonics of the C string.
b. If A and C strings have the same linear mass density  and length L, determine the ratio of
tensions in the two strings.
2
53. An aluminium wire of length L  60 cm and of cross-sectional area 0.01 cm is connected to a
steel wire of the same cross-sectional area. The compound wire is loaded with a block of mass 10 kg
, as shown in the figure, so that the distance L2 , from the joint to the supporting pulley is 86.6 cm
Transverse waves are set up in the composite wire by using an external source of variable
frequency.
L1  0.6 m L2  0.866 m

Aluminium Steel

10 kg

(a) Find the lowest frequency of excitation for which standing waves are observed such that the
joint in the wire is a node.
(b)What is total number of nodes observed at this frequency excluding the two at the ends of the
3 3
wire? Density of aluminum is 2.6 gcm ; Density of steel is 7.8 gcm .
54.Two wires are welded together end to end. The wires are made of the same material, but the
diameter of one is twice that of the other. They are subjected to a tension of 4.60 N. The thin wire
has a length of 40.0 cm and a linear mass density of 2.00 g/m. The combination is tied at both ends
and vibrated in such a way that the antinodes are present, with the node between them precisely at
the weld, (a) What is the frequency of vibration (b) Find the length of the thick wire.

55. One end of a horizontal string is attached to a vibrating blade, and the other end passes over a
pulley as in Fig. (a). A sphere of mass 2.00 kg hangs at the end of the string. The string is vibrating in
its second harmonic. A container of water is raised under the sphere so that the sphere is
completely submerged. In this configuration, the string vibrates in its fifth harmonic as shown in
Fig(b). What is the radius of the sphere?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 111

physics Classwork Problem
(a)
T1

mg

(b B
)
T2

mg

56. The air column in a pipe closed at one end is made to vibrate in its second overtone by a
tuning fork of frequency 440 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms 1 . End correction may be
neglected. Let P0 denote the mean pressure at any point in the pipe, and P0 the maximum
amplitude of pressure variation.
(a) Find the length L of the air column?
(b) What is the amplitude of pressure variation at the middle of the column?
(c) What are the maximum and minimum pressure at the open end of the pipe?
(d) What are the maximum and minimum pressure at the closed-end of the pipe?
57. A 3.6 m long pipe resonates with a source of frequency 212.5 Hz when water level is at certain
heights in the pipe. Find the heights of water level (from the bottom of the pipe) at which
resonances occur. Neglect end correction. Now the pipe is filled to a height H   3.6m  . A small hole
is drilled very close to its bottom and water is allowed to leak. Obtain an expression for the rate of
fall of water level in the pipe as a function of H. The radii of the pipe and the hole are 2 102 m and
1103 m respectively. Calculate the time interval between the occurrences of first two resonances.
Speed of sound in air is 340 m/s and g  10 m / s 2
58. Two identical loudspeakers are drives in phase by a common oscillator at 800 Hz and face each
other at a distance of 1.25 m. Locate the points along the line joining the two speakers where
relative minima of sound pressure amplitude would be expected.  Use v  343 m/s.
59. A simple apparatus for demonstrating resonance in an air column is depicted . A vertical pipe
open at both ends is partially submerge in water, and a tuning fork vibration at an unknown
frequency is placed near the top of the pipe. The length L of the air column can be adjusted by
moving the pipe vertically. The sound waves generated by the fork are reinforced of the pipe. For a
certain pipe, the smallest value of L for which a peak occurs in the sound intensity is 9.00 cm.
(a)
(a)

f ? First
resistance

second
resistance
(third harmonic)
Water Third
resistance
(fourth harmonic)

a. What is the frequency of the tuning fork?

b. What are the values of L for the next two resonance conditions?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 112

physics Classwork Problem
60. . A metallic rod of length 1 m is rigidly clamped at its midpoint. Longitudinal stationary
waves are set up in the rod in such a way that there are two nodes on either side of the midpoint.
The amplitude of an antinode is 2  10 6 m. Write the equation of motion at a point 2 cm from the
midpoint and those of constituent waves in the rod.
3 3
( Y  2  1011 N/m 2 and   8 10 kg/m )
61. A metal rod of length l  100 cm is clamped at two points A and B as shown in fig Distance of
each clamp from nearer end is a  30 cm. If density and Young’s modulus of elasticity of rod
3
material are   9000 kg / m and Y 144 GPa, respectively, calculate minimum and next higher
frequency of natural longitudinal oscillations of the rod.

30 cm 30 cm
l  10 0 cm

62. A Kundt’s tube experiment is conducted with 1m long glass rod, twice, one with air and the
other with hydrogen gas filled in the tube. In the first case, there were 11 heaps of lycopodium
powder within a length of 64.4 cm between the first and the last. The corresponding parameters in
the second case are 5 nodal heaps within 99.7 cm length. Find the velocity of sound in glass and in
hydrogen, if that in air be 335 m/s.
63. Two identical piano strings of length 0.750 m are each tuned exactly to 440 Hz. The tension in
one of the strings is then increased by 1.0%. If they are now struck, what is the beat frequency
between the fundamental of the two strings?
64. Two radio stations broadcast their programmes at the same amplitude A and at slightly
different frequencies 1 and 2 respectively, where 1  2  103 Hz . A detector receives the signal
from the two stations simultaneously. It can only detect signals of intensity  2 A 2
(a) Find the time interval between successive maxima of the intensity of the signal received by
the detector.
(b) Find the time for which the detector remains idle in each cycle of the intensity of the signal.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 113

physics Classwork Problem

25. Wave Optics

1. Two speakers S1 and S 2 derived by the same amplifier and placed at y  0.1m and y  0.1m (in
fig).The speakers vibrates in phase at 600Hz.Aman stands at a point on the x-axis at a very large
distance from the origin and starts moving parallal to the Y-axis. The speed of sound in the air is
330m/s
a)At what angle will the intensity of sound drop to a minimum for the first time?
b)At what angle will the sound intensity be maximum for the first time?
c)If he continues to walk along the line,how many more maxima can he hear?

2. Two light rays, initially in phase and having wavelength 6  10 -7 m, go through different plastic
layers
of the same thickness, 7  10 -6 m . The indices of refraction are 1.65 for one layer and 1.49 for the
other.
(a) What is the equivalent phase difference between the rays when they emerge?
(b) If those two rays then reach a common point, does the interference result in complete darkness,
maximum brightness, intermediate illumination but closer to complete darkness, or intermediate
illumination but closer to maximum brightness?
3. Two sources are placed or x-axis at a separation d  3 . An ohserver starts moving from A on a
circular track of radius R R>>d  . How many bright point and dark points will he observe?
Find the angular positions of maxima and minima.

4. Two parallel heams of light P and Q are incident normally on a prism and the transmitted rays
are brought to focus with the help of a convergent lens as shown in Fig. If the intensities of the
upper and lower beams immediately after transmission from fact AC are 4I and I, respectively, find
the resultant intensity at the focus.
5. Young's double slit experiment is carried out using microwaves of wavelength   3 cm. Distance
between the slits is d = 5 cm and the distance between the plane of slits and the screen is D = 100
cm . Find the number of maximas and their positions on the screen.
6. Two coherent narrow slits emitting light of wavelength  . in the same phase are placed parallel
to each other at a small separation of 2 . The light is collected on a screen S which is placed at a
distance D     from the slit S1 , as shown in figure. Find the finite distance x such that the
intensity at P is equal to intensity at O.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 114

physics Classwork Problem


 
7.A Young’s double slit arrangement produces interference fringes for sodium light    5890  
 

that are 20 apart.What is the angular fringe separation if the entire arrangement is immersed in
4
water?Refractive index of water is
3
8. In YDSE, light of wavelength 60 nm is used. The separation between the sources is 6 mm and
between the sources and the screen is 2 m. Find the positions of a point lying between third
maxima and third minima where the intensity is three-fourth of the maximum intensity on the
screen
9. . Fig shows a photograph that illustrates the kind of interference fringes that can result: when
white light, which is a mixture of all colors, is used in Young’s experiment. Except for the central
fringe, which is white, the bright fringes are a rainbow of colours. Why does Young’s experiment
separate white light into the constituent colours? In any group of coloured fringes, such as the two
singled out in the figure, why is red farther out from the central fringe than green is? And finally,
why is the central fringe white rather than coloured?

Fig. Results observed on the screen in one version of Young’s experiment in which white light (a
mixture of all colours) is used.

10. White coherent light  4000 — 7000 A  is sent through the slits of a YDSE. The separation
 
between the slits is 0.5 mm and screen is 50 cm away from the slits. There is a hole in the screen at
a point 1.0 mm away (along the width of the fringe) from the central line.
a. Which wavelength(s) will be absent in the light coming from the hole?
b. Which wavelength(s) will have a strong intensity?
11. . A coherent parallel beam of microwaves of wavelength   0.5 mm falls on a Young's double
slit apparatus, the separation between the slits is 1.0 mm. The intensity of microwaves is measured
on a screen placed parallel to the plane of the slits at a distance of 1.0 m from it as shown in the
figure.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 115

physics Classwork Problem
(a) If the incident beam falls normally on the double slit apparatus, find the y-coordinates of all the
interference minima on the screen,
(b) If the incident beam makes an angle of 30° with the x-axis (as in the dotted arrow shown in
figure), find the y-coordinates of the first minima on either side of the central maximum.
d
12. In the YDSE the monochromatic source of wavelength  is placed at a distance from the
2
central axis (as shown in the figure), where d is the separation between the two slits S1 and S2 .

(a) Find the position of the central maxima.

(b) Find the order of interference formed at O.
(c) Find the minimum thickness of the film of refractive index   1.5 to be placed in front of
3
S2 so that intensity at O becomes th of the maximum intensity.
4

Given   6000 A and d = 6 mm.
13. White light is used in a YDSE with separation between the sources to be 0.9 m and separation
between the sources and the screen to be 1m. Light reaching the screen at position y= 1 mm is
passed through a prism and its spectrum is obtained. Find the missing lines in the visible region of
this spectrum.

14. . In the Young's Double Slit experiment a point source of   5000 A is placed slightly off the
central axis as shown in the figure.

(a) Find the nature and order of the interference at the point P.
(b) Find the nature and order of the interference at O.
(c) Where should we place a film of refractive index   1.5 and what should be its thickness so that
a maxima of zero order is placed at O.
15. In a Young's experiment, the upper slit is covered by a thin glass plate of refractive index 1.4
white the lower slit is covered by another glass plate, having the same thickness as the first one but

having refractive index 1.7. Interference pattern is observed using light of wavelengths 5400 A . It is
found that the point P on the screen where the central maximum (n = 0) fell before the glass plates
were intensity now has 3/4 the original intensity. It is further observed that what used to be the
fourth maximum earlier, lies below the point P while the fifth minimum lies above P.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 116

physics Classwork Problem

Calculate the thickness of the glass plate. (Absorption in tight by glass plate may be neglected.)

16. A screen is at a distance D = 80 cm from a diaphragm having two narrow slits S1 and S2 which
are d = 2 cm apart.Slit S1 is covered by a transparent sheet of thickness 1  2.5m and slit S2 is
covered by another sheet of thickness  2  1.25m as shown in Fig.

17. . A Young double slit apparatus is immersed in a liquid, of refractive index 1 . The slit plane
touches the liquid, surface. A parallel beam of monochromatic light of wavelength  (in air) is
incident normally on the slits.
(a) Find the fringe width
(b) If one of the slits (say S2 ) is covered by a transparent slab of refractive index  2 and
thickness t as shown, find the new position of central maxima.
(c) Now the other slit S1 , is also covered by a slab of same thickness and refractive index 3 as
shown in figure due to which the central maxima recovers its position, find the value of 3 .

(d) Find the ratio of intensities at O in the three conditions (a), (b) and (c).
18. A large opaque sheet placed parallel to the yz plane at x = 0.03 m . The region x  0 is filled with
3
a transparent liquid of refractive index . A wide monochromatic beam of light of wavelength 900
2
nm falls on the yz -plane at x = 0 making an angle of 30° with the x-axis. The sheet has two slits
parallel to z-axis at y = ±0.9 mm. The intensity of the wave is measured on a screen placed at x =
1.03 m parallel to the sheet.
(a) Find the intensity at a point P on the screen where y=z=0.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 117

physics Classwork Problem
(b) The lower slit is covered by a transparent strip of refractive index 1.4 and thickness 4.5 mm.
Now find the intensity at point P.
19. In a Young's Double slit Experiment, the light source is at distance l1  20m and l2  40m from
the slits. The light of wavelength  = 500 nm is incident on slits separated at a distance 10 m . A
screen is placed at a distance D = 2m away from the slits as shown in
(a) Find the values of 0 relative to the central line where maxima appear on the screen?
(b) How many maxima will appear on the screen?
(c) What should be minimum thickness of a slab of refractive index 1.5 be placed on the path of
one of the ray so that minima occurs at C?


20. . In a Young's double slit experiment a parallel beam containing wavelengths 1  4000 A and

2  5600 A incident at an angle   30 on a diaphragm having narrow slits at a separation
d  2 mm . The screen is placed at a distance D =40 cm from slits. A mica slab of thickness t  5 mm
is placed in front of one of the slits and whole the apparatus is submerged in water. If the central
bright fringe is observed at C .calculate

(a) The refractive index of the slab.

4
(b) The distance of the first black line from C. Both wavelengths are in air. Take  w 
3

21. A light wave of wavelength 500 nm falls upon three0.5 mm each from one another. A screen is a
distance 2 m from slits. Find

(a)The distance from P where intensity reduces to zero

(b) The distance from P where next bright fringe are observed
(c) The ratios of intensities of bright fringes observed on the screen.

22. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm is cut along its diameter and the two halves are displaced by
t = 1 cm along the principal axis. A monochromatic point source of wavelength 476 nm is placed at a
distance 40 cm from the first half, as shown in the figure. Find the position of the first maximum.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 118

physics Classwork Problem

23. A convergent lens with a focal length of f = 10 cm is cut into two halves that are then moved
apart to a distance of d = 0.5 mm (a double lens). Find the fringe width on screen at a distance of 60

cm behind the lens if a point source of monochromatic light    5000 A  is placed in front of the
 
lens at a distance of a-15 cm from it.
24. A glass lens is coated on one side with a thin film of magnesium fluoride (Mg F2 ) to reduce
reflection from the lens surface. The index of refraction of MgF2 , is 1.38; that of the glass is 1.50.
What is the least coating thickness that eliminates (via interference) the reflections at the middle of
(he visible spectrum    550 nm  ? Assume that the light is approximately perpendicular to the lens
surface.

25. White light is incident normally on a glass plate of thickness 0.50 x 10 6 and index of refraction
1.50. Which wavelengths in the visible region (400 nm-700 nm) are strongly reflected by the plate?
26. White light, with a uniform intensity across the visible wavelength range 430-690 nm, is
perpendicularly incident on a water film, of index of refraction   1.33 and thickness d = 320 nm,
that is suspended in air. At what wavelength  is the light reflected by the film brightest to an
observer?
27. A slit of width d is illuminated by white light.


(a)For what value of d ,will the first minimum for red light of   6500  and   15 ?

(b) What is wave-length   of the light whose first side maximum is at   15 , thus coinciding with
the first minimum for the red light?
28. Angular width of central maximum in the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a slit is measured.

The slit is illuminated by light of wavelength 6000 A . When the slit is illuminated by light of
another wavelength, the angular width decreases by 30%. Calculate the wavelength of this light.
The same decrease in the angular width of central maximum is obtained when the original
apparatus is immersed in a liquid. Find refractive index of the liquid.

29. For what distance is the ray optics a good approximation, if the slit is 3 mm wide and the

wavelength of light is 5000 A ?
30. A ray of light strikes a glass plate at an angle of 60°.If the reflected and refracted rays
areperpendicular to eachother, find the refractive index of glass.

31. Two 'crossed' polaroids A and B are placed in thepath of a light-beam. In between these, a third
polaroid Cis placed whose polarisation axis makes an angle  with the polarisation axis of

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 119

physics Classwork Problem
thepolaroid A . If the intensity oflight emerging from the polaroid A is I 0 , then show that the
1
intensity of light emerging from polaroid B will be I 0 sin 2  2  .
4
32. Two polaroids are placed 90° to each other. What happens when N -1more polaroids are
inserted between two crossed polaroids (at 90° to each other). Their axes are equally spaced. How
does the transmitted intensity be have for large N ?
33. A beam of plane-polarised falls normally on a polariser (cross-sectional area 3  10 4 m 2 ) which
rotates about the axis of the ray with an angular velocity of 31.4 rads 1 . Find the energy of light
passing through the polariser per revolution and the intensity of the emergent beam if the flux of
energy of the incident ray is10 3 W .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 120

physics Classwork Problem

26. Geometrical Optics

1.a) A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror along a vector iˆ  ˆj  kˆ . The normal on incidence point is along
iˆ  ˆj . Find a unit vector along the reflected ray.
1.b) Show that for a light ray incident at an angle ‘i’ on getting reflected the angle of deviation is
    2i or   2i .
2. Figure shows a point object A and a plane mirror MN .Find the position of the image of object A , in
mirror MN , by drawing ray diagram. Indicate the region in which observer’s eye must be present in order to
view the image. (This region is called field of view.)

3.a) A point source of light B is placed at a distance L in front of the center of a mirror of width d hung
vertically on a wall. A man walks in front of the mirror along a line parallel to the mirror at a distance 2 L
from it, as shown in Fig. Find the greatest distance over which he can see the image of the light source from
the mirror.

3.b) Figure shows a point object placed between two parallel mirrors. Its distance from M1 , is 2 cm and that
from M 2 is 8 cm. Find the distance of images from the two mirrors considering reflection on mirror M1 first.

4. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other at an angle  . A ray of light Is reflected first at one mirror and
then at the other, find the total deviation suffered by the ray.
5. Find the co-ordinates of the location of the image formed for an object kept at origin ac shown in figure.

6. A plane mirror hinged at O is free to rotate in a vertical plane. The point O is at a distance x from a long
screen placed in front of the mirror as shown in figure. A laser beam of light incident vertically downward is
reflected by the mirror at O so that a bright spot is formed at the screen. At the instant shown, the angle of
incidence is  and the mirror is rotating clockwise with constant angular velocity  . Find the speed of the
spot at this instant.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 121

physics Classwork Problem

7. By what angle the mirror must be rotated such that the reflected ray becomes vertical.

8. A mirror is placed at the centre of a sphere and it is rotating with an angular speed  Incident light falls on
the mirror at the centre of the sphere. Find out the linear speed of the light spot on the sphere ?

9. In the previous question instead of spherical wall there is a vertical wall at a perpendicular distance d
from the point & where the light is incident.
10. Consider two perpendicular mirrors M1 and M 2 a point object O . Taking origin at the point of
intersection of the mirrors and the coordinates of object as ( x, y ) . Find the position and number of images.
11. Two mirrors are inclined at an angle of 30°. An object is placed making 10° with the mirror M1 . Find the
positions of first two images formed by each mirror. Find the total number of images using (i) direct formula
and (ii) counting the images
12. Find the region on y -axis in which reflected rays are present object is at A(2, 0) and MN is a plane
mirror, as shown

13. An a oblong object PQ of height ‘ h ’ stands erect on a flat horizontal mirror. Sun rays fall on the object at
a certain angle. Find the length of the shadow on screen placed beyond the shadow on the mirror.

14. A reflection surface is represented by the equation x 2  y 2  a 2 . A ray traveling in negative x -direction is
directed towards positive y -direction after reflection from the surface at some point
' P ' Then co-ordinates of point ‘ P ' are
15. A ray is traveling along x -axis in negative x -direction. A plane mirror is placed at origin facing the ray.
What should be the angle of plane mirror with the x -axis so that the ray of light offer reflecting from the
plane mirror passes through point (1m, 3m )?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 122

physics Classwork Problem
16. Two plane mirror A and B are aligned parallel to each other as shown in the figure. A light ray is
incident at an angle 30° at a point just inside one end of A . The plane of incidence coincides with the plane of
the figure. The maximum number of times the ray undergoes reflection (including the first one) before it
emerges out is _
17. Point object is moving with a speed V before an arrangement of two mirrors as shown in figure. Find the
velocity of image in mirror M1 w.r.t. image in mirror M 2 ?

18. Find the velocity of image of a moving particle in situation as shown in figure.

19. Two plane minor are placed as shown in the figure below: A point object is approaching the intersection
point of mirror with a speed of 100 cm/s. The velocity of the image of object formed by M 2 w.r.t. velocity of

image of object formed by M1 is:

20. In the situation show in figure, find the velocity of image?

21. An object moves with 5m/s towards right while the mirror moves with 1m/s towards the left as shown.

Find the velocity of image.

22. A plane mirror is inclined at an angle  with the horizontal surface. A particle is projected from point P
(fig.) at t  0 with a velocity v at angle  with the horizontal. The image of the particle is observed from the

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 123

physics Classwork Problem
frame of the particle projected. Assuming the particle does not collide the mirror, find the (a) time when
image will come momentarily at rest w.r.t. the particle (b) path of the image as seen by the particle.

23. A plane mirror is placed at parallel of y -axis. facing the positive x -axis. An object starts from (2 m , 0, 0)
with a velocity of (2iˆ  2 ˆj ) m/s. The relative velocity of image with respect to object is along
24. Find the distance CQ if incident light ray parallel to principal axis is incident at an angle i . Also, find the

distance CQ if i  0.
25. Find the distance of object from a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm so that image size is four times
the size of the object.
26. What do we do if the size of the object is large as compared to the distance u?
f
27. A thin rod of length is placed along the optical axis of a concave mirror of focal length f such that its
3
image which is real and elongated just touches the rod. Calculate the magnification.
f
28. A thin rod of length is placed along the principle axis of a concave mirror of focal length f such that its
3
image just touches the rod. Calculate the magnification.
29. A small piece of wire bent into an 'L' shape with uptight and horizontal portions of equal lengths, is placed
with the horizontal portion along the axis of the concave minor whose radius of curvature is 10 cm. If the
bend is 20cm from the pole of the minor, then the ratio of the lengths of the images of the upright and
horizontal portions of the wire is
30. Two spherical minors M1 and M2 one convex, and other concave having same radius of curvature R are
arranged coaxially at a distance 2R (consider their pole separation to be 2R). A bead of radius a is placed at
the pole of the convex min or as shown. The ratio of the sizes of the first three images of the bead is

31. A point object is placed at (-40, 7) cm in front of a concave mirror of focal length 5 cm having its pole at
the origin (0, 0). Assuming the principal axis to be along x-axis, find the position of the image formed.
32. a) Explain. Can a convex mirror form a real image?
32.b) Find the position of final image after three successive reflections taking first reflection on m1 .

33. A plane mirror is placed at a distance of 50 cm from a concave mirror of focal length 16 cm. Where should
a short object be placed between the mirrors and facing both the mirrors so that its virtual image in the plane
mirror coincides with the real image in concave mirror? What is the ratio of the sizes of the two images?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 124

physics Classwork Problem
34. Two concave mirrors are placed 40 cm apart and are facing each other. A point object lies between them
at a distance of 12 cm from the mirror of focal length 10 cm. The other mirror has a focal length of 15 cm.
Find the location of final image formed after two reflections— first at the mirror nearer to the object and
second at the other mirror.
35. Find the location, size and the nature of the image of an object of height 2 mm kept between two mirrors
(as shown in figure) after two successive reflections, considering the first reflection at the concave mirror

and then at the convex mirror.

36. A concave mirror and a convex mirror of focal lengths 10 cm and 15 cm are placed at a distance of 70 cm
.An object AB of height 2 cm is placed at a distance of 30 cm from the concave mirror. First ray is incident on
the concave mirror then on the convex mirror. Find size, position, and nature of the image

37. Find the co-ordinates of image of point object P formed after two successive reflections in figure,
considering the first reflection at concave mirror and then it convex mirror.

38. An object AB is placed on the axis of a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm. End A of the object is at 30 cm
from the mirror. Find the length of the image.

39. Find the velocity of image in situation as shown in figure? f=20 cm

40. A gun of mass m1 fires a bullet of mass m2 with a horizontal speed v0 . The gun is fitted with a concave
mirror of focal length f facing towards the receding bullet. Find the speed of separations of the bullet and the
image at the instant just after the gun was fired.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 125

physics Classwork Problem
41. intensity at A due to source is I . Without concave mirror, then find out the intensity of A after placing

concave mirror.
42. Intensity at A due to source is I . Without concave mirror then find out the intensity of A after

placing concave mirror.

0
43. A light ray is incident on a glass sphere of reflective index   3 at an angle of incidence 60 . Find the
angles r , r ', e and the total deviation after two refractions.

44. A cylindrical vessel, whose diameter and height both are equal to 30 cm, is placed on a horizontal surface
and a small particle P is placed in it at a distance of 5.0 cm fro the center. An eye is placed at a position such
that the edge of the bottom is just visible. The particle P is in the plane of drawing. Up to what minimum
height should water be poured in the vessel to make the particle P visible?

45. The XY plane is the boundary between two transparent media. Medium 1 with z  0 has a refract index of
2 and medium 2 with z  0 has a refractive index 3 . A ray of light in medium 1 given by the vector
6 3iˆ  8 3 ˆj  10kˆ is incident on the plane of separation. Find the unit vector in the direction of the
refracted ray in medium 2
46. Due to a vertical temperature gradient in the atmosphere, the index of refraction varies. Suppose index of
refraction varies as n  n0 1  ay , where n0 is the index of refraction at the surface and a  2.0x10 6 m1 . A person
of height h  2.0m stands on a level surface. Beyond what distance will he not see the runway?

47. A long rectangular slab of transparent medium of thickness d is placed on a table with length parallel to
the x -axis and width parallel to the y -axis. A ray of light is travelling along y -axis at origin. The refractive

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 126

physics Classwork Problem
0
index  of the medium varies as   , where 0 and r   1 are constants. The refractive index of air
x
1  
r
is 1.
a)Determine the x -coordinate of the point A ,where the ray intersects the upper surface of the slab-air
boundary.
b)Write down the refractive index of the medium at A
c)Indicate the subsequent path of the ray in air

48.A light ray enters the atmosphere of a planet and descends vertically 20 km to the surface. The index of
refraction where the light enters the atmosphere is 1 and it increases linearly to the surface where it has a
value 1.005. How long does it take the ray to traverse this path.
49. A cylindrical glass rod of radius 0.1 m and refractive index 3 lies on a horizontal plane mirror. A
horizontal ray of light moving perpendicular to the axis of the rod is incident on it.
(a)At what height from the mirror should the ray be incident so that it leaves the rod at a height of 0.1 m
above the plane mirror?

(b)At what distance a second similar rod, parallel to the first, be placed on the mirror, such that the emergent
ray from the second rod is in line with the incident ray on the first rod?
50. . An opaque sphere of radius R lies on a horizontal plane. On the perpendicular through the point of
contact there is a point source of light a distance R above the sphere.
(a)Find the area of the shadow on the plane.
(b)A transparent liquid of refractive index 3 is filled above the plane such that the sphere is just covered
with the liquid. Show that new area of the shadow.

51. A light beam of wavelength 600 nm in air passes firstly through film 1 of thickness 1  m and refractive
index n1  1.2 , then through an air film 2 of thickness 1.5  m and finally through film 3 of thickness 1  m
and refractive index n3  1.8 .
(a)Which film does the light cross in the least time and what is that least time?
(b)Calculate the total number of wavelengths (at any instant) across all three films together.
1
52. A fish rising vertically to the surface of water in a lake at a uniform speed of 3ms . It observes that a bird
4
diving vertically towards the water at a uniform speed of 9 ms 1 . If the refractive index of water is , find
3
the actual speed of dive of the bird.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 127

physics Classwork Problem
53. A vessel is filled with a non-homogeneous liquid whose refractive index varies with the depth y from the
 y 
free surface of liquid as    1   . Calculate the apparent depth as seen by an observer from above, if H
 H 
is the height to which the liquid is filled in the vessel.
54. See fig and answer the following question.(i)Find apparent height of the bird. (ii)Find apparent depth of
the fish. (iii)At what distance will the bird appear to the fish?(iv)At what distance will the fish appear to the
bird?

55. The bottom of the pot is a reflecting plane mirror, S a small fish, and T is a human eye. Refractive index of
water 
(a)At what distance(s) from itself will the fish see the image(s) of the eye?

(b)At what distance(s) from itself will the eye see the image(s) of the fish?

56. An object is placed in front of a slab (   1.5 ) of thickness 6 cm at a distance 28 cm from it. Other face of
the slab is silvered. Find the position of final image.
57. A 20 cm thick glass slab of refractive index 1.5 is kept in front of a plane mirror. Find the position of the
image (relative to mirror) as seen by an observer through the glass slab when a point object is kept in air at
distance of 40 cm from the mirror.
58. A point object O is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm. A glass slab of refractive
index  = 3/2 and thickness 6 cm is inserted between the object and mirror. Find the position of final image
when the distance x shown in Fig. is, (a) 5 cm and (b) 20 cm.

59. A vessel having perfectly reflecting plane bottom is filled with water (  = 4/3) to a depth d . A point
source of light is placed at a height h above the surface of water. Find the distance of final image from water
surface.
60. A concave mirror of focal length 20 cm is placed inside water with its shining surface upwards and
principal axis vertical as shown in Fig. Rays are incident parallel to the principal axis of concave mirror. Find
the position of final image.

61. Light is incident making an angle  with the axis of a transparent cylindrical fiber of refractive index
5
n as shown in figure. Determine the maximum value of  so that the light entering the cylinder does
4
not come out of the curved surface.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 128

physics Classwork Problem

62. A rectangular block of glass is placed on a printed page lying on a horizontal surface. Find the minimum
value of the refractive index of glass for which the letters on the page are not visible from any of the vertical
faces of the block.
63. Light is incident at an angle  on one planar end of a transparent cylindrical rod of refractive index n.
Determine the least value of n so that the light entering the rod does not emerge from the curved surface of
the rod irrespective of the value of  .

64. A monochromatic light is incident on the plane interface AB between two media of refractive indices 1
and 2 ( 2  1 ) at an angle of incidence  . The angle  is infinitesimally greater than the critical angle for
the two media so that total internal reflection takes place. Now, if a transparent slab DEFG of uniform
thickness and of refractive index 3 is introduced on the interface show that for any value of 3 all light will

ultimately be reflected back into medium II.

65. An isosceles glass prism has one of its faces coated with silver. A ray of light is incident normally on the
other face (which is equal to the silvered face). The ray of light is reflected twice on the same sized faces and
then emerges through the base of the prism perpendicularly. Find angles of prism.
66. A ray of light incident normally on one of the faces of a right angle isosceles prism is found to be totally
reflected as shown. What is the minimum value of the refractive index of the material of the prism? When
prism is immersed in water (  = 1.33) trace the path of the emergent ray for the same incident ray, values of
all the angles indicating the values of the all angles.

67. A ray of light is filing on face AB of a tetrahedral of refractive index n at angle of incidence i. The ray after
getting internally reflected on face BC emerges perpendicularly to the incident beam. Find the range of  and
i.

68. Figure shows a triangular prism of refracting angle 900 . A ray of light incident at face AB at an angle 1 ,
refracts at point Q with an angle of refraction 900 .
a. What is the refracting index of the prism in terms of 1 ?
b. What is the maximum value that the refracting index can have?
What happens to the light at Q if the incident angle at Q is

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 129

physics Classwork Problem
c.increased slightly and d.decreased slightly?

69. The path of a ray of light passing through an equilateral glass prism ABC is shown in the figure. The ray of
light is incident on face BC at an angle just greater than the critical angle for total internal reflection to take
place. The total angle of deviation after the refraction at face AC is 120°. Calculate the refractive index of the
glass.


70. A prism has refracting angle equal to .It is given that  is the angle of minimum deviation and  is the
2
deviation of the ray entering grazing incidence. Prove that sin   sin 2 
0
71. A thin biprism of obtuse angle   178 is placed at a distance l = 20 cm from a slit.
How many images are formed and what is the separation between them? Refractive index of the material is
  1.6 .

72. The refractive indices of the crown glass for blue and red light are 1.51 and 1.49 respectively and those of
the flint glass are 1.77 and 1.73 respectively. An isosceles prism of angle 6° is made of crown glass. A beam of
white light is incident at a small angle on this prism. The other flint glass isosceles prism is combined with
the crown glass prism such that there is no deviation of the incident prism.
(a)Determine the angle of the flint glass prism.
(b)Calculate the net dispersion of the combined system
73. A ray of light is incident on a prism ABC of refractive index 3 as shown in figure.
(a)Find the angle of incidence for which the deviation of light ray by the prism ABC is minimum.
(b)By what angle the second prism must be rotated, so that the final ray suffers net minimum deviation.

74. A crown glass prism of angle 5° is to be combined with a flint prism in such a way that the mean ray
passes undeviated. Find (a) the angle of the flint glass prism needed and (b) the angular dispersion produced
by the combination when white light goes through it. Refractive indices for red, yellow, and violet light are
1.514, 1.517, and 1.523, respectively, for crown glass and 1.613, 1.620, and 1.632 for flint glass.
75. There are two objects O1 and O2 at an identical distance of 20 cm on the two sides of the pole of a
spherical concave refracting boundary of radius 60 cm . The indices of refraction of the media on two sides of
4
the boundary are 1 and respectively. Find the location of the object
3
(a) O1 when seen from O2 . (b) O2 when seen from O O1 .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 130

 physics Classwork Problem
 4
76. A parallel beam of light travelling in water     is refracted by a spherical air bubble of radius R
 3
situated in water.
(a)Find the position of the image due to refraction at the first surface and the position of the final image.
(b)Draw the ray diagram showing the position of the two images.

77. A solid glass with radius R and an index of refraction 1.5 is silvered over one hemisphere. A small object is
located on the axis of the sphere at a distance 2R to the left of the vertex of the unsilvered hemisphere. Find
the position of final image after all refractions and reflections have taken place.
78. A ring of radius 1 cm is placed i m in front of a spherical glass ball of radius 25 cm with refractive index
1.50. Determine the position of the final image of the ring and its magnification.
79. A glass rod has ends as shown in figure. The refractive index of glass is  . The object O is at a distance 2R
from the surface of larger radius of curvature. The distance between apexes of ends is 3R.
(a) Find the distance of image formed of the point object from right hand vertex.
What is the condition to be satisfied if the image is to be real?

80. A glass sphere of radius 2R, refractive index n has a spherical cavity of radius R, concentric with it. A black
spot on the inner surface of the hollow sphere is viewed from the left as well as right. Obtain the shift in
position of the object.

81. In the figure, light is incident on the thin lens shown. The radius of curvature for both the surface is R .
Determine the focal length of this system.

82. An object is approaching a thin convex lens of focal length 0.3 m with a speed of 0.01ms 1 Find the
magnitude of rate of change of position and lateral magnification of image when the object is at a distance of
04 m of the lens.
83. A point object is moving with velocity 0.01 m/s on principal axis towards a convex lens of local-length
0.3m when object is a distance of 0.4m form the lens, find
a)Rate of charge of position of the image and
b)Rate of charge of lateral magnification of image
84. A plano-convex lens has a thickness of 4 cm. When placed on a horizontal table, with the curved surface in
contact with it, the apparent depth of the bottom most point of the lens is found to be 3 cm . If the lens is
inverted such that the plane face is in contact with the table the apparent depth of the centre of the plane face

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 131

 physics Classwork Problem
25
is found to be cm . Find the focal length of the lens. Assume thickness to be negligible while finding its focal
8
length.
85. Focal length of a thin lens in air is 10 cm. Now, medium on one side of the lens is replaced by a medium of
refractive index   2 . The radius of curvature of the surface of lens, in contact with the medium, is 20 cm.
Find the new focal length.
86. There are two spherical surfaces of radii R1  30 cm and R2  60 cm . In how many ways these surfaces
may be arranged to get different lenses. If all the lenses are made of glass (   1.5 ), find the focal length of
each lens.

87. An object 4 cm high is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. Find the
position, nature and size of the image. Also find the power of the lens.
88. A converging lens forms a five folds magnified image of an object. The screen is moved towards the object
by a distance d = 0.5 m and the lens is shifted so that the image has the same size as the object. Find the lens
power and the initial distance between the object and the screen.
89. A thin converging lens of focal length f is moved between a candle and a screen. The distance between the
candle and the screen is D (  4 f ) . Show that for two different positions of the lens, two different images can
 1
be obtained on the screen. If the ratio of dimensions of the image is  , find the value of    .
  
90. An object is 5 m to the left of a flat screen. A converging lens for which the focal length is f = 0.8 m is placed
between object and screen.
(a) Show that two lens positions exist that form images on the screen and determine how far are these
positions from the object?
(b) How do the two images differ from each other?
91. For two positions of a converging lens between an object and a screen which are 96 cm apart, two real
images are formed. The ratio of the lengths of the two images is 4. Calculate the focal length of the lens.
92. A lens has a power of +5 dioptre in air. Calculate its power if it is completely immersed in water? Given
3 4
g  and  w 
2 3
93. A biconvex lens separates two media of refractive indices 1.3 and 1.7. The refractive index of the lens is 1.5
and the radii of curvature of the two sides of the lens are r1  10 cm and r2  60 cm . The medium of refractive
index 1.3 extends to 78 cm from the lens and that of refractive index 1.7 extends to 34 cm from the lens. A
luminous object O is at a distance of 144 cm from the lens. Find the position of final image from the lens.

94. Find the lateral magnification product by the combination of lenses shown in.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 132

physics Classwork Problem

95. Find the focal length of equivalent system shown

96. Two convex lenses of focal length 20 cm each are placed coaxially with a separation of 60 cm between
them. Find the image of a distant object formed by the combination by:
a. Using thin lens formula separately for the two lenses, and
b. Using the equivalent lens. Note that although the combination forms a real image of a distant object on the
other side, it is equivalent to a diverging lens as far as the location of the final image is concerned.
97. Consider a coaxial system of two thin convex lenses of focal length f separated by a distance d .Draw ray
diagram for image formation corresponding to an object at Infinity placed on the principal axis in the
following cases: a) d  f b) d  f c) f  d  2 f d) d  2 f e) d  2 f Indicate the nature of the
combination (concave, convex or plane) in each case.
98. An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm to the left on the axis of a convex lens A of focal length 20 cm.
second convex lens of focal length 10 cm is placed coaxially to the right of the lens A at a distance of 5 cm from
A. Find the position of the final image and its magnification. Trace the path of the rays.
99. In Fig. length of the object AB is 9 cm. Find the nature and position of the final image and also its length.

Assume that each lens is a thin lens.

100. A biconvex lens is made of glass with refractivate index 1.5 and has radii of curvature 20 cm and 30 cm
.If the 20 cm surface is silvered, what is the effective focal length of mirror is formed?

101. The radius of curvature of the convex face of a plano-convex lens is 12 cm and its refractive index is
1.5.
a. Find the focal length of this lens. The plane surface of the lens is now silvered.
b. At what distance from the lens will parallel rays incident on the convex face converge?
c.Sketch the ray diagram to locate the image, when a point object is placed on the axis 20 cm from the lens.
d.Calculate the image distance when the object is placed as in  c  .
102. An object in placed 30 cm in front a concave lens that is made of a glass of refractive index and has
equal radii of curvature of its two surfaces, 30 cm . The surface of the lens farther away from the object
silvered. Find the nature and position of the final image.
103. One face of an equiconvex lens of focal 60 cm made of glass    1.5  is silvered. Does it behave like
convex mirror or concave mirror? Determine its focal length
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 133
physics Classwork Problem
104. The convex surface of a thin concavo-convex lens of glass of the refractive index 1.5 has a radius of
curvature 20 cm . The concave surface has a radius of curvature 60 cm . The convex side is silvered and placed
on a horizontal surface.
(a) Where should a pin be placed on the optic axis such that its image is formed at the same place?
(b) If the concave part is filled with water of refractive index 4/3, find the distance through which the pin
should be moved, so that the image of the pin again coincides with the pin.

105. A glass slab of thickness 2 cm and refractive index 2 is placed in contact with a biconvex lens of focal
length 20 cm . The refractive index of the material of the lens is 1.5. The far side of the lens is silvered.
Where the object should be placed in front of the slab so that it images on to itself,
106. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm placed 10 cm in front of a convex mirror of radius curvature 15 cm .
Where should a point object be placed front of the lens so Hint it images nil to itself?
107. L is a lens such that a parallel beam of light incident on it. after refraction, converges to a point at a
distance ‘x’ from it and M is a mirror such that a parallel beam of light incident on it, after reflection,
converges to a point at a distance y from it. Now the lens L and mirror M are placed at a distance 2  x  y 
from each other. An object of size 2 cm is kept in front of lens at a distance 2x from it. Find the nature,
position, and size of the image that will be seen by an observer looking towards the mirror through the lens.

108. An object of height 2 cm is kept 2 m front of a convex lens of focal length 1m . A plane mirror placed at
3 m from the lens on its other side. Find the nature position, and magnification of the final image that will
seen by an observer looking toward the mirror through the lens.
109. An object is placed 45 cm from a converging lens of focal length 30 cm , A mirror of radius 40 cm is to be
placed on the other side of lens so that the object coincides with its image. Find the position of the mirror if it
is
(a)convex ?
(b)concave?
110. A thin equiconvex lens made of glass refractive index 3/2 and of focal length 0.3 m in air is sealed into an
 3
opening at one end of a tank filled with water     . On the opposite side of the lens, a mirror is placed
 2 
inside the tank on the tank wall perpendicular to the lens as shown in Fig. The separation between the lens
and mirror is 0.8 m. A small object is placed outside the tank front of the lens at a distance of 0.9 m from the
lens along axis. Find the position (relative to lens) of the image of the object formed by the system.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 134

physics Classwork Problem

111. Find the position of final image formed. (The gap shown in figure is of negligible width)

112. A point object O is placed at a distance of 0.3 m from a convex lens of focal length 0.2 m. It then cut into
two halves each of which is displaced by 0.0005 m as shown in figure. Find the position of the image. If more
than one image is formed, find their number and the distance between them.

113. A convex lens of focal length 15 cm is split into two halves and the two halves are placed at a separation
of 120 cm . Between these two halves of the convex lens, a plane mirror is placed horizontally and at a
distance of 4mm below the principal axis of the lens halves. An object of length 2 mm is placed at a distance
of 20 cm from one half lens as shown in figure.
(a) Find the position and size of the final image. (b) Trace the path of rays forming the image.

114. A thin plano-convex lens of focal length f is split into two halves. One of the halves is shifted along the
optical axis as shown in figure. The separation between object and image planes is1.8 m . The magnification
of the image, formed by one of the half lens is 2. Find the focal length of the lens and separation between the
two halves. Draw the ray diagram for image formation.

115. Two thin lenses of same focal length f are arranged with their principal axes inclined at an angle  as
shown in figure. The separation between the optical centers of the lenses is 2 f . A point object lies on the
principal axis of the convex lens at a large distance to the left of convex lens.
(a)Find the co-ordinales of the final image formed by the system of lenses taking O as the origin of the
co-ordinate axes.
(b)Draw the ray diagram.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 135

physics Classwork Problem

116.Two thin lenses f1  10 cm and f 2  20 cm are separated by a distance d  5 cm . Their optical

centres are displaced a distance   0.5 cm . A linear object of size 3 cm placed at 30 cm from the optical
centre of left lens. Find the nature position and size of final image.

117. A convex lens of focal length 15 cm and a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm are kept with their optic
axes PQ and RS parallel but separated in vertical direction by 0.6 cm as shown in fig. The distance between
the lens and mirror is 30 cm. An upright object AB of height 1.2 cm is placed on the optics axis PQ of the
lens at a distance of 20 cm from the lens. If A ' B ' is the image after refraction from the lens and reflection
from the mirror, find the distance of A ' B ' from the pole of the mirror and obtain its magnification. Also,
locate positions of A ' and B ' with respect to the optic axis RS .

118. Two thin convex lenses of focal lengths f1 and f 2 separated by a horizontal distance d (where d  f1 ,
d  f 2 ) and their principal axes are separated by a vertical distance b as shown in the figure. Taking the
centre of the first lens (O) as the origin of co-ordinate system and considering a parallel beam of light coming
from the left, find the x and y -coordinates of the focal point of this lens system.

3
119. A thin biconvex lens of refractive index is placed on a horizontal plane mirror as shown in Fig. Space
2
4
between the lens and the mirror is then filled with water of refractive index . It is found that when a point
3
object is placed 15 cm above the lens on its principal axis, the object coincides with its own image. On

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 136

physics Classwork Problem
representing with another liquid, the object and the image again coincide at a distance 25 cm from the lens.
Calculate the refractive index of the liquid.

120. A certain myopic person has a far point of 150 cm .  a  What power a corrective lens must have to
allow him to see distant objects clearly ?  b  If he is able to read a book at 25 cm , while wearing the glasses,
is his near point less than 25 cm ?
121. A man with normal near point  25 cm  reads a book with small print using a magnifying glass (a thin
convex lens) of focal length 5 cm . Find the
(a)closest and farthest distance at which he can read the book when viewing through the magnifying glass.
(b)maximum and minimum magnifying power possible using the above simple microscope.
122. A compound microscope has a magnifying power 30. The focal length of its eye-piece is 5 cm . Assuming
the final image to be at the least distance of distinct vision  25 cm  , find the magnification produced by the
objective.
123. The objective of a telescope is a convex lens of focal length 100 cm . Its eye-piece is also a convex lens of
focal length 5 cm . Determine the magnifying power of the telescope for normal adjustment.
124.A man with normal near point  25 cm  reads a book with small print using a magnifying thin convex lens
of focal length 5 cm .  a  What is the closest and farthest distance at which he can read the book when
viewing through the magnifying glass?  b  What is the maximum and minimum magnifying power possible
using the above simple microscope?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 137

physics Classwork Problem

27. Electrostatics Field

1. Electric charges A and B attract each other Electric charges B and C repel each other. If A and C are
held close together, they will
a. attract b. repel. c. not affect each other d. more information is needed to answer.
2. Objects A, B and C are their siderite insulated, spherical conductors. Orion A and B have changes of
3 mC , whereas Chas a charge of 6 mC . Object A and C are allowed to touch, then they arc moved
apart. Changes B and C are allowed to touch before they are moved taunt
i. If object A and B are now held near each other, they will
a. attract b. repel c. have no effect on each other,
ii. If instead objects A and C are held near each other, they will
a. attract b. repel c. have no effect on each other.
3. Shows that a positively charged rod is brought near two uncharged metal spheres A and B clam red
on insulated stands and placed in contact with each other.
i. What would happen if the rod is removed before the spheres are separated?
ii. Would the induced charges be equal in magnitude even if the spheres had different sizes or different
conductors?
iii. What will happen if the spheres are separated first and then the rod is removed far away?
A B

4. A rigid insulated wire frame in the form of a right-angled triangle ABC is set in a vertical plane as
shown in the figure. Two beads of equal masses m each and carrying the charges q1 and q2 are
connected by a cord of length l and can slide without friction on the wires. Considering the case when the
beads are stationary determine
(a) the angle 
(b) the tension in the cord and
(c) the normal reaction on the beads. If the cord is now cut, what are the values of the Charges for
which the beads continue to remain stationary?
A
q1
P 90
l
q2
Q

B
30 C

5. A thin wire ring of radius r has an electric charge q . What will be the increment of the force
stretching the wire if a point charge q0 is placed at the ring's centre?
6. Two small equally charged spheres, each of mass m are suspended from the same point by light silk
dq
threads of length l . The separation between the spheres is x  l Calculate the rate with which the
dt
a
charge leaks off each sphere if their velocity of approach varies as v  r where  is a positive
x
constant.
7. A particle A having a charge q is fixed on a vertical (insulated) wall. A second particle B of mass B ,
charge Q suspended by a silk thread of length l from a point P on the wall that is at a distance l above
the A . Calculate the angle made by the thread with the vertical, when £ stays in equilibrium. Before
starting the problem, let us draw a diagram the gives a visualisation of the problem.
8. Three particles, each of mass 1 g and carrying a charge q are suspended from a common point by
three insulated mass less strings, each 100 cm long. If the particles are in equilibrium and are located at
the corners of an equilateral triangle of side length 3 cm, calculate the charge q on each particle. (Take
10 ms 2 ).

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 138

physics Classwork Problem

9. Figure below shows three charges q1 , q2 and q3 placed at A, B and C respectively. If

q1  1  C , q2  3  C , q3  2  C , AB  15 cm and AC  10 cm. Calculate the net force that acts on q1
placed at A .
Cq
3

30
q1 q2
A B
10. A thin straight rod of length l carrying a uniformly distributed charge q is located in vacuum. Find
the magnitude of the electric force on a point charge ' Q ' kept as shown in the figure.
Q
l
a

11. Two free charges  Q and 4Q are placed at a separation L . Find the magnitude, sign and the
location of the third charge that makes the system to stay in equilibrium.
 
12. Two positive charges q1 and q2 are located at points1 and 2 with radius vectors r1 , and r2 . Find a

negative charge q3 and the radius vector r3 , of a point 3 at which it has to be placed for the force acting
on each of the three charges to be equal to zero.
13. Two identical positive point charges, each having a charge Q are fixed at a separation 2a . A point
charge q Iies midway between the fixed charges. Show that for small
(a) displacement (compared to a ) along the line joining the fixed charges, the charge q executes SHM , if
it is positive in nature.
(b) lateral displacement, the charge q executes SHM , if it is negative in nature. Compare the periods of
oscillations in the above two cases.
14. Point charges are placed at the vertices of a square of side a as shown in fig. What should be of
charge q and magnitude of the ratio | q / Q | so that
I. net force on each Q is zero?
II. net force on each q is zero?
III. Is it possible that the entire system could be in electrostatic equilibrium?
Q q

q Q
15. A thin fixed ring of radius a has a positive charge q uniformly distributed over it. A particle of mass
m . having a negative charge Q , is placed on the axis at a distance of x  x  a  from the centre of the
ring. Show that he motion of the negatively charged particle is approximately simple harmonic. Calculate
the time period of oscillation.
B dq
dF
a r
 -Q
O A
x

16. Two point charges each having charge q are placed on the x -axis at x   a and x   a as shown in
 
   
i. Plot the variation of electric field E on the x -axis. Plot the variation of electric field E on the y -
axis.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 139

physics Classwork Problem

ii. Find the position on the y-axis where electric field is maximum.
y

q q
x
O
X = -a X=a
17. Four charges are arranged as shown in fig .A point P is located at distance r from the centre
the configuration. Assuming r  l , find
i. the magnitude of the field at point P . ii. the angle of its vector with the x -axis.

18. A uniform electric field E exists between two metal plates one -ve and other +ve. The plate length is
l and the separation of the plates is d .
i. An electron and a proton start from the negative plate and positive plate, respectively, and go to
opposite plates. Which one of them wins this race?
ii. An electron and a proton start moving parallel to the plates towards the other end from the midpoint
of the separation of plates at one end of the plates. Which of the two will have greater deviation when
they come out of the plates if they start with the
a. same initial velocity, b. same initial kinetic energy andc. same initial momentum.
9
19. A charge 10 coulomb is located at origin in free space and another charge Q at (2,0,0). If the . x -
component of the electric field at (3,1,1) is zero, calculate the value of Q. Is the y -component zero at
(3,1,1)?
20. Calculate the electric field due to a uniformly charged rod of length L at a point P at distance r from
one end of
the rod. Assume total charge on the rod to be Q.
Q r P
Axis of rod L
21. Two identical thin rods of length 2a carry equal charges +Q that is distributed uniformly along their
lengths. The rods lie along the x -axis with their centers separated by a distance b  2a show that the
magnitude of the force exerted by the left rod on the right one is given by
Q2  b2 
F 2
log e  2 2 
16 0 a  b  4a 
y

b
-a a b-a b+a
22. Figure shows the sketch of field lines for two point charges 2Q and Q . The pattern of field lines can
be deduced by considering the following points:

E=0
2Q Q

Note: Excess lines from 2Q charge will meet at infinity.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 140
physics Classwork Problem

23. Charges q  and 2q are fixed at distance d apart as shown in the figure.

d
+q -2q

(i) Sketch roughly the pattern of electric field lines, showing position of neutral points.
(ii)Where should a charge particle q is placed so that it experiences no force.
24. The field lines for two point charges are shown.

A D B E
C

i. Is the field uniform?

qA
ii. Determine the ratio .
qB
iii. What are the sign of q A and qB ?
iv. A part from infinity where is the neutral point?
v. If q A and qB are separated by a distance10  
2  1 cm , find the position of neutral point.
vi. Where will the lines meet which are coming from A and are not meeting at qB ?
vii. Will a positive charge follow the line of force if free to move?
25. A solid metallic sphere is placed in a uniform electric field. Which of the lines A, B, C and D shows the
correct representation of lines of force and why ?

A
B
C
D
26. Two identical point charges having magnitude q each are placed as shown in the figure.

q
a
x
a
q

i. Plot the variation of electric field on x -axis.

ii. Where will the magnitude of electric field be maximum on x -axis? Find the maximum value of electric
field on x -axis.
iii. If we place a negative charge (of magnitude  q and mass m ) at the mid point of charges and
displaced along . x -axis, examine whether it will perform simple harmonic motion. If yes, then find the
time period of oscillation of the particle.
27. Calculate the electric field due to a uniformly charged rod of length L at a point P that lies at a
distance r on its perpendicular bisector. Assume charge on the rod to be Q . Discuss the result when
r E
r  L and L >> r . In the case when L >> r , also draw a plot of (along x -axis) vs (on y -axis)
L E0
Q
where E0  .
4 0 L2
28.Calculate the electric field due to a uniformly charged rod AB having charge density  at a point P
at perpendicular distance a from the rod, as shown in figure.
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 141
physics Classwork Problem

a 
N  P

B
29. A segment of a charged wire of length l , charge density  2 , and an infinitely long charged wire,
charge density 1 , lie in a plane at right angles to each other. The separation between the wires is r0 .
Determine the force of interaction between the wires.
30. In the given arrangement of a charged square frame find field at centre. The linear charged density
is as shown in figure
31. Given an equilateral triangle with side  . Find E at the centroid. The linear charge density is as shown
in figure.
A

l
l
 *
C

B C
l
32. Calculate the electric field due to a rod of length L at a point P at a distance l from its end, when
the charge density of the rod varies with distance x from the other end of the rod as   0 x where 0
is a positive constant.
33. A thin non conducting ring of radius R has linear charge density  .varying as   0 cos  , where 0
is a positive constant and  is the azimuthal angle. Calculate the magnitude of the electric field strength
at
(a) the centre of the ring
(b) on the axis of the ring as a function of the distance x from its centre. Investigate the obtained
function at x  R
34. A system consists of a thin charged wire ring of radius R and a very long uniformly charged thread
oriented along the axis of the ring, with one of its ends coinciding with the centre of the ring. The total
charge of the ring is equal to Q . The charge of the thread (per unit length) is equal to  . Find the
interaction force between the ring and the thread.
35. Calculate the electric field at the centre of a uniformly charged wire in the form of an arc of radius r .
The wire subtends an angle  at the centre.
36. A long wire with a uniform charge density  is bent in two configurations shown in (a) and (b).
Determine the electric field intensity at point O .
37. Calculate the electric field at point P that lies on the axis of a uniformly charged disc of radius R
having charge density  at a distance x from the centre.
38. Calculate the electric field strength due to a uniformly charged infinite sheet having charge density
 at a point P at perpendicular distance x from the sheet.
39. An infinitely large plate of surface charge density  is lying in horizontal xy plane. A particle having
charge q0 and mass m is projected from the plate with velocity u making an angle  with sheet. Find :
(i) The time taken by the particle to return on the plate..
(ii) Maximum height achieved by the particle.
(iii) At what distance will it strike the plate (Neglect gravitational force on the particle)

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 142

physics Classwork Problem

u
q0  

40. Three large conducting parallel sheets are placed at a finite distance from each other as shown in
figure. Find out electric field intensity at points A, B,C& D.
Q -2Q 3Q

A B C D

41. Thin infinite sheet of width w contains uniform charge distribution  . Find out electric field intensity
at: following points:
(a) A point which lies in the same plane at a distance d from one of its edge.
(b) A point which is on the symmetry plane of sheet at a perpendicular distance d from it.



42. Calculate the electric field due to a thin uniformly charged shell (of radius R having uniform charge
density  ) at its centre.
43 An infinite dielectric sheet having charge density  has a hole of radius R in it. An electron is released
from point P on the axis of the hole at a distance 3R from the center. Find the speed with which it
crosses the plane of the sheet.

Z
Y


p
3R x

44.Find electric field due to a uniformly charged spherical shell
45.Consider a uniformly charged thin walled right circular cylindrical shell having total charge Q , radius
R , and length l . Determine the electric field at a point a distance d from the right side of the cylinder as
shown in figure.
l
R d

(b) Now consider a solid cylinder with the same dimensions and carrying the same charge, uniformly
distributed through its volume. Find the field it creates at the same point.
46. Figure shows a uniformly charged thin sphere of total charge Q and radius R. A point charge q is also
situated at the centre of the sphere.Find out the following :
(i) Force on charge q (ii) Electric field intensity at A. (iii) Electric field intensity at B.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 143

physics Classwork Problem

A
B
q
C

47. Two concentric uniformly charged spherical shells of radius R1 and R2  R2  R1  have total charges Q1
and Q2 respectively. Derive an expression of electric field as a function of r for following positions.
(i) r  R1 (ii) R1  r  R2 (iii) r  R2
Q1 Q2
R1
R2

48. Find force acting between two shells of radius R1 and R2 which have uniformly distributed
charges Q1 and Q2 respectively and distance between their centers is r.
Q1 , R1 Q2 , R2
r

49.Derive an expression for electric field due to solid sphere of radius R and total charge Q which is
uniformly distributed in the volume, at a point which is at a distance r from centre for given two cases.
(i) r  R (ii) r  R
50. A solid non conducting sphere of radius R and uniform volume charge density p has its centre at
origin.
Find out electric field intensity in vector form at following positions :
 R R 
(i)  R / 2,0, 0  (ii)  ,0  (iii)  R, R,0 
 2, 2 
51. A Uniformly charged solid non-conducting sphere of uniform volume charge density
p and radius R is having a concentric spherical cavity of radius r. Find out electric
field intensity at following points, as shown in the figure:
(i)Point A (ii) Point B (iii) Point C (iv) Centre of the sphere

R r
OA B C

52. In above question, if cavity is not concentric and centered at point P then repeat all the steps. Again
assume  and  in the cavity, (similar to the previous example):
53. A non-conducting solid sphere has volume charge density that varies as   0 r , where 0 is a
constant and r is distance from centre. Find out electric field intensities at following positions.
(i) r  R (ii) r  R
54. Calculate electric field intensity at a point on the axis which is at distance x from the centre of half
ring, having total charge Q distributed uniformly on it. The radius of half ring is R.
y
d
R  x
z
(0, 0, 0)
55. In the following diagrams, electric charges are distributed uniformly with 1 Cm 1 . Determine the field

intensity E at the point P in each case.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 144

physics Classwork Problem



R
(i)  P (ii)
P



56. Three charges  q, 2q and  q are arranged in a line. Calculate the field at a distance r>>a on the
line.

57. Find the force on a small electric dipole of dipole moment P due to a point charge Q placed at a
distance r .
58. An electric dipole is placed at distance x from an infinitely long rod of linear charge density  .
(a) What is net force acting on dipole?
(b) What is work done in rotating dipole through 180°.
(c) If dipole is slightly rotated about its equilibrium position. Find the time period of oscillation.
59. In a certain region of space, electric field is along the z -direction throughout. The magnitude of
electric field is. however, not constant but increases uniformly along the positive z-direction, at the rate
of 105 NC1 m 1 . What are the force and torque experienced by a system having a total dipole moment
equal to 10-7 Cm in the negative z -direction?
60. Find the magnitude of the electric field at the point P in the configuration shown in figure for
d  a take 2qa  p .
p p p

d d d

-q +q -q +q
q
a a +q
(a) (b) (c)

61. A water molecule is placed at a distance l from the line carrying linear charge density  . Find the
maximum force exerted on the water molecule. The shape of water molecule and the partial charges on H
and O atoms are shown in figure. Assume l to be much larger than the dimensions of the molecule.

+q


 -2q

+q

62.In figure shown, an dipole lies at a distance x from the centre at the axis of a charged ring of radius R
with charge Q uniformly distributed over it.
1.Find the net force acting on the dipole, 2.What is the work done in rotating the dipole through1800
3.The dipole is slightly rotated about its equilibrium position.Find the time period of oscillation. Assume
the dipole is linearly restrained.
R
m-q +q
C m
x
2a

63.On a half ring a charge +q is uniformly distributed and another equal negative charge -q is placed at
the centre of ring. In this system negative charge is a point charge and positive charge is distributed on
the ring. This system is called, distributed dipole. Calculate the dipole moment of this system.
+q

R
-q

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 145

physics Classwork Problem

28. Gauss Law

1. Calculate the electric flux through the surface of the disc of radius R due to a point charge q placed at
a point P on its axis at a distance l from its centre.
2. Find the flux or the electric field through each of the five surfaces of the inclined plane as shown in
Fig
What is the total flux through the entire closed surface?

Y
D
E
A
a

E X
C
F
 B b
Z

3.Consider a cylindrical surface of radius R, length l, in a uniform electric field E. Compute the electric
flux.
The axis of the cylinder is parallel to the field direction.
4. A)a. Compute the electric flux through a square surface of edges 2l due to a charge +Q located at a
perpendicular distance I from the center of the square, as shown in figure.
y

S 2l

Q x
l

2l
z
b. Using the result obtained in (a), if the charge +Q is now at the center of a cube of side 2l, what is the
total flux emerging from all the six faces of the closed surface?
4.(B) In Fig. a charge q is placed at a distance   0 near one of the corners of a cube of edge l on a line
of symmetry along diagonal.
d c


q b
a
h g

e f
1. What is flux through each of the faces containing the point a?
2. What is the flux through the other three faces?
5. A point charge q is fixed at the origin. Calculate the electric flux through the infinite plane y  a .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 146

physics Classwork Problem
6. Two charges  q1 and q2 are placed at A and B respectively. A line of force emanates from q1 at
angle  with the line AB . At what angle will it terminate at q2 ?

 
A B
q1 q2

7. A ball of radius R carries a positive charge whose volume density depends on a separation r from
 r
the ball's centre as   0 1   , where 0 is a constant. Assuming the permittivities of the ball and
 R
the environment is equal to unity, find
(a) the magnitude of the electric field strength as a function of the distance r both inside and outside the
ball.
(b)the maximum intensity and the corresponding distance rm .
8. A system consists of a ball of radius R carrying a spherically symmetric charge Q and the

surrounding space filled with a charge of volume density   , where  is a constant, r the distance
r
from the centre of the ball. Find the ball's charge at which the magnitude of the electric field strength
vector is independent of r outside the ball. How high this strength? The permittivities of the ball are
assumed to be unity.
9. An infinitely long insulating cylinder of radius R has a volume charge density that varies with radius
 r
as   0  a   where 0 , a and b are positive constants and r is the distance from the axis of the
 b
cylinder. Use Gauss's Law to determine the magnitude of the electric field at radial distances
(a) r  R (b) r  R
10. A sphere of radius R is charged with a non-uniform charge density which varies with the distance
0
x from the centre as   where 0 is a positive constant Find the electric field strength at a point p
x
situated at a distance r from centre of sphere(a)outside it(b)inside it(c)also plot the variation of E
with r .
11. Inside a ball charged uniformly with volume density  , there is a spherical cavity. The centre 0f the

cavity is displaced with respect to the centre of the ball by a Calculate the field strength inside the
cavity, assuming the permittivity equal to unity.
12. If an isolated infinite plate contains a charge Q1 on one of its surfaces and a charge Q2 on its other
Q
surface, then prove that electric field intensity at a point in front of the plate will be , where
2 A 0
Q  Q1 +Q2
13. Two conducting plates A and B are placed parallel to each other. A is given a charge Q1 and B a
charge
Q2 Prove that the charges on the inner surfaces are of equal magnitude and opposite sign.
14. Two identical metal plates, each having surface area A ’ and charge ' q1 and q1 are placed facing
each other at a separation d Find the charge appear on surface (1), (2), (3) and (4). Assume the size of
the plate much larger than the separation between the plates,

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 147

physics Classwork Problem

1 2 3 4

q1 q2
d
15. .Figure shows three large metallic plates with charges Q, 4Q, and -Q, respectively. Determine the
final charges on all the surfaces.

16. An isolated conducting sheet of area A and carrying a charge Q is placed in a uniform electric field E,
such that the electric field is perpendicular to the sheet and covers all the sheet. Find out the charges
appearing on its two surfaces.

17. Three large conducting sheets placed parallel to each other at a finite distance contain charges Q, -
2Q, and 3Q, respectively. Find the electric fields at points A,B,C,and D.

18. A point charge Q is placed at the centre of an uncharged spherical conducting shell of inner
radius a and outer radius b as shown in fig.

i. Find the electric field for r  a .

r
ii. What is the magnitude and sign of the induced charge q on the inner shell surface?
iii. What is the field for a  r  b ?
iv. What is the electric field at points r  b ?
v. What is the surface charge on the outer surface of the conductor?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 148

physics Classwork Problem

29. Electrostatic Potential

1. A charge particle q  10 C is carried along OP and PQ and then back to O along QO as shown in an electric field

E   x  2y  iˆ  2xjˆ . Find the work done by an external agent in (i) each path and (ii) the round trip.

1.(B).Three equal charges q each are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side a .
(i)Find out potential energy of charge system.
a
(ii)Calculate work required to decrease the side of triangle to .
2
(iii)If the charges are released from the shown position and each of them has same mass m then find the speed of
each particle when they lie on triangle of side 2a .

 A
2. The electric feild in a region is given by E  i Write an expression for the potential in the region,
x3
assuming the potential at infinity to be zero.
3. Three charges q1  1C, q 2  2 C , and q3  1 C are placed at A  0, 0, 0 , B  l, 2, 3,  and
C  2, -1, 1 . Find the potential of the system of three charges at P(l, -2, -1).
4.Two electric charges q and 2q are placed at a distance 6 m apart on a horizontal plane. Find the locus of point
on this plane where the potential has a value zero.


5.A uniform field of magnitude E  2000 NC 1 is directed   37 below the horizontal.
i. Find the potential difference between P and R.
ii.If we define the reference level of potential so that potential at R is VR  500 V , what is the potential at P?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 149

physics Classwork Problem

6. On a thin rod of length l  1m , lying along the x -axis with one end at the origin x  0 , there is uniformly
distributed charge per unit length   Kx , where K  109 Cm 2 . Find the work done in displacing a charge
 
q  1000  C from a point A 0, 0.44 m to B  0, l  m .
2
7. Consider a charged ring of radius R . Let the charge on this ring be varying according to the relation   0 cos 
, where 0 is a positive constant and  is the azimuthal angle. Find the electrostatic potential due to this ring at the
centre.
8. There are two thin wire rings, each of radius R0 whose axes coincide. The charges of the rings are q and q . Find
the potential difference between the centres of the rings separated by a distance a . Also calculate the work done to
move a charge q0 from centre of first ring to the centre of other ring.
9. A non-conducting disc of radius a and uniform positive surface charge density  is placed on the ground with its
axis vertical. A particle of mass m and positive charge q is dropped, along the axis of the disc from a height H with
q 4 0 g
zero initial velocity. The particle has 
m 
(a) Find the value of H if the particle just reaches the disc.
(b) Sketch the potential energy of the particle as a function of its height and find its equilibrium position.
10. Find the electric field potential the centre of a hemisphere of radius R having uniform surface charge density  .
11. A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed throughout the volume of a dielectric sphere of radius R. A point
mass having charge +q and mass m is fired toward the centre of the sphere with velocity v from a point at distance
R
r  r  R  from the center of the sphere. Find the minimum velocity v so that it can penetrate distance of the
2
sphere, Neglect any resistance other than electric interaction. Charge on the small mass remains constant
throughout the motion.

12. Two point masses of mass m and equal and opposite charge of magnitude q are attached on the corners of a non-
conducting uniform rod of mass m and the system is released from rest in uniform electric field E as shown in figure
from  = 53°
(i) Find angular acceleration of the rod just after releasing
(ii) What will be angular velocity of the rod when it passes through stable equilibrium.
(iii) Find work required to rotate the system by 180°.

13. A charge q0 is transported from point A to B along the arc AB with centre at C as shown in figure near a
long charged wire with linear density  , lying in the same plane. Find the work done in doing so.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 150

physics Classwork Problem

14. Some equipotential surfaces are shown in figure. What can you say about the magnitude and the direction of the
electric field?

15. Two point charges Q1 and Q2 lie along a line at a distance from each other. Figure shows the potential variation
along the line of charges. At which of the points 1, 2 and 3 is the electric field zero? What are the signs of the charges
Q1 and Q2 and which of the two charges is greater in magnitude?

 
16.(a) Referring to the spherical equipotential lines in , find i E  f  r  , ii.E  pattern .


16.(b) . Find the electrostatic field E for the potential v  kxy
17. Suppose that the electric potential in some region of space is given by V  x, y , z   V0 exp  az  cos ax where a
is a positive constant. Find the electric field everywhere.

 
18.(a) Find the potential function V  x, y  of an electrostatic field E  2axyiˆ  a x 2  y 2 ˆj where a is a constant.

 
19. An electrostatic field is given by E  k yiˆ  xjˆ . Find the electrostatic potential generating such a field.
20. Calculate the work done in taking the charge q to infinity, when, initially it is at a distance l from an infinite
conducting plane.
21. A small ball is suspended over an infinite horizontal conducting plane by means of an insulating elastic thread of
stiffness k . As soon as the ball was charged, it descended by x and its new separation from the plane become equal
to l . Find the charge of the ball.
L
22. Two point charges, q and q , are separated by a distance L , both being, at a distance from the infinite
2
conducting plane. Find
(a) the modulus of the vector of the electric force acting on each charge;
(b) the magnitude of the electric field strength vector at the mid-point between these charges.
23. A point charge q is located between two mutually perpendicular conducting half-planes. Its distance from each
half-plane is equal to l . Find the modulus of the vector of the force acting on the charge.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 151

physics Classwork Problem

24.Consider a thin spherical shell of radius R having charge q distributed uniformly on it. At the centre of shell a
negative point charge q0 is placed. The shell is cut in two identical hemispherical portions along a diametrical
section yy ' as shown. Due to mutual repulsion the two hemispherical parts tend to move away from each other but
due to the attraction of q0 , they may stay in equilibrium. Find the condition of equilibrium of the hemispherical
shells. Calculate minimum value of q0 to attain this equilibrium.

25. A charge q is distributed uniformly on the surface of a sphere of radius R . It is covered by an earthed
concentric hollow conducting sphere of radius 2 R . Find the charges on inner and outer surfaces of hollow sphere
when
(a) Thickness of shell is negligible
(b) The shell has considerable thickness.

26. Figure shows three concentric thin spherical shells A , B and C of radii R , 2R and 3R . The shell B is earthed
and A and C are given charges q and 2 q respectively. Find the charges appearing on all the surfaces of A, B and C .

27. Figure shows two conducting thin concentric shells of radii r and 3 r . The outer shell carries charge q Inner
shell is neutral. Find the charge that will flow from inner shell to earth after the switch S is closed.

28. Three shell are shown carrying q1 , q2 and q3 and of radii a, b and c respectively, if the middle shell expands
from radius b to b '  b '  c  . Find the work done by electric field in process.

29. Figure shows a shell of radius R having charge q1 uniformly distributed over it. A point charge q is placed at the
centre of shell. Find work required to increase radius of shell from R to R1   R  .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 152

physics Classwork Problem

30. Find the electrostatic energy stored in a cylindrical shell of length l , inner radius a and outer radius b ,coaxial
with a uniformly charged wire with linear charge density  .
31. A particle of mass 9 1031 kg and a negative charge of 1.6  10 19 C is projected horizontally with a velocity of
105 ms 1 into a region between two infinite horizontal parallel plates of metal. The distance between the plates is
0.3 cm and the particle enters 0.1 cm below the top plate. The top and bottom plates are connected respectively to
the positive and negative terminals of a 30 V battery. Calculate the component of the velocity of the particle just
before it hits one of the plates.
32. A projectile of mass m having charge q is thrown with initial velocity u at an angle  with the horizontal. An
electric field of strength E exists, making an angle  with the downward vertical away from the point of projection.
Find the time of flight and range of projectile.
33. A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed throughout the volume of a dielectric sphere of radius R . A point
mass having charge  q and mass m is fired towards the centre of the sphere with velocity v from as point at
distance x  x  R  from the centre of the sphere. Calculate the minimum velocity v so that it penetrates at distance
R
inside the sphere. Neglect any resistance other that electrostatic interaction. Assume that the charge on small
2
mass remains constant throughout the motion.
34. A charge q of mass m initially lying at infinity is projected head on with speed v toward another stationary
particle of same mass and charge, initially at rest. Find the distance of closest approach of the two particles.
35. Figure shows a charge  Q fixed at a position in space. From a large distance another charged particle of charge
q and mass m is thrown with a speed v towards  Q with an impact parameter d (it is the perpendicular distance
between the velocities of the two particles) as shown. Find the distance of closest approach of the two particles.

36. A particle of mass 40 mg having a charge of 5 109 C is moving directly towards a fixed positive point charge of
1
magnitude108 C. When it is at a distance of 10 cm from the fixed positive point charge it has a velocity of 50cms .
At what distance from the fixed point charge will the particle come momentarily to rest? Is the acceleration constant
during the motion?
37. Two balls of charge q1 and q2 initially have a velocities of equal magnitude and same direction. After a uniform
electric field has been applied for a certain time interval, the direction of first ball changes by 60° and the velocity
magnitude is reduced by half. The direction of velocity of the second ball changes thereby 90°.

(a)Determine the magnitude of the charge to mass ratio of the second ball if it is equal to 1 for the first ball.
(b)In what ratio will the velocity of the second ball change?
Ignore the electrostatic interaction between the balls

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 153

physics Classwork Problem

27 3 3 27
38. Four point charges 8  C ,  1  C , 1 C and 8  C are fixed at the point  m,  m,  m and  m
2 2 2 2
4
respectively on the Y -axis. A particle of mass 6 10 kg and charge 0.1  C moves along the  x direction. Its
speed at x   is v0 . Find the least value of v0 for which the particle will cross the origin. Find also the kinetic energy
of the particle at the origin. Assume that space is gravity free.

39. Two small particles A and B having masses m = 0.5 kg each and charges q1   155 /18 C and q2   100 C ,
respectively, are connected at the ends of a non-conducting, flexible, and inextensible string of length r = 0.5 m.
Particle A is fixed and B is whirled along a vertical circle with center at A. If a vertically upward electric field of
strength E  1.1  105 NC1 exists in the space, calculate the minimum velocity of particle B required at the highest
 2
point so that it may just complete the circle g  10 ms . 

40. A small sphere of mass m = 0.6 kg carrying a positive charge q  80 C is connected with a light, flexible, and
inextensible string of length r = 30 cm and whirled in a vertical circle. If a horizontal rightward electric field of
strength E  105 NC1 exists in the space, calculate the minimum velocity of the sphere required at the highest
 2
point so that it may just complete the circle g  10 ms . 
41. 1000 equal drops of radius 1cm, and charge 1 10 6 C are fused to form one bigger drop.The ratio of potential of
bigger drop to one smaller drop, and the electric field intensity on the surface of bigger drop will be respectively

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 154

physics Classwork Problem

30. Capacitance
1. Consider a system of parallel plates A, B and C. The plates are given charges Q, -2Q and 3Q respectively. Find the
distribution of charge on the faces of the three plates.
Q -2Q 3Q

A B C
2. Three identical metallic plates are kept parallel to one another at a separation of a and b .The outer plates are
connected by a thin conducting wire and a charge Q is placed on the central plate. Find the final charges on all the
six faces of the plates shown.

a b

3. Two capacitors C1 and C2 (where C1 > C2 ) are charged to the same Initial potential difference, the charged
capacitors are removed from the battery and their plates are connected as shown in fig. The switches S1 and S2 are
then closed, as shown

a. Find the final potential difference between a and b after the switches are closed.
b. Find the total energy stored in the capacitors before and after the switches are closed and the ratio of the final
energy to the initial energy.
4. Four identical metal plates are arranged in air at equal distance d from each other. The area of each plate is A. A
battery of e.m.f. V is connected across the plates 1 and 2. Discuss the charge distribution and find the capacitance
of the system between points 1 and 2 if the other two plates are connected by a conducting wire as shown in Fig.

5. A and B are two isolated conductors (that means they are placed at a large distance from each other). When
they are joined by a conducting wire
(i) Find out final charges on A and B ?
(ii) Find out heat produced during the process of flow of charges
(iii) Find out common potential after joining the conductors by conducting wires?

6. Find out the following if A is connected with C and B is connected with D .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 155
physics Classwork Problem
(i) How much charge flows in the circuit.
(ii) How much heat is produced in the circuit.

7. Two capacitors C1 and C 2 are charged separately to potentials 20V and 10V respectively. The terminals of
capacitors C1 and C 2 are marked as  A  B  and  C  D  , respectively. A a is connected with C and B is connected
with D .
i. Find the final potential difference across each capacitors.
ii. Find the final charge in both capacitors.
iii. How much heat is produced in the circuit.
8. Three capacitors of capacitances 3 F , 6  F and 4  F connected as shown across a battery of e.m. f . 6 V .

i. Find equivalent capacitance.

ii. Find potential difference and charge on each capacitor.
iii. Find energy stored in each capacitor and total energy stored in the system of capacitors.
9. Three capacitors of capacitances 4  F . 4  F and 8  F are connected as shown across a battery of e.m. f . 12 V
.
i. Find equivalent capacitance.
ii. Find potential difference and charge on each capacitor.
iii. Find energy stored in each capacitor and total energy stored in the system of capacitors.

10. An infinite ladder is construected by connecting several sections of 2  F capacitor combinations as shown in
Fig. It is terminated by a capacitor of capacitance C . What value should be chosen for C such that the equivalent
capacitance of the ladder between A and B becomes independent of the number of sections in between?

11. An air-dielectric capacitor is formed by two non parallel plates, each of area A . An edge view of
the arrangement is shownin figure. Note that the top plate is tilted relative to the bottom plate so that on one edge
the plate separation is  d  d  , while on the other edge it is  d  d  . Assuming that d  d and that d is small
2
 A  1  d  
compared with the length of the plate, show that C  0 1    
d  3  d  

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 156

physics Classwork Problem

12. Find C if the equivalent capacitance between points A and B in the circuit shown is 1 F . All capacitances
are in  F .

13. Find the net capacitance of the circuit shown between points A and B .

14. Find charges Q1 and Q2 on the cap C1 and C2 in the circuit shown in Fig.

15. Consider the following circuit. Find the charge and potential difference across capacitor C1 , of capacitance
1 F .

16. In the circuit shown in Fig. find the charge on each capacitor.

17. Find the equivalent capacitance between the point A and B in figure.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 157

physics Classwork Problem

18. Find the charges on the three capacitors shown in figure.

19. Six capacitors C1  C2  C3  C4  C5  C6  C are arranged as shown in Fig. Determine the equivalent
capacitance between A and B .
20. In Fig. what are the charges on all the four capacitors?

21. Find the potential difference V A  VB between points A and B of the circuit shown in Fig.

22. Each of the three plates shown in Fig. 2.0  102 m 2 area on one side, and the gap between the adjacent plates
is 0.2 mm. The emf of the battery is   20 . Find the distribution of charge on various surfaces of the plates. What
is the equivalent capacitance of the system between the terminal points?

23. What charges will flow after shorting of the switch S in the circuit in figure through sections 1 and 2 in the
directions indicated by the arrows?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 158

physics Classwork Problem

24. What amount of heat will be generated in the circuit shown in Figure after the switch S is shifted from
position 1 to position 2?

25. Two capacitors A and B with capacities 3 F and 2 F are charged to a potential difference of 100 V and
180 V respectively. The plates of the capacitors are connected as shown in the figure with one wire of each
capacitor free. The upper plate of A is positive and that of B is negative. An uncharged 2 F capacitor C with
lead wires falls on the freeends to complete the circuit. Calculate

(a) the final charge on the three capacitors and

(b) the amount of electrostatic energy stored in the system before and after completion of the circuit.
26. Find cut equivalent capacitance between A and B (take each plate Area  A )

27. Find out equivalent capacitance between A and B . (take each plate Area = A )

28. Find out equivalent capacitance between A and B

29. Two parallel conducting plates of area A charge  q and  q as shown. A dielectric slab of dielectric constant
K , thickness 2d and a conducting plate of d is inserted between them. Taking x  0 at positive plate and x  7 d at

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 159

physics Classwork Problem
negative plate, plot E vs x and V vs x graphs. Here E is the electric field and V is the potential and consider the
potential at the positive plate be V0

30. In the situation shown in figure the length of the plates is l , area of the plates is A and separation between
then is d . A dielectric slab of dielectric constant K , mass m and thickness d is released from rest. Prove that the
slab will execute periodic motion and find its time period.Assume friction to be absent between inner portion of
the, plate and the outer surface of the slab. Also see that initially the slab has its length x inserted in the plates the
capacitor.

31. Find out capacitance between A and B if two dielectric slabs of dielectric constant K1 . and K 2 thickness d1 and
d 2 and each of area A are inserted between the plates of parallel plate capacitor
of plate area as shown in figure.

32. Find out capacitance between A and B if two dielectric slabs of dielectric constant K1 and K 2 area A1 and
A2 and each of thickness d are inserted betoeen the plates of parallel plate capacitor of plate area A as shown in
figure.  A1  A2  A

33. Find out capacitance between A and B if three dielectric slabs of dielectric constant K1 of area A1 and
thickness d. K 2 of area A2 , and thickness d1 and K 3 of area A2 and thickness d 2 are inserted between the plates of
parallel plate capacitor of plate area A as shown in figure. (Given distance between the two plates d  d1  d 2 )

34. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with plate area A and separation d , is C . The space between the
plates is filled with two wedges of dielectric constants k1 , and k2 respectively (figure). Find the capacitance of the
resulting capacitor.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 160

physics Classwork Problem

35. Four identical plane capacitors with an air dielectric are connected in series. The intensity of the field at which
the air is punctured is Ea  3  10 4 V cm 1 The distance between the plates d  0.7 cm .
(I) What maximum voltage can be fed to this battery of capacitors?
(II) What will this maximum voltage be if one of the capacitors is replaced by a similar one in which glass used 03
4 1
a dielectric?The permittivity of glass K  7 and the puncturing field of glass Eg  9  10 Vcm .
36. Consider a conducting spherical shell with an inner radius a and outer radius c . Let the space between two
surfaces be filled with two different dielectric materials so that the dielectric constant is K1 between a and b and
K 2 between b and c , as shown in figure. Determine the capacitance of this system.

37. In case of two conducting spherical shells having radii and b   a  calculate the capacity of the system if
(a) shells are concentric and inner is given a charge while outer earthed
(b) shells are concentric and the outer is given a charge while while the inner is earthed

38. There concentric conducting A, B and C of radii a, b and c are as shown in figure, find the capacitance of the
assembly between A and C .Now if, the space between A and B is filled with a dielectric material dielectric
constant K , then find the new capacitance between A and C .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 161

physics Classwork Problem

31. Current Electricity

1. A long cylinder with uniformly charged surface and cross-sectional radius a  1cm moves with a constant
1
velocity v  10 ms ' along its axis. An electric field strength at the surface of the cylinder is equal to
E  0.9 k V cm1 . Find the resulting convection current, that is, the current caused by mechanical transfer of a
charge.

2. Consider a material of resistivity  in a shape of a truncated cone of altitude h , and radii a and b , for the
right and the left ends, respectively, as shown in the figure.

Assuming that the current is distributed uniformly throughout the cross-section of the cone, what is that
resistance between the two ends?

3. Consider a hollow cylinder of length L and inner radius a and outer radius b , as shown in figure, the
material has resistivity  .

a) Suppose a potential difference is applied between the ends of the cylinder and produces a current flowing
parallel to the axis. What is the resistance measured?
b) If instead the potential difference is applied between the inner and outer surfaces so that current flows
radially outward, what is the resistance measured?
4. The wire is stretched to increase the length by 1%.Find the percentage change in resistance
5. The voltage-current graphs for two resistors of the same material and the same radius with lengths, L1 and
L2 , are shown in Fig. If L1  L2 , state with reason which of these graphs represents voltage-current change for
L1 .

6. (a) Estimate the average drift speed of conduction electrons in a copper wire of cross-sectional area
1.0 107 m 2 carrying a current of 1.5 A. Assume that each copper atom contributes roughly one conduction
3 3
electron. The density of copper is 9.0  10 kg / m , and its atomic mass is 63.5 u. (b) Compare the drift speed
obtained with the speed of propagation of electric field along the conductor which causes the drift motion.
 1 1
7. Show that the total amount of charge at the junction of the two materials in figure is  0 I    , where
  2 1 
I is the current flowing through the function, and 1 and  2 are the conductivities for the two materials.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 162

physics Classwork Problem

 1  d
8. The temperature coefficient of resistivity  is given by     where  is the resistivity at
   dT
temperature T.
a
(a) Assume that  is not constant and is given;   where T is the absolute temperature where a is a
T
b
constant, show that the resistivity  is given by   where b is another constant.
Ta
1
(b) Using the values   3.5 105 m and   5 10
4
C 

for graphite at 293 K , determine a and b .
(c) Using your result from part  b  determine the resistivity of graphite at 196 C and 300 C
(Remember to express T on absolute scale).
9. The V  I graphs for two resistors and their series combination are shown in Fig. Which one of these graphs
represents the series combination of the two resistors? Give reason for your answer.

10. Two students perform experiments on series and parallel combinations of two given resistors R1 and R2
and plot the following V  I graphs. Which of the graphs is/are correctly labeled in terms of the words ‘series’
and ‘parallel’? Justify your answer.

11. In the given network, determine the current through 6 resistor.

12. In the network shown in Fig. find the equivalent resistance across the points M and M ' .

13. Consider a more complex example where you have resistors on all edges of a cube. The resistors are all the
same. Then find the equivalent resistance between the corners A and B as shown in Fig.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 163

physics Classwork Problem

14. Twelve equal wires of resistance R are joined up to form edges of a cube, as shown in the figure. The cube is
connected into a circuit across the diagonal AG. Find the equivalent resistance of the network.
15. In the given circuits [Figs.  a  and  b  ], calculate the resistance between the points M M '

16 In Fig.  a  , the resistances are connected as shown. Determine the equivalent resistance between points A
and D .

17. (a) Find effective resistance between points A and B of an infinite chain of resistors joined as shown in
Fig  A .

(b) For what value of R0 in the circuit shown in Fig. will the net effective resistance is independent of the
number of cells in the chain ?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 164

physics Classwork Problem

18. The circuit diagram shown consists of a large number of elements (each element has two resistors R1 , and
1
R2 ).The resistances of the resistors in each subsequent element differs by a factor of k  from the
2
resistances of the resistors in the previous elements. Find the equivalent resistance between A and B shown
in figure.

19. Find the input resistance of the circuit between the points A and B of figure.

20. A network of resistances is formed as follows :

AB  9; BC  1; CA  1.5 forming a delta and AD  6, BD  4 and CD  3 forming a star.
Compute the network resistance measured between
(a) A and B ,
(b) B and C ,and
(c) C and A .

21. In figure shown, if a battery is connected between points A and B , emf E  18 V , what is current through
it?

22. In figure shown, determine the current provided by the battery.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 165

physics Classwork Problem

23. Find the equivalent resistance across AB of the circuit given.

24. In the circuit shown in figure, E1 = 10 V , E2  4 V , r1  r2  1 and R  2  . Find the potential difference
across battery 1 and battery 2.

25. Find the emf V  and internal resistance  r  of a single battery which is equivalent to a parallel
combination of two batteries of emfs V1 and V2 and internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively, with polarities
as shown in figure.

26. Find the emf and internal resistance of a single battery which is equivalent to a combination of three
batteries as shown in figure.

27. Calculate the currents through each resistance in the given circuit. Also calculate the potential difference
between points a and b .

28. Two dissimilar cells of emf E1 and E 2 and internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected in
parallel across a load resistance R , as shown. Find the emf and internal resistance of the equivalent cell of this
combination.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 166

physics Classwork Problem

29. In the given network, determine the potential of point X with respect to the point Y .

30. Find currents in different branches of the electric circuit shown in figure. Also find the potential difference
between points F and C .

31. In the arrangement shown, find the

(a) equivalent resistance between C and G .

(b) current provided by the source.
(c) voltage across points G and E .
32. An electrical circuit is shown in figure. Calculate the potential difference across the resistor of 400 as
will be measured by the voltmeter V of resistance 400 either by applying Kirchhoff's rules or otherwise.

33. What will be the change in the resistance of a circuit between A and B , consisting of five identical
resistances, if two similar resistances are added as shown by the dashed line in Fig.

34. Resistances R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 , and R6 are Connected with a 6 V battery with internal resistance 1  as
shown in Fig. Find (a) equivalent resistance and (b) current in each resistance.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 167

physics Classwork Problem

35. The resistances and batteries are connected as shown in Fig. The potentials at points B, C , D , and
E are assigned as shown. Find the potential at point A .

36. In Fig. given below find the current in the wire BD .

37. Find the current in each wire

38. In the circuit shown in Fig. Find the current through the branch BD .

39. Twelve identical resistors are arranged on all edges of a cube. Then find the equivalent resistance
between the corners 1 and 6 as shown in Fig. (use nodal method).

40. In previous problem, find the equivalent resistance of the network between 1 and 2.
41. Find the equivalent resistance between A and B .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 168

physics Classwork Problem

42. An electrical circuit is shown in Fig. Calculate the potential difference across the resistor of 400  , as will
be measured by the voltmeter V of resistance 400  , either by applying Kirchhoff’s rule or otherwise.

43. A leaky parallel plate capacitor is filled completely with a material having dielectric constant k  5 and
12 1 1
electrical conductivity   7.4 10  m . If the charge on the capacitor at instant t  0 is q  8.85  C ,
then calculate the leakage current at the instant t  12 s.
44. In the circuit shown in figure, the battery is an ideal with emf V . The capacitor is initially uncharged. The
switch S is closed at time t  0 .

(a) Find the charge Q on the capacitor at time t .

(b) Find the current in A B at time t . What is its limiting value as t   ?

45. The resistance of the galvanometer G in the circuit in 25 . The meter deflects full scale for a current of
10mA .The meter behaves as an ammeter of three different ranges. The range is 0  10 A , when the terminals
O and P taken.

The range is 0  1 A between O and Q .

The range is 0  0.1 A between O and R .
Calculate the resistance R1 , R2 and R3 .

46. The deflection in a moving coil galvanometer falls from 50 divisions to 10 divisions when a shunt of 12 is
applied. What is the resistance of the galvanometer? Assume main current to remain same.

47. (i) In the figure, find the potential difference between the points A and B .
(ii) Now we wish to measure this potential difference by using a voltmeter of resistance 2k  . Find the
reading of the voltmeter and percentage error.
(iii) Solve part (ii) if the voltmeter were of resistance 20k  .
What conclusion do you draw from the results you get in the above parts?

48. How can we make a galvanometer with G  20  and I s  1mA into a voltmeter with a maximum range of
10 V?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 169

physics Classwork Problem

49. A voltmeter of resistance R1 and an ammeter of resistance R2 are connected in series across a battery of
negligible internal resistance. When a resistance R is connected in parallel to voltmeter, reading of ammeter
increases three times while that of voltmeter reduces to one third. Find R1 and R2 in terms of R .

50. A galvanometer has an internal resistance of 50 and current required for full scale deflection is1 mA .
Find the series resistances required (as shown in figure) to use it as a voltmeter with different ranges, as
indicated figure.

51. The galvanometer shown in figure has resistance 50  and current required for full scale deflection is
1mA . Find the resistances R1 , R2 , and R3 required to convert it into ammeter having ranges indicated.

52. A battery of emf 1.4 V and internal resistance 2  is connected to a resistor of 100  . In order to
measure the current through the resistance and the potential difference across its ends, an ammeter is
4
connected in series with it and a voltmeter is connected across its ends. The resistance of the ammeter is 
3
and that of the voltmeter is 200  . What are the readings of the two instruments? What would be their
reading if they were ideal instruments?
53. A constant voltage V0 is applied to a potentiometer of resistance R connected to an ammeter. A constant
resistor r is connected to the sliding contact of the potentiometer and the fixed end of the potentiometer. How
will the reading of ammeter vary as the sliding contact is moved from one end of the potentiometer to the
other. The resistance of ammeter is assumed to be negligible.

54. A cell having a steady emf of 2 V is connected across the potentiometer wire of length 10 m. The
2
potentiometer wire is of manganin and having resistance of 11.5 m .An another cell gives a null point at 6.9
m. If a resistance of 5  is put in series with the potentiometer wire, find the new position of the null point.

55. In the simple potentiometer circuit, where the length A B of the potentiometer wire is 1 m, the resistors X
and Y have values of 5  and 2  , respectively. When X is shunted by a wire, the balance point is found to be
0.625 m from A . What is the resistance of the shunt?

56. An electrical circuit is shown in Fig. Calculate the potential difference across the resistor of 400  , as will
be measured by the voltmeter V of resistance 400  , either by applying Kirchhoff’s rule or otherwise.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 170

physics Classwork Problem

57. A thin uniform wire A B of length 1 m, an unknown resistance X and a resistance of 12  are connected
by thick conducting strips, as shown in Fig. A battery and a galvanometer (with a sliding jockey connected to it)
are also available. Connections are to be made to measure the unknown resistance X using the principle of
Wheatstone bridge. Answer the following questions.

(a) Are there positive and negative terminals on the galvanometer?

(b) Copy the figure in your answer book and show the batter and the galvanometer (with jockey)
connected at appropriate points.
(c) After appropriate connections are made, it is found that no deflection takes place in the galvanometer
when the sliding jockey touches the wire at a distance of 60 cm from A . Obtain the value of the resistance X .
58. An unknown resistance is to be determine using resistances R1 , R2 or R3 . Their corresponding null points
are A, B and C . Find which of the above will give the accurate reading and why? R  R1 or R2 or R3

59. Figure shows a potentiometer circuit for comparison of two resistances. The balance point with a
standard resistor R  10.0  is found to be 58.3 cm, while that with the unknown resistance X is 68.5 cm.
Determine the value of X . What would you do if you fail to find a balance point with the given cell E ?

60. A capacitor of capacitance 10  F is connected to a resistance 2  and a battery of e.m.f. 5 V of

negligible internal resistance. After 20 of completing the circuit, find
(a) power delivered by the battery (b)power dissipated as heat (c)rate of energy stored in the
capacitor

61. In the circuit in figure, suppose the switch has been open for a very long time. At time t  0 , it is suddenly
closed.

(a) What is the time constant before the switch is closed?

(b) What is the time constant after the switch is closed?
(c) Find the current through the switch as a function of time after the switch is closed.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 171

physics Classwork Problem

62. In the circuit shown in figure, the battery is an ideal with emf V . The capacitor is initially uncharged. The S
is closed at time t  0 .

(a) Find the charge Q on the capacitor at time t .

(b) Find the current in A B at time t . What is its limiting value as t   ?

63. A leaky parallel plane capacitor is filled completely with a material having dielectric constant k  5 and
12 1 1
electrical conductivity   7.4 10  m . If the charge on the plane at instant t  0 is q  8.85 mC , then
calculate the leakage current at the instant t  12 s.

64. A digital voltmeter of internal resistance r is used to measure the voltage across a capacitor after the switch
in Figure is closed. Because the meter has finite resistance, part of the current supplied by the battery passes
through the meter.
dq
(a) Apply Kirchhoff's rules to this circuit, and use the fact that I c  to show that this leads to the
dt
dq q r rR
differential equation Req   E where Req 
dt C R  r Rr

t
CEr  ReqC

(b) Show that the solution to this differential equation is q  1  e 
Rr  
 
t
Er  Req C

and that the voltage across the capacitor as a function of time is VC  1  e 
Rr 
 
If the capacitor is fully charged, and the switch is then opened, how does the voltage across the capacitor
behave in this case?

65. The capacitor C1 , in figure initially carries a charge q0 .When the switches S1 and S 2 are shut, capacitor C1
is connected in series to a resistor R and a second capacitor C2 ,which initially does not carry any charge.

(a) Find the charges deposited on the capacitors and the current through R as a function of time.
(b) What is the heat lost in the resistor after a long time of closing the switch?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 172

physics Classwork Problem

66. Two large conducting plates are arranged to form a parallel-plate capacitor of capacitance C . The plates
are given charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. The plates are then connected to the terminals of a battery of emf E
and internal resistance r at t  0 . Find the charges on the four surfaces as function of time.

67. Calculate the current flowing through the capacitor branch in the circuit shown initially and finally.

68. Two wires of same mass, having ration of the lengths 1:2, density 1:3 and resistivity 2:1. They are
connected one by one to the same voltage supply. The rate of heat dissipation in the first wire is found to be
10W . Find the rate of heat dissipation in the second wire.
69. A 100 W bulb is designed to operate on a potential difference of 230 V .
1. Find the resistance of the bulb.
2. Find the current drawn by the bulb if it is operated at a potential difference for which it is designed.
3. Find the current drawn and power consumed by the bulb if it is connected to 200 V supply.

70. A 500 W heating unit is designed to operate from a 200 V line. By what percentage will its heat output
drop if the line voltage drops to 160 V ? Find the heat produced by it in 10 min.
71. Two bulbs are marked 220V  100W and 220 V  50 W .
i. Which bulb will produce more illumination if they are connected in parallel to a 220 V supply?
ii. Which bulb will produce more illumination if they are connected in series to a 220 V supply?
iii. Also find the total power consumed by both the bulbs in each of the two parts above.

72. Two bulbs are rated 30 W  200 V and 60 W  200 V . They are connected with a 400 V power supply.
Find which bulb will get fused if they are connected in (i) series and (ii) parallel.

73. An electric tea kettle has two heating coils. When one of the coils is switched on, boiling begins in 6 min.
When the other coil is switched on, the boiling begins in 8 min. In what time, will the boiling begin if both coils
are switched on simultaneously (i) in series and (ii) in parallel.
74. Shown here are two resistors with resistances R1 and R2 connected in parallel and in series. The battery has
a internal voltage of E .

When 1
R and R2 are connected in parallel, then (a) Find the power delivered to each resistor.
(b) Show that the sum of the power used by each resistor is equal to the power supplied by the battery.
When R1 and R2 are now connected in series, then
(c) Find the power delivered to each resistor.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 173

physics Classwork Problem

(d) Show that the sum of the power used by each resistor is equal to the power supplied by the battery.
Which configuration, parallel or series, uses more power?

75. What amount of heat will be generated in a coil of resistance R due to a charge q passing through it if the sit
in the coil decreases down to zero(a) uniformly during a time interval t0 ? (b) halving its value every t0
seconds?
76. A circuit shown in the figure has resistances 20 and 30 . At what value of resistance Rx will the
thermal power generated in it be practically independent of small variations of that resistance? The voltage
between points A and B is supposed to be constant in this case.

77. An electric kettle taking 3 A at 210V brings 1 of water from 20 C to 80C in 10 min. Find its efficiency.
78. A line having a total resistance of 0.2  delivers 10 kW at 220 V to a small factory. Calculate the efficiency of
transmission.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 174

physics Classwork Problem

32. Magnetic Effect Current Problem


 
1. A 64  C charge travelling with velocity v  4iˆ  3 ˆj ms 1 enters a region where there is a magnetic

 
B  5iˆ  3 ˆj T . Find the magnetic force on the change.
6 1
2. A particle having charge q  10  C moves in uniform magnetic field with velocity v1  10 ms at angle
45° with x -axis in the x  y plane and experiences a force F1  5 2 mN along the negative z -axis . When
6 1
the same particle moves with velocity v2  10 ms along the z -axis it experiences a force F2 in y direction.
Find the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field. Also find the magnitude of the force F2 .
3. A group of particles is travelling in a magnetic field of unknown magnitude and direction. It is observed
that a proton moving at 1.5 kms 1 in the  x -direction experiences a force of 2.25  10 16 N in the  y -
direction and an electron moving at 4.75 kms 1 in the  z -direction experiences a force of 8.5  10 16 N .
Calculate the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field.
26
4. A particle of mass 110 kg and charge 1.6  10 19 C travelling with a velocity 1.28  10 6 ms 1 in the
 X direction enters a region in which a uniform electric field E and a uniform magnetic field of induction B
are present such that E x  E y  0, E z  102.4 kVm 1 and Bx  Bz  0, B y  8  102 Wbm 2 . The particle
enters this region at the origin at time t  0 . Determine the location ( x, y and z co-ordinates) of the particle
at t  5  10 6 s . If the electric field is switched off at this instant (with the magnetic field still present), what
will be the position of the particle at t  7.45  10 6 s ?
27
5. A particle of mass m  1.6 10 kg and charge q  1.6 1019 C enters a region of uniform magnetic
field of strength 1T along the direction shown in figure, the speed of the particle is 10 7 ms 1 .
a) The magnetic field is directed along the inward normal to the plane of the paper to particle leaves the
region of the field at the point F . Find the distance EF and the angle  .
b) If the direction of the field is along the outward normal to the plane of the paper, find the time spent
by the particle in the region of the magnetic field after entering it at E .

6. A beam of protons with a velocity 4  105 ms1 enters a uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T at an angle of 60°
to the magnetic field. Find the radius of the helical path taken by the proton beam. Also find the pitch of the
helix.
 
7. A particle having mass m and charge q , enters a uniform magnetic field B   B0 kˆ with velocity v  v0 iˆ
from the origin. Find the time dependence of velocity and position of the particle.

 
8. A particle of charge q and mass m is projected from origin with velocity v  v0 iˆ  kˆ in a uniform

magnetic field B   B0 kˆ . Find the velocity and position of the particle as a function of time t .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 175

physics Classwork Problem

9. A charged particle of mass m , charge q enters a uniform magnetic field B with speed v0 at angle  as
shown in figure. Find the
(a) angle  at which it leaves the magnetic field.
(b) time spent by the particle in magnetic field and
(c) separation AC .

10. An electron gun G emits electrons of energy 2 keV travelling in the positive X -direction. The
electrons are required to hit the spot S where GS  0.1 m , and the line GS makes an angle of 60° with the x

-axis as shown is figure. A uniform magnetic field B parallel to GS exists in the region outside the electron
gun. Find the minimum value of B needed to make the electrons hit S .

11. A particle of mass m and charge q is projected into a region having a perpendicular uniform magnetic
field B . Find the angle of deviation  of the particle as it comes out of the magnetic field if width d of the
region is
mv mv 2mv
(a) (b) (c)
2qB qB qB

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 176

physics Classwork Problem
12. The region between x  0 and x  L is filled with uniform steady magnetic field B0 kˆ . A particle of mass
m , positive charge q and velocity v0 iˆ travels along x -axis and enters the region of the magnetic field.
Neglecting gravity throughout the question, find the
(a) value of L if the particle emerges from the region of magnetic field with its final velocity al an angle 30
to its initial velocity.
(b) final velocity of the particle and the time spent by it in the magnetic field, if the magnetic field now
expands up to 2.1 L .
13. A potential difference of 600 V is applied across the plates of a parallel plate condenser. The separation
between the plates is 3 mm . An electron projected vertically, parallel to the plates, with a velocity of
2  10 6 ms 1 moves undeflected between the plates. Find the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field
in the region between the condenser plates. (Neglect the edge effects). (Charge of the electron
 1.6  10 19 C ).

14. A particle of mass m and charge q is moving in a region where uniform, constant electric and magnetic
    
fields E and B are present. E and B are parallel to each other, At time t  0 , the velocity v0 of the particle is
 
perpendicular to E (Assume that its speed is always  c , the speed of light in vacuum). Find the velocity v
  
of the particle at time t . You must express your answer in terms of t , q , m the vectors v0 , E and B and their

magnitudes v0 , E and B .
15. A particle with specific charge s leaves the origin in the direction of x -axis with an initial velocity v0 .
Uniform electric and magnetic fields with strength E and B are directed along the y -axis. Find the
(a) y -coordinate of the particle when it crosses the y -axis for n th time.
(b) Angle  between the particle's velocity vector and the y -axis at that moment.
16. A long, straight wire carries a current i . A particle having a positive charge q and mass m kept at a
distance x0 from the wire is projected towards it with a speed v as shown in figure. Find the minimum
separation between the wire and the particle.
17. An electron is released from the origin at a place where a uniform electric field E and a uniform
magnetic field B exist along the negative Y -axis and the negative Z -axis respectively. Find the displacement
of the electron along the Y -axis when its velocity becomes perpendicular to the electric field for the first
time.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 177

physics Classwork Problem
18. In the arrangement shown, a semicircular wire loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field B  2 T . The
plane the loop is perpendicular to the magnetic field. A current I  4 A flows in the loop in the directions
shown.

Find the magnitude of the magnetic force in both the cases  a  and  b  . The radius of the loop is 2 m .
19. A circular loop of radius R is bent along a diameter and given a shape as shown in figure. One of the
semicircles ( KNM ) lies in the X  Z plane and the other one ( KLM ) in the Y  Z plane with their centres at
origin. Current I is flowing through each of the semicircles as shown in figure.
 
(a) A particle of charge q is released at the origin with a velocity v  v0iˆ . Find the instantaneous force F
on the particle. Assume that space is gravity free.
 
(b) If an external uniform magnetic field B0 ˆj is applied, determine the force F1 and F2 on the semicircles

KLM and KNM due to the field and the net force F on the loop.

20. A rod of mass m and radius R rests on two parallel rails that are a distance l apart and have a length L .
The rod carries a current I (in the direction shown) and rolls along the rails without slipping. A uniform
magnetic field B is directed perpendicular to the rod and the rails. If it starts from rest, what is the speed of
the rod as it leaves the rails?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 178

physics Classwork Problem
21. A thin copper bar of length l is supported horizontally by two (non-magnetic) contacts. The bar carries
current I1 in the  x direction, as shown in figure. At a distance h below one end of the bar; a long straight
wire carries a current I 2 in the z -direction. Determine the magnetic force exerted on the bar.

22. An equilateral triangular frame with side a carrying a current I is placed at a distance a from an
infinitely long straight wire carrying a current I as shown in the figure. One side of the frame is parallel to

the wire. The whole system lies in the x  y plane. Find the magnetic force F acting on the frame.

23. A coil carrying a current I is placed in a uniform magnetic field so that its axis coincides with the field
direction. The single-layer winding of the coil is made of wire with diameter d , radius of turns is equal to R .
At what value of the induction of the external magnetic field can the coil winding be ruptured? Assume the
breaking stress of the wire to be  0 .
24. A wire with cross-sectional area A , density  bent to make three sides of a square can turn about a
horizontal axis OO ' as shown. The wire is located in uniform vertical magnetic field. Find the magnetic
induction if on passing a current I through the wire the latter deflects by an angle  .

25. A conducting wire of length l is placed on a rough horizontal surface, where a uniform horizontal
magnetic field B perpendicular to the length of the wire exists. Least values of the forces required to move
the rod when a current I is established in the rod are observed to be F1 and F2   F1  for the two possible
direction of the current through the rod respectively. Find the weight of the rod and the coefficient of friction
between the rod and the surface.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 179

physics Classwork Problem
26. A straight segment OC (of length L ) of a circuit carrying a current I is placed along the x -axis. Two
infinitely long straight wires A and B , each extending from z   to  , are fixed at y   a and y   a
respectively, as shown in the figure. If the wires A and B each carry a current I into the plane of the paper,
obtain the expression for the force acting on the segment OC .What will be the force on OC if the current in
the wire B is reversed?

27. A semi circular conductor of radius R carrying a current I 0 is coplanar with a very long straight
conductor carrying a current I . The distance of the centre of the straight conductor is a from the straight
conductor. Find the magnetic interaction force between the conductors for the position shown in figure.

28. Compute the magnetic dipole moment or the loop shown in.

29. A circular loop of wire of radius R is bent about its diameter along two mutually perpendicular planes as
shown in fig. If the loop carries a current I , then determine its magnetic moment.
30. A conductor carries a constant current I along the closed path abcdefgha involving 8 of the 12 edges
of’ length l . Find the magnetic dipole moment of the closed path.
31. A spherical shell of radius R , having charge Q rotates with angular velocity  about an axis passing
through its centre. Calculate the magnetic induction at the centre of the shell. Find the magnetic moment of
the shell in terms of Q and express both the results in terms of  . Also calculate the ratio of the magnetic

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 180

physics Classwork Problem
 
moment M to the angular momentum of the rotating shell L , called as GYROMAGNETIC RATIO. Can you
conclude something significant from this ratio? Explain.
32. A square loop OABCO of side l carries a current I and is placed as shown in figure. Calculate the
magnetic moment of the loop.

33. Find the magnitude of magnetic moment of the current carrying loop ABCDEFA . Each side of the loop
is 10 cm long and current in the loop is I  2 A .

 
34. A current loop with magnetic dipole moment M is placed in a uniform magnetic field B , with its
moment making angle  with the field. With the arbitrary choice of U  0 for   90  ,prove that the
 
potential energy of the dipole field system is U   M .B . Also calculate the maximum and minimum values of
U , giving its significance.
35. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over the slant surface of a thin walled right circular cone of semi-
vertex angle  and height h . The cone is uniformly rotated about its axis at angular velocity  . Calculate the
magnetic dipole moment associated with the cone.

36. A current I  5 A flows through a thin wire as shown the figure,

(a) Find the magnetic field produced by the current at point O in the figure,

(b)  
If there exists an external magnetic field B  14iˆ  14 ˆj T , calculate the torque acting on the wire.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 181

physics Classwork Problem
22
Take  
7


37. A uniform constant magnetic field B is directed at an angle of 45° to the X  axis in X  Y plane.
PQRS is a rigid square wire frame carrying a steady current I 0 , with its centre at the origin O . At time
t  0 , the frame is at rest in the position shown in the figure with its sides parallel to X and Y axis. Each side
of the frame is  mass M and length L .

(a) What is the torque  about O acting on the frame due to the magnetic field?
(b) Find the angle by which the frame rotates under the action of this torque in a short interval of time t
and the axis about which this rotation occurs ( t is short that any variation in the torque during this interval
may be neglected).
Given : the moment of inertia of the frame about an axis through its centre perpendicular to its plane is
4 2
mL .
3

38. An electron in the ground state of hydrogen atom is revolving in anticlockwise direction in a circular
orbit of radius R (shown in figure).
(a) Obtain an expression for the orbital magnetic moment of the electron.

(b) The atom is placed in a uniform magnetic induction B such that the plane normal of the electron
orbit makes An angle of 30° with the magnetic induction. Find the torque experienced by the orbiting
electron.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 182

physics Classwork Problem

39. A wire loop carrying a current I is placed in the x  y plane as shown in figure.

(a) If a particle with charge Q and mass m is placed al the centre P and given a velocity v along NP
(shown in figure), find its instantaneous acceleration.

(b) If an external uniform magnetic induction field B  Biˆ is applied, find the force and the torque acting on
the loop due to this field.

40. A moving coil galvanometer experiences torque ki where i is current. If N coils of area A each and
moment of inertia I is kept in magnetic field B .
(a) Find k in terms of given parameters,

(b) If for current i deflection is ,find out torsional constant of spring,
2
(c) If a charge Q is passed suddenly through the galvanometer. Find out maximum angle of deflection.
41. The coil of a galvanometer is 0.02  0.8 m 2 . It consists of 200 turns of the wire and is in a magnetic
5
field of 0.20 T . The restoring torque constant of suspension fibre is10 Nm/degree . Assuming magnetic
field to be radial
i. What is the maximum current that can be measured by this galvanometer if scale can accommodate
45° deflection?
ii. What is the smallest current that can be detected if minimum observed deflection is 0.1°?
7 1
42. A point charge of magnitude q  4.5 nC is moving with speeds v  3.6 10 ms parallel to the x -axis
along the line y  3m . Find the magnetic field at the origin produced by this charge when the charge is at the
point x  4 m , y  3m , as shown in.

43. Calculate the magnetic field at the

(a) centroid of an equilateral current carrying wire frame of length 3L .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 183

physics Classwork Problem
(b) centre of a current carrying squared wire frame of length 4L .
(c) centre of a regular n sided polygon current carrying wire frame of length nL ,
Assume that the current in the wire frame specified in each part is I , Also find the result of  c  when n   .
44. Two long straight parallel wires are 2 m apart, perpendicular to the plane of the paper. The wire A
carries a current of 9.6 A , directed into the plane of the paper. The wire B carries a current such that the
10
magnetic field of induction at the point P , at a distance of m from the wire B , is zero. Find the
11
(a) magnitude, and direction of the current in B .
(b) magnitude of the magnetic field induction at the point S .
(c) force per unit length on the wire B .

45. A pair of stationary and infinitely long bent wires are placed in the xy plane as shown in figure. The
wires carry currents of I  10 A each as shown. The segments L and M are along the x -axis. The segments
P and Q are parallel to the y -axis such that OS  OR  0.02 m . Find the magnitude and direction of the
magnetic induction at the origin O .

46. Two long parallel wires carrying currents 2.5 A and I (ampere) in the same direction (directed into the
plane of the paper) are held at P and Q respectively such that they are perpendicular to the plane of paper.
The points P and Q are located at a distance of 5 m and 2 m respectively from a collinear point R (shown in
figure).
(a) An electron moving with a velocity of 4  105 ms 1 along the positive x -direction experiences a force
of magnitude 3.2  10 20 N at the point R . Find the value of I .
(b) Find all the positions at which a third long parallel wire carrying a current of magnitude 2.5 A may be
placed, so that the magnetic induction at R is zero.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 184

physics Classwork Problem

47. Two circular coils of radius R , each with N turns, are perpendicular to a common axis. The centres of
the coils are a distance R apart. Each coil carries a steady current I in the same direction, as shown in
figure.
(a) Show that the magnetic field on the axis at a distance x from the center of one coil is
 
N 0 IR 2  1 1 
B  3
 3 
2
  R 2  x 2  2  2 R 2  x 2  2 Rx  2 
 
2
dB d B
(b) Show that and are both zero at the point midway between the coils.
dx dx 2

48. Calculate the magnetic field at the centre of a charged disc of radius R having a uniform charge Q ,
surface charge density  rotating with angular velocity  . Also calculate B in terms of  ,
49. A disc of radius R rotates with angular velocity  about an axis perpendicular to its surface passing
through centre. Assuming the surface charge density  varies with r as    r 2 , where r is the distance
from its centre, find the magnetic induction on the axis of rotation at a point at distance x , from the centre.
50. A solenoid of length 0.4 m and diameter is 0.6 m consists of a single layer of 1000 turns of fine wire g a
current of 5.0  10 3 A . Calculate the magentic field intensity on the axis at the middle and at the ends of the
solenoid.
51. Two long thin parallel conductors of the shape shown in figure carry direct currents I1 and I 2 . The
separation between the conductors is a , the width of the right hand conductor is equal to b . With both
conductors lying in one plane, find the magnetic interaction force between them reduced to a unit of their
length.

52. A square frame carrying a current I is located in the same plane as a long straight wire carrying a
current I 0 . The frame side has a length a , The axis of the frame passing the midpoints of opposite sides is
parallel to the wire and is separated from it by the distance which is   1.5 times greater than the side of
the frame. Find
(a) the ampere force acting on the frame.
(b) the mechanical work to be performed in order to turn the frame through 180° about its axis, with
currents maintained constant.
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 185
physics Classwork Problem
53. A long horizontal wire AB , which is free to move in a vertical plane and carries a steady current of 20 A
, is in equilibrium at a height of 0.01 m over another parallel long wire CD which is fixed in a horizontal
plane and carries a steady current of 30 A , as shown in figure. Show that when AB is slightly depressed, it
executes simple harmonic motion. Find the period of oscillations.

54. A bar of mass m slides on a smooth horizontal conducting rail. A constant current I is maintained in the
rod using a constant current generator as shown. There is a long straight conductor carrying current I 0
parallel to the rod. Find the speed of the bar after it has travelled a distance D .

55. Figure shows three current carrying conductors and three imaginary loops. Calculate the current
enclosed by each of the loops.

56.a Figure shows two current carrying wires piercing the plane of an imaginary loop. One of the wires is
normal to the plane of the loop while the other is at an angle. Calculate the net current enclosed.

56. b Consider a coaxial cable which consists of an inner wire of radius a surrounded by an outer shell of
inner and outer radii b and c respectively. The inner wire carries an electric current i0 and the outer shell
carries an equal current in opposite direction. Kind the magnetic field at a distance x from the axis where (a)
x  a ,(b) a  x  b , (c) b  x  c and (d) x  c . Assume that the current density is uniform in the inner
wire and also uniform in the outer shell.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 186

physics Classwork Problem

33. EMI
1. A rectangular loop of width a and length b is located near a long wire carrying a current I . The
distance between the wire and the closest side of the loop is c . The wire is parallel to the long side of the
loop. Find the total magnetic flux through the loop due to the current in the wire. Suppose we move the
loop in figure very far away from the wire. What happens to the magnetic flux?

2. A very long, cylindrical wire of radius R carries a current I 0 uniformly distributed across the cross
section of the wire. Calculate the magnetic flux through a rectangle that has one side of length L running
down the centre of the wire and another side of length R , as shown in figure.

3. A closed loop with the geometry shown in fig is placed in a uniform magnetic field directed into the
plane of the paper. If the magnetic field decreases with time, determine the direction of the induced
e.m.f. in this loop.

4. An infinite straight wire carrying a current I , varying with time t as I  t   a  bt , is placed to the left
of a rectangular loop of wire with width w and length l , as shown in Figure. Assuming a and b to be
positive constants, calculate the induced emf in the loop and the direction of the induced current?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 187

physics Classwork Problem
5. A square loop with length l on each side is placed in a uniform magnetic field pointing into the page.
During a time interval. t , the loop is pulled from its two edges and turned into a rhombus, as shown in
Figure. Assuming that the total resistance of the loop is R, find the average induced current in the loop
and its direction.


6. A rectangular loop of dimensions l and w moves with a constant velocity v away from an infinitely
long straight wire carrying a current I in the plane of the loop, as shown in Figure. Let the total
resistance of the loop be R . What is the current in the loop at the instant the near side is a distance h
  
from the wire? Can you derive the same result using     v  B   dl ?


7. A conducting rod of length l moves with velocity v parallel to a long wire carrying a steady current I .
The axis of the rod is maintained perpendicular to the wire with the near end a distance r away, as
shown in figure. Find the magnitude of the emf induced in the rod.

8. The figure shows a square loop of wire with sides of length l  2 cm. A magnetic field points into the
2 1 2
page and its magnitude is given by B  at y where a  4Tm s , B is in tesla, t is in second and y is in
metre. Determine the emf induced in the loop at t = 2.5 s.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 188

physics Classwork Problem

9. The figure shows two parallel and co-axial loops. The smaller loop (radius r) is above the large loop
(radius R) at a distance x  R . The magnetic field due to current in the larger loop is nearly constant
dx
near the smaller loop. Suppose that x is increasing at the constant rate v.
dt
(a) Determine the magnetic flux through the smaller loop as a function of x .
(b) Find the induced emf and the direction of induced current in the smaller loop at the instant when
separation between them is X .

10. Two fixed long straight wires carry the same current I in opposite directions as shown in figure. A
square loop of side b is fixed in the plane of the wires with its length parallel to one wire at a distance a
as shown in figure.
dI
(a) Calculate the induced emf in the loop if the current in both wires is changing at the rate .
dt
dI
(b) What is the direction of force on the loop if is positive?
dt


11. A square loop ABCD of side a is moving in the xy - plane with velocity v   tjˆ . There exists a

 
non-uniform magnetic field B   B0 1   y 2 kˆ where y  0 , B0 and  are constants. Initially, the
upped wire of the loop is at y  0 . Find the induced voltage across the resistance R as a function of time.
Neglect the magnetive force due to the induced current.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 189

physics Classwork Problem

12. A square loop of side L, resistance R, lies at a distance L from the wire carrying a current I  t 
which decreases gradually with time t as
 1
1   t  I 0 for 0  t  
I t   
0 1
for t>
 
(a) In what direction does the induced current in the square loop flow?
(b) What total charge passes through a given point in the loop during the time this current flows?

2
13. A wire bent as a parabola y  kx is located in a uniform magnetic field of induction B, the vector B
being perpendicular to the plane x , y . At the moment t = 0 a connector starts sliding translation wise
from the parabola apex with a constant acceleration a thus formed as a function of y .

14. A rectangular metallic loop of length I , width w and resistance R moves with constant speed v to
the right, as in figure. The loop passes through a uniform magnetic field B directed into the page and
extending a distance 3 w along the x -axis. Defining x as the position of the right side of the loop along
the x -axis, plot as functions of x
(a) the magnetic flux through the area enclosed by the loop,
(b) the induced motional emf, and
(c) the external applied form necessary to counter the magnetic force and keep v constant.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 190

physics Classwork Problem

15. A conducting rod of length l is free to side on two parallel conducting bars as in Figure. In addition,
two resistors R1 and R2 are connected across the ends of the bars. There is a uniform magnetic field
pointing into the page. Suppose an external agent pulls the bar to the left at a constant speed v. Find the
(a) current through both resistors.
(b) total power delivered to the resistors.
(c) applied force required to maintain a constant velocity of the rod.

16. Two parallel vertical metallic rails AB and CD are separated by 1 m. They are connected at two
ends by resistances R1 , and R2 as shown in figure. A horizontal metallic bar of mass 0.2 kg slides
without friction vertically down the rails under the action of gravity. There is a uniform horizontal
magnetic field of 0.6T perpendicular to the plane of the rails. It is observed that when the terminal
velocity is attained, the powers dissipated in R1 and R2 are 0.76 W and 1.2 W respectively. Find the
terminal velocity of the bar L and the values R1 of and R2 .


17. An infinitesimally small bar magnet of dipole moment M is pointing and moving with the speed v

in the X -direction . A small closed circular conducting loop of radius a and negligible self-inductance
lies in the y  2 plane with its centre at x  0 , and its axis coinciding with the . x -axis. Find the force
opposing the motion of the magnet, if the resistance of the loop is R. Assume that the distance x of the
magnet from the centre of the loop is much greater than a .
18. A rectangular loop with a sliding conductor of length l is located in a uniform magnetic field
perpendicular to the plane of loop. The magnetic induction perpendicular to the plane of loop is equal to
B . The part ad and be has electric resistance R1 , and R2 respectively. The conductor starts moving with
constant acceleration a0 at time t =0. Neglecting the self inductance of the loop and resistance of
conductor. Find
Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 191
physics Classwork Problem
(a) the current through the conductor during its motion.
(b) the polarity of abed terminal.
(c) external force required to move the conductor with the given current.

19. A bar of mass m, length l and resistance R slides without friction in a horizontal plane, moving on
parallel rails as shown in figure. A battery that maintains a constant emf E is connected between the

rails, and a constant magnetic field B is directed perpendicularly to the plane of the page. Assuming the
bar starts from rest find the velocity of the rod as a function of time. Also find the current in the loop.

20. To metal bars are fixed vertically and are connected on the top by a capacitor C . A sliding
conductor length slides with its ends in contact with the bars. The arrangement is placed in a uniform
horizontal magnetic field directed normal to the plane of the figure. The conductor is released from rest.
Find the displacement x  t  of the conductor as function of time t.

21. Find the current through section PQ of length a in figure. The circuit is located in a time varying
magnetic field B  B0t . Assume the resistance per length of the wire is  ,

22. A copper connector of mass m slides down two smooth copper bars, set at an angle  to the
horizontal, due to gravity. At the top the bars are interconnected through a capacitor C. The separation
between the bars is equal to  . The system is located in a uniform magnetic held of induction b,
perpendicular to the plane in which the connector slides. The resistances of the bars, the connector and

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 192

physics Classwork Problem
the sliding contacts, as well as the self inductance of the loop, arc assumed to be negligible. Find the
acceleration of the connector.

23. In the arrangement shown in the figure there is a uniform magnetic field B0 normal to the plane of
paper. The connector is smooth and conducting and it has a mass m and length l . The connector is
pushed against the spring so that the spring has compression x0 . The connector is released at t =0 . Find
the time it will take to come to its original position again. The spring is non-conducting. The resistance of
the rails is zero and neglect its self-inductance.

24. Two parallel rails with negligible resistance are 10 cm apart and are connected by a. 5 resistor
also contains two metal rods 1 and 2 having resistances of 10  and 15  sliding along the rails. The
rods are pulled away from the resistor at constant speeds of 4 ms 1 and 2 ms 1 , respectively. A uniform
magnetic field of magnitude 10mT is applied perpendicular to the plane of the rails. Determine the
current in the 5  resistor.

25. A wire loop ABCD is divided into two parts. AB  AD  2 m, BC  CD  1 m . The wire loop is
1
lying on X  V plane. The resistance per unit length of the wire is 2  m . There exists a time

dependent magnetic field B   2.5t  kˆ T. Find the current flowing through each part of the loop.

26. Figure shows a wire bent into the shape of a right angle that is fixed on a horizontal plane. A very
long rod of mass m initially starts with a velocity v0 from the apex A of the bent wire. The resistance of
the wire and the rod is m 1 . The whole arrangement is placed in a region of uniform magnetic
induction B . Find the distance travelled by the rod before it coming to rest.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 193

physics Classwork Problem

27. The arrangement shown is placed in a vertical uniform magnetic field. Two metal rods of length l
and masses m1 and m2 are pulled apart from rest by a constant force F . Find the current in the resistor R
as a function a time.

28. Two long parallel conducting rods with negligible resistance are connected by capacitor C and
semicircular conducting wire in the same plane as shown. This system lies in a perpendicular magnetic
field. Now loop ACB is moved on rails with its displacement given by x  a sin  t  from the initial
position. Find the maximum current in the capacitor.

29. A circular loop of radius r moves with a constant velocity v in a region with uniform magnetic field
B . Calculate the potential difference between two points  A, B    C , D  and  E , F  located on the
loop.

30. An angle AOB made of a conducting wire moves along its bisector through a magnetic field B as
suggested by fig.Find the emf induced between the two free ends if the magnetic field is perpendicular to
the plane at the angle.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 194

physics Classwork Problem
31. A rod of length  and resistance r rotates about one end as shown in figure. Its other end touches a
conducting ring a of negligible resistance. A resistance R is connected between centre and periphery.
Draw the electrical equivalence and find the current in the resistance R. There is a uniform magnetic
field B directed as shown.

32. Solve the above question if the length of rod is 2L and resistance 2r and it is rotating about its
centre. Both ends of the rod now touch the conducting ring

33. A rod of length I is rotating with an angular speed  about its one end which is at a distance ' a '
from an infinitely long wire carrying current i . Find the emf induced in the rod at the instant shown in
the figure.

34. A rod of mass m and resistance r is placed on fixed, resistance less, smooth conducting rails (closed
by a resistance R) and it is projected with an initial velocity u Find its velocity as a function of time

35. A ring rotates with angular velocity  about an axis in the plane of the ring and which passes
through the centre of the ring . A constant magnetic field B exists perpendicular to the plane of the ring.
Find the emf induced in the ring as a function of time

36. A thin wire AC shaped as a semi-circle of diameter d rotates with a constant angular velocity 
in a uniform magnetic field of induction B , with  || B . The rotation axis passes through the end A of
 
the wire and is perpendicular to the diameter AC . Find the value of a line integral  E  dl along the

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 195

physics Classwork Problem
wire from point A to point C . Generalize the obtained result for on arbitrary shape of wire between A
and C .
37. A metal rod of mass m can rotate about a horizontal axis O, sliding along a circular conductor of
radius r. The arrangement is located in a uniform magnetic field of induction B directed perpendicular to
the ring plane. The axis and the ring axe connected to a source of emf E to form a circuit of resistance R,
Neglecting the friction, circuit inductance, and ring resistance, find the expression according to which
the source emf must vary to make the rod rotate with a constant angular velocity  .

38. In a cylindrical region of radius a . magnetic field exists along its axis but the direction of magnetic
field is opposite in the four quadrants of the region as shown in figure. A rod AB rotates with its end A
at the centre of magnetic field and other end n slides on a smooth wire at the periphery of the region of
magnetic field. At t = 0 the rod was situated along the  x direction. Find and plot the time dependence
of the current and thermal power in the resistance R, if the rod rotates with a
(a) constant angular velocity  . (b) constant angular acceleration  .

39. A metal disc of radius R = 25 cm rotates with a constant angular velocity   130 rad s 1 about its
axis. Find the potential difference between the centre and rim of the disc if
a. the external magnetic field is absent,
b. the external uniform magnetic field B = 5.0 mT is directed perpendicular to the disc.
40. A copper rod of length 0.19 m is moving with uniform velocity 10 ms -1 parallel to a long straight
wire carrying a current of 5.0 A. The rod is perpendicular to the wire with its ends at distances 0.01 and
0.2 m from it. Calculate the emf induced in the rod.
41. An infinite wire carries a current I . An ‘S’-shaped conducting rod or two semicircles each of radius
r is placed at an angle  to the wire. The centre of the conductor is at a distance d from the wire. If the
rod translates parallel to the wire with a velocity v as shown in fig. Calculate the emf induced across the
ends OB of the rod.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 196

physics Classwork Problem
42. Space is divided by the line AD into two regions. Region I is field free and the region II has a
uniform magnetic field B directed into the plane of the paper. ACD is a semicircular conducting loop of
radius r with centre at O, the plane of the loop being in the plane of the paper. The loop is now made to
rotate with a constant angular velocity  about an axis passing through O and perpendicular to the
plane of the paper. The effective resistance of the loop is R .
(a)Obtain an expression for the magnitude of the induced current in the loop.
(b)Show the direction of the current when the loop is entering into the region II .
(c)Plot a graph between the induced emf and the time of rotation for two periods of rotation.

43. A wire shaped as a semi-circle of radius a rotate about an axis OO' with an angular velocity  in
uniform magnetic field of induction B . The rotation axis in perpendicular to the field direction. The total
resistance on the circuit is equal to R . Neglecting the magnetic field on the induced current, find the
mean amount of thermo power being generated in the loop during a rotation period.

44. A toroid having a rectangular cross section a  b , where a  2 cm , b  3 cm and inner radius R  4
cm consists of 500 turns of wire that curries a sinusoidal current I=I 0 sin  t  with I0  50 A and a
frequency f  60 Hz . A coil that consists of 20 turns of wire links with the toroid, as shown in figure.
Determine the emf induced in the coil as a function of time.

45. For the situation shown in figure, the magnetic field changes with time according to the expression
B  (2t 3  4t 2  0.8T ) and r  2 R  5cm .
(a) Calculate the magnitude and direction of the force exerted on an electron located at point P2 .
When t  2s .
(b) At when time is this force equal to zero?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 197

physics Classwork Problem

46. A long solenoid of radius R has n turns of wire per unit length and carries a time-varying current
the varies Sinusoidally as I=I 0 cos  t  where I0 is the maximum current and  is the angular
frequency of the alternates current source,
(a)Determine the magnitude of the induced electric field outside the solenoid at a distance r  R from its
ion central axis.
(b)What is the magnitude of the induced electric field inside the solenoid, a distance r from its axis?

47. A line charge  is wound around an insulating disc of mass M and radius R, which is then
suspended horizontally as shown in figure, so that it is free to rotate. In the central legion of radius a ,
there is a uniform magnetic field B0 , pointing up. Now the magnetic field is turned off, which causes the
disc to rotate. Find the angular speed  with which the disc starts rotating. Can you explain the rotation
of the disc.

48. A thin conducting ring of mass m carrying a charge q can freely rotate about its axis. At the initial
moment the ring was at rest and no magnetic field was present. Then a uniform magnetic field was
switched on, which was perpendicular to the plane of the ring and increased with time according to a
dB
certain law:  k , Find the angular velocity  of the ring as a function of k.
dt
49. A thin non-conducting ring of mass m carrying a charge q can rotate freely about its axis. At t = 0,
the ring was at rest and no magnetic field was present. Then suddenly a magnetic field B was set
perpendicular to the plane. Find the angular velocity acquired by the ring.
50. A non-conducting ring of mass m and R has charge Q uniformly distributed over its circumference.
The ring is placed on a rough horizontal surface such that the plane of the ring is parallel to the surface.
A vertical magnetic field B  B0 t 2 tesla is switched on. After 2 s from switching on the magnetic field, the
ring is just about to rotate about vertical axis through its centre.
a. Find friction coefficient n between the ring and the surface. If magnetic field is switched off after 4 s,
then find
b. the angular velocity of the ring just after switching off the magnetic field.
c. the angle rotated by the ring before coming to rest after switching off the magnetic field.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 198

physics Classwork Problem

34-35. Inductance & AC

1. Consider two wires 1 and 2 carrying equal currents I but in opposite direction. If a be the radius
of the wires, and w be a the centre to centre distance between them, then find the inductance L of a
length x of this arrangement. In doing so, neglect magnetic flux inside the wires.

2. A square wire frame with side a and a straight conductor carrying a constant current I0 are
located in same plane. The inductance and the resistance of the frame are equal to L and R
respectively. The frame was turned through 180° about the axis OO’ separated from the current
carrying conductor by a distance b . Find the electric charge having flown through the frame.

3. Two inductors of self inductances L1 and L2 and of resistances R1 and R2 (not shown here)
respectively, are connected in the circuit as shown in the figure. At the instant t=-0, key K is closed,
obtain expression for which the galvanometer will show zero deflection at all times after the key is
closed.

4. In the circuit shown emf E, a resistance R and coil inductances L1 , and L2 are known. The
internal resistance of the source and the coil are negligible. Find the steady state currents in the
coils after switch S was shorted.

5. In the figure shown if, I1  10e 2t A, I 2 = 4 A and Vc  3e 2 tV , then

a) calculate the current and voltage, I L , and VL , across L as a function of t.
(b) calculate Vac ,Vab and Vcd as function of t. Show the variation of I L , VL , Vac Vab and Vcd , with t
.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 199

physics Classwork Problem

6. The switch in figure is open for t < 0 and then close at time t = 0. Find the current in the inductor
and the current in the switch as functions of time thereafter.

7. In the circuit shown, the switch S is closed at time t=0. Find the current through capacitor and
inductor at time t.

8. In the following circuit the switch is closed at t = 0. Intially there is no current in inductor. Find
out current the inductor coil as a function of time.

9. A coil of inductance 1 H and resistance 10  is connected to a resistance less battery of emf 50 V

at time t = 0. Calculate the ratio of the rate at which magnetic energy is stored in the coil to the rate
at which energy is supplied by the battery at t = 0.1 sec.
10. An inductance L and a resistance R are connected in series with a battery of emf E. Find the
maximum rate at which the energy is stored in the magnetic field.
11. A circuit containing a two position switch S is shown in figure.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 200

physics Classwork Problem

(a) The switch S is in position 1. Find the potential difference VA  VB and the rate of
production of joule heat in R1 .
(b) If now the switch S is put in position 2 at t -=0. Find:
(i) steady current in R4 and
(ii) the time when current in R4 is half the steady value. Also calculate the energy stored in the
inductor L at that time.

12. A loop is formed by two parallel conductors connected by a solenoid with inductance L and a
conducting rod of mass m which can freely (without friction) slide over the conductors. The
conductors are located in a horizontal plane in a uniform vertical magnetic field B . The distance
between the conductors is l . At the moment t = 0, the rod is imparted an initial velocity V0 directed
to the right. Find the law of its motion x  t  if the electric resistance of the loop is negligible.

13. Two inductors having self inductances L1 and L2 , are connected in parallel as shown in figure
(a). The mutual inductance between the two inductors is M. Determine the equivalent self
inductance Leq for the system as shown in figure (b)

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 201

physics Classwork Problem
14. Two insulated wires are wound on the same hollow cylinder, so as to form two solenoids
sharing a common air-filled core. Let I be the length of the core, A the cross-sectional area of the
core, N1 the number of times the first wire is wound around the core, and N 2 the number of turns
the second wire is wound around the core. Find the mutual inductance of the two solenoids,
neglecting the end effects.
15. Find the mutual inductance of two concentric coils of radii a1 , and a2  a1  a2  if the planes
of coils are same.

16. Solve the above question, if the planes of coil are perpendicular.
17. Solve the above problem if the planes coils make  angle with each other.
18. Find the mutual inductance two rectangular loop shown in the figure

19. Figure shows two concentric coplanar coils with radii a and b  a  b  . A current i  2t
flows in the smaller loop. Neglecting self inductance of larger loop
(a) Find the mutual inductance of the two coils
(b) Find the emf induced in the larger coil
(c) If the resistance of the larger loop is R find the current in it as a function of time

20. A capacitor of capacitance 25  F is charged to 300 V. It is then connected across a 10 mH

inductor. The resistance in the circuit is negligible.
(a) Find the frequency of oscillation of the circuit.
(b) Find the potential difference across capacitor and magnitude of circuit current 1.2 ms after
the inductor and capacitor are connected.
(c) Find the magnetic energy and electric energy at t = 0 and t =1.2 ms,
21. An inductor of inductance 2 mH is connected across a charged capacitor of capacitance 5  F
and the resulting LC circuit is set oscillating at its natural frequency. Let Q denote the instantaneous
charge on the capacitor and I the current in the circuit. It is found that the maximum value of Q is
200  C .
dI
(a) When Q = 100  C , what is the value of ?
dt
(b) When Q = 200  C , what is the value of I ?
(c) Find the maximum value of I

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 202

physics Classwork Problem
(d) When I is equal to one-half its maximum value, what is the value of Q ?
 
22. If the current in an ac circuit is represented by the equation, I  5sin  300t   , where, t
 4
is in second and I in ampere. Calculate the
(a) peak and r.m.s. value of current.
(b) frequency of ac.
(c) average current for the half cycle.
23. Find the average value of current shown graphically, from t = 0 to t = 2 sec.

24. Show graphically that the average of sinusoidally varying current in half cycle may not be
zero .
  3
25. Find the rms value of current i  I m sin t from (i) t = 0 to t  (ii) t  to t 
 2 2
26. Find the effective value of current i  2sin100 t  2cos 100 t  30  .
27. In the series circuit of fig, suppose R  300, L  60mH,C=0.50 F source amplitude is
E0  50V and  = 10,000 rad/s. Find the reactances X L and X C , the impedance Z , the current
amplitude the phase angle  , and the voltage amplitude across each circuit element.

28. A series LCR circuit containing a resistance of 120  has angular frequency 4  105 rads 1 . At
resonance the voltages across resistance and inductance are 60 V and 40 V respectively. Find the

values of L and C. At what angular frequency the current in the circuit lags the voltage by .
4
29. A resistance and inductance are connected in series across a voltage, V  283sin  314t  . The
 
current is found to be I=4sin  314t   . Find the values of the inductance and resistance.
 4
30. An AC source with Vmax  205V and f  50 Hz is connected between points a and d having a
resistance of R  40  , inductance of L = 185mH and a capacitance of C = 65  F as shown in
figure. Calculate the maximum voltages between points (a) a and b, (b) b and c, (c) c and d , and (d)
b and d . A power supply with Vmax  120V is connected between points a and d in figure. At
what frequency will it deliver a power of 250 W ?

31. A series LCR circuit with L= 0.12 H, C = 480 nF and R = 23  is connected to a 230-V variable
frequency supply.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 203

physics Classwork Problem
i. What is the source frequency for which current amplitude is maximum? Find this maximum
value.
ii. What is the source frequency for which average power absorbed by circuit is maximum?
Obtain the value of maximum power.
iii. For which frequencies of the source is the power transferred for the circuit half the power at
resonant frequency?
iv. What is the Q-factor of the circuit?
32. For the circuit shown in figure, find the instantaneous current through each element. Also find
the total instantaneous current through the source, and find expressions for phase angle of this
current and the impedence of the circuit.

33. In the given arrangement the square loop of are 10 cm 2 ' rotates with an angular velocity 
about it diagonal. The loop is connected to a inductance L = 100 mH. I and a capacitance of 10 mF
in series. The lead wires have a net resistance of 10  Given that B = 0.1 T and   63 rads 1 , find
the
(a) r.m.s. current
(b) energy dissipated in 50 sec.
(c) if the current is in phase with voltage, what should be the frequency of rotation of the coil.

34. An LCR series circuit with 100  resistance is connected to an ac source of 200 V and angular
frequency 300 rads 1 . When only the capacitance is removed, the current lags behind the voltage
by 60°. When only the inductance is removed, the current leads the current leads the voltage by 60°
. Calculate the current and the power dissipated in the LCR circuit.
35. A 750 Hz, 20 V source is connected to a resistance of 100  , an inductance of 180 mH and a
capacitance of 10  F all in series. Calculate the time in which the resistance having a thermal
capacity 2J C 1 , will get heated by 10 °C .
36. A resistor R, inductor L, and capacitor C are connected in series to an AC source of rms voltage
V and variable frequency. Find the energy that is delivered to the circuit during one period if the
operating frequency is twice the resonance frequency.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 204

physics Classwork Problem

36. Modern Physics

Photon
1. A source of light of power P is shown in Fig. Find the force on the block placed in the path of the light rays.
The surface of body on which light beam is incident is having a reflection coefficient a r  0.7 and absorption
coefficient a a  0.3
Black Body

M
P watt
Light source

2. (a) How many photons of a radiation of wavelength   5  10 7 m must fall per second on a blackened plate
in order to produce a force of 6.62  10 5 N ?
(b) At what rate will temperature of plate rise if its mass is 19.86 kg and specific heat is equal to 2500 J
 kg K 1  .
3. Calculate force exerted by a light beam on a surface if light is incident on the surface at an angle  as
shown in fig. Consider all cases of absorption and reflection.


4. A plank of mass ‘m’ is lying on a rough surface having coefficient of friction as in situation as shown in Fig.
Find the acceleration of the plank assuming that it slips and surface of body exposed to radiation is black body.
I = intensity of
radiation


a
5. In the path of a uniform light beam of large cross-sectional area and intensity I, a solid sphere of radius R
which is perfectly reflecting is placed. Find the force exerted on this sphere due to the light beam.
6. A toy truck has dimensions as shown in Fig. and its width, normal to the plane of this paper, is d. Sun rays
are incident on it as shown in the figure. If intensity of rays is I and all surfaces of truck are perfectly black,
calculate tension in the thread used to keep the truck stationary. Neglect friction.

b
h

Thread

7. Obtain the de-Broglie wavelength associated with thermal neutrons at room temperature (27 °C). Hence
explain why a fast neutron beam needs to be thermalised with the environment before it can be used for
neutron diffraction experiments.
8. An electron and a photon have the same de Broglie wavelength. Which one of these has higher kinetic
energy?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 205

physics Classwork Problem
9. A photon and an electron have got the same de Broglie wavelength. Which has greater total energy?
Explain.
10. A monochromatic light source of frequency illuminates a metallic surface and ejects photoelectrons. The
photo electrons having maximum energy are just able to ionize the hydrogen atoms in ground state. When the
5
entire experiment is repeated with an incident radiation of frequency f , the photoelectrons so emitted are
6

able to excite the hydrogen atom beam which then emits at radiation of wavelength 1215 A .
(a) What is the frequency of radiation. (b) Find the work function of the metal.
11. In a photoelectric effect set-up, a point source of light of power 3.2  103 W emits mono energetic photons
of energy 5 eV . The source is located at a distance of 0.8 m from the centre of a stationary metallic sphere of
work function 3 eV and of radius 8  l03 m . The efficiency of photoelectron emission is one for every 10 6
incident photons. Assume that the sphere is isolated and electrons are instantly swept away after emission.
(a) Calculate the number of photoelectrons emitted per second.
(b) Find the ratio of the wavelength of incident light to the de Broglie wavelength of the fastest
photoelectrons emitted.
(c) It is observed that the photoelectron emission stops at a certain time t after the light source is
switched on. Why?
(d) Evaluate the time t.
12. A mercury lamp is a convenient source for studying frequency dependence of photoelectric emission since
it gives a number of spectral lines ranging from the UV to the red end of the visible spectrum. In our
experiment with rubidium photocell, the following lines from a mercury source were used:
    
1  3650A,  2  4047A, 3  4358A,  4  5461A and 5  6907A
The stopping voltages, respectively, were measured to I
 1  1.28 V,  2  0.95 V,  3  0.74 V,  4  0.16 V, and  5  0 V .
a. Determine the value of Planck’s constant h.
b. Estimate the threshold frequency and work function for the material.

13. Ultraviolet light of wavelengths 800 A and

700 A when allowed to fall on hydrogen atoms in their ground states is found to liberate electrons with
kinetic energies 1.8 eV and 4.0 eV, respectively. Find the value of Planck’s constant.

X-Rays

1. In Fig., find which is K  and K ?

2
1
I

1 2 

Atomic Physics
1. Consider energy level diagram of a hydrogen atom. How will the kinetic energy and potential energy of
electron vary if the electron moves from a lower level to a higher level?
2. Suppose potential energy between electron and proton at separation r is given by U = k log r, where k is a
constant. For such a hypothetical hydrogen atom, calculate the radius of nth Bohr’s orbit and its energy levels.
3. An electron is orbiting in a circular orbit of radius r under the influence of a constant magnetic field of
strength

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 206

physics Classwork Problem
B. Assuming that Bohr's postulate regarding the quantisation of angular momentum holds good for this
electron, find
(a) the allowed values of the radius r of the orbit.
(b) the kinetic energy of the electron in orbit.
(c) the potential energy of interaction between the magnetic moment of the orbital current due to the
electron moving in its orbit and the magnetic field B .
(d) the total energy of the allowed energy levels.
(e) the total magnetic flux due to the magnetic field B passing through the nth orbit
(Assume that the charge on the electron is -e and the mass of the electron is m).
4. Find the quantum number n corresponding to excited state of He ion if on transition to the ground state,
the ion emits two photons in succession with wavelengths 108.5 nm and 30.4 nm. The ionization energy of H
atom is 13.6 eV.
5. A neutron which is going to collide head on to a stationary H atom has initial kinetic energy of 24.5 eV.
Discuss different possibilities of collision.
6. A He ion is at rest and is in ground state. A neutron with initial kinetic energy K collides head on with the
He ion. Find minimum value of K so that there can be an inelastic collision between these two particles.
m 4m
n K He

7. A neutron with energy of 4.6 MeV collides elastically with protons and is retarded. Assuming that upon
each collision the neutron is deflected by 45°, find the number of collisions which will reduce its energy to
0.23 eV.
8. A hydrogen atom is in third excited state. It makes a transition to a different state and a photon is either
absorbed or emitted. Determine the quantum number nf of the final state and the energy of the photon if it is
a. emitted with the shortest possible wavelength,
b. emitted with the longest possible wavelength, and
c. absorbed with the longest possible wavelength.
9. . A moon is an unstable elementary particle hose mass is 207m e and whose charge is either +e or -e. A
negative muon     can be captured by a hydrogen nucleus proton) to form a muonic atom.
a. Find the radius of the first Bohr orbit of this atom. b. Find the ionization energy of the atom.
10. The nucleus of a deuterium has a mass a mass of 3.34  1027 kg as compared to 1.67  1027 kg for the
hydrogen. Calculate the wavelength difference between the first Balmer line emitted by hydrogen and the first
Balmer line emitted by deuterium. Given that the mass of electron is me  9.109  1031 kg .
11. An electron in the ground state of hydrogen atom is revolving in anticlockwise direction in a circular orbit
of radius R (Fig.).

n̂ B

30 R

(i) Obtain an expression for the orbital magnetic dipole moment of the electron,

ii) The atom is placed in a uniform magnetic induction B such that the plane normal to the electron orbit
makes at angle of 30° with the magnetic induction. Find the torque experienced by the orbiting electron.
Nuclear Physics
1. The most abundant isotope of helium has a , 42 H nucleus whose mass is 6.6447 1027 kg . For this nucleus,
4
find (a) the mass defect and (b) the binding energy. Given: Mass of the electron: mp  5.485799  10 u , mass of
the proton: mp  1.007276 u and mass of the neutron: m n  1.008 665 u .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 207

physics Classwork Problem
2. The nucleus of the deuterium atom, called the deuteron, consists of a proton and a neutron. Calculate the
deuteron’s binding energy, given atomic mass, i.e., the mass of a deuterium nucleus plus an electron is
measured to be 2.014 102 u.
3. A neutron with kinetic energy K = 10 MeV activates a nuclear reaction n  12 C  9 Be   . Find the kinetic
energy of the alpha particles outgoing at right angle to the direction of incoming neutrons. Take u = 931.5 MeV
and threshold energy of reaction  Eth   6.17 MeV .
4. Consider a collision between two particle one of which is at rest and the other strikes it head on with
momentum p 1 . Calculate the energy of reaction Q in terms of the kinetic energy of the particles before and
after they collide.
5. A nucleus X-initially at rest, undergoes alpha-decay, according to the equation
A 228
92 X z Y
(a) Find the value of A and z in the above process.
(b) The  -particle in the above process is found to move in a circular track of radius 1.1  10 2 m in a uniform
magnetic field of 3  103 T . Find the energy (in MeV) released during the process and binding energy of the
parent nucleus X .
Given: my  228.03amu m   4.003amu
m  n   1.009 amu
1
0 m  H   1.008 aum
1
1

1amu  1.66  1027 kg  931.5MeVc2

238 234
6.The atomic mass of uranium 92 U is 238.0508 u, that of thorium 90 Th is 234.0436 u and that of' an alpha
238 234
particle 42 He is 4.0026 u. Determine the energy released when a-decay converts 92 U into 90 Th .
238
7. Refer to illustration 5.10, the energy released by the  -decay of 92 U is found to be 4.3 MeV. Since this
234
energy is carried away as kinetic energy of the recoiling Th nucleus and the  -particle, it follows that
90
KE Th  KE   4.3 MeV . However, KE Th and KE  are not equal. Which particle carries away more kinetic
234
energy, the 90 Th nucleus or the  -particle?
8.Consider the beta decay
198
Au  198 Hg *    v
l98
Where Hg * represents a mercury nucleus in an excited state at energy 1.088 MeV above the ground state.
What can be the maximum kinetic energy of the electron emitted? The atomic mass of 198 Au is 197.968233 u
and that of 198 Hg is 197.966760 u.
9. Neon - 23 beta decays in the following way:
23 23 0
10 Ne 11 Na  1 e  v

Find the minimum and maximum kinetic energy that the beta particle can have. The atomic masses of 23 Ne
and 23 Na are 22.9945 u and 22.9898 u, respectively.
226
10. What is the wavelength of the 0.186 MeV  -ray photon emitted by radium 88 Ra ?
11. In the above discussion, suppose there are 3.0  10 radon atoms ( T1/2  3.83 days or 3.31  10 5 s trapped in a
7

basement, (a) How many radon atoms remain after 31 days? Find the activity (b) just after the basement is
sealed against further entry of radon and (c) 31 days later.
12. In the chemical analysis of a rock the mass ratio of two radioactive isotopes is found to be 100 :1. The
mean lives of the two isotopes are 4  10 9 years and 2  10 9 years respectively. If it is assumed that at the time
of formation the atoms of both the isotopes were in equal proportional, calculate the age of the rock. Ratio of
the atomic weights of the two isotopes is 1.02:1.
13. A radioactive nucleus X decays to a nucleus  with a decay constant x  0.1 s1 .  further decays to a
1 1
stable nucleus Z with a decay constant  Y  s . Initially there are only X nuclei and their number is
30

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 208

physics Classwork Problem
N 0  10 20 Setup the rate equations for the populations of X,  and Z . The population of the  nucleus as a
 N  
 
function of time is given by N   t    0 X  exp    t   exp   X t 
  x    
Find the time at which N is maximum and determine the population of X and Z at that instant.
14. Consider a radioactive disintegration according to the equation A  B  C . Decay constant of A and B is
same and equal to  . Number of nuclei of A, B and C are N 0 , 0, 0 respectively at t = 0 . Find
(a) Number of nuclei of B as function of time t.
(b) Time t at which the activity of B is maximum and the value of maximum activity of B .
15. A bottle of red wine is thought to have been sealed about 5 years ago. The wine contains a number of
different kinds of atoms, including carbon, oxygen and hydrogen. Each of these has a radioactive isotope. The
radio-active isotope of carbon is the familiar 14
6 C , with a half-life of 9730 years. The radioactive isotope of

oxygen is 15 3
8 O and has a half-life of 122.2 s. The radioactive isotope of hydrogen is 1 H and is called tritium; its
half-life is 12.33 years. The activity of each of these isotopes is known at the time the bottle was sealed.
However, only one of the isotopes is useful for determining the age of the wine accurately. Which is it?

16. Nuclei of radioactive element A are being reduced at a constant rate  . The element has a decay constant
 . At time t = 0, there are N 0 nuclei of the element.
a. Calculate the number N of nuclei of A at time t.
b. If   2N 0  , calculate the number of nuclei of A after one half-life time of A and also the limiting value of N
at t 
17. The mean lives of a radioactive substance are 1620 years and 405 years for  -emission and  -emission,
respectively. Find out the time during which three-fourth of a sample will decay if it is decaying both by  -
emission and  emission simultaneously.
18. A proton is bombarded on a stationary lithium nucleus. As a result of the collision two  particles are
produced. If the direction of motion of the  particles with the initial direction of motion makes an angle
1
cos1   find the kinetic energy of the striking proton. Given binding energies per nucleon of Li 7 and He 4 are
4
5.60 and 7.06 MeV respectively. (Assume mass of proton  mass of neutron).
19. Polonium  210 84 Po 
emits 42 H particles and is converted into lead  206
82 Pb 
. This reaction is used for
producing electric power in a space mission. Po 210 has half life of 138.6 days. Assuming an efficiency of 10%
for the thermoelectric machine, how much 210 Po is required to produce 1.2  107 J of electric energy per day at
the end of 693 days. Also find the initial activity of the material.
Given: Masses of nuclei
210 4
Po = 209.98264 amu , 206 Pb = 205.97440 amu, 2 H = 4.00260 amu . 1 amu = 931 MeV and
23 1
Avogadro number  6  10 mol
20. A deuterium reaction that occurs in an experimental fusion reactor is in two stages:
(i) Two deuterium  21 D  nuclei fuse together to form a tritium nucleus, with a proton as a by product written
as D  D, p  T .
(ii) A tritium nucleus fuses with another deuterium nucleus to form a helium 42 He nucleus with neutron as a
byproduct, written as T  D, n  42 He . Compute (a) the energy released in each of the two stages,
(b) the energy released in the combined reaction per deuterium. (c) What percentage of the mass energy of
the initial Deuterium is released. Given,
2 3 4 1
1 D  2.014102 a.m.u . 1T  3.016049 2 He  4.002603a.m.u . 1 H  1.007825 a.m.u.
1
0 n  1.00665 a.m.u.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 209

physics Classwork Problem
Diodes
1. Assume that the silicon diode in the circuit shown in Fig. requires aminimum current of 1 mA to be above
the knee point 0.7 V) of its I-V characteristics. Also assume that the voltage across the diode is independent of
current above the knee point.
(a) If VB  5 V , what should be the maximum value of R so that the voltage is above the knee point ?
(b) If VB  5 V , what should he the value of R to establish the current of 5mA in the circuit?
(c) What is the power dissipated in the resistance R and in the diode, whena current of 5mA flows in the
circuit at VB =6 V?
(d) If R  1 k , what is the minimum voltage VB required to keep the diode above the knee point?
0.7 V
R

I min

VB

 eV 
2. In a p-n-junction, the current I can be expressed I  I0 e k T  1
 
where I0 is called the reverse saturation current, V the voltage cross the diode and is positive for forward bias
and negative to reverse bias and I is the current through the diode, k is the Boltzmann’s constant
 8.6  10 5 eV K 1  and T is the absolute temperature. If for a diode, I0  5 1012 and T = 300 K, then
(a) what will be the forward current at a forward voltage is 0.6 V?
(b) what will be the increase in the current, if the voltage across the diode is increased to 0.7 V ?
(c) what is the dynamic resistance ?
(d) what will be the current if the reverse bias voltage changes from 1V to 2 V ?
3. The circuit shown in Fig. contains two diodes, each with a forward resistance of 50  and with infinite
backward resistance. If the battery voltage is 6 V, find the current through the 100  resistance.
D1 R1  150 

D2 R 2  50 

R3  100

6V
4. . In the circuit shown in Fig., a zener diode of voltage Vz   6 V  is used to maintain a constant voltage
across a load resistance R L   1, 000   by using a series resistance R   100   . If the e.m.f. of source (E) is 9
V, calculate the value of current through series resistance, zener diode and load resistance. What is the power
being dissipated in zener diode?
I R IL
Iz
E RL
Vz

5. What is the input voltage needed to maintain 15 V across the load resistance R L of 2 k  , assuming that the
series resistance R is 200  and the zener diode requires a minimum current of 10 mA to work satisfactorily
(Fig.. What is the zener rating required?

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 210

physics Classwork Problem

R I IL
Vin VL
Iz

Vz RL

Transistor
1. A transistor is used in common-emitter mode in an amplifier circuit. When a signal of 24 mV is added to the
base-emitter voltage, the base current changes by 32 A and collector current by 3.6 mA. The load resistance is
4.8 k  . Calculate (i) the current gain  (ii) the input resistance Rbe (iii) the transconductance gm and (iv)
voltage gain A  .
2. In the circuit shown in Fig. the value of  is 100. Find Ib ,Vce .Vbe and Vce when Ic  1.5 mA. Is the transistor in
active, cut off or a saturation state?

3. A n-p-n transistor is connected in common emitter configuration in which collector supplies 8 V and the
voltage drop across the load resistance of 800  connected in the collector circuit is 0.8 V. If current
amplification factor  is 25/26 , determine collector- emitter voltage and base current. If the input resistance
of the transistor is 200  , calculate the voltage gain and power gain.
4. All India Radiobroadcasts at 710kcps. Whereas BBC broadcasts at 1380 kcps on the same medium wave
band. For changing over from All India Radio to BBC, the capacitance of the variable capacitor has to be
decreased. Give reasons in support of your answer.

Communication System
1. What should be the length of the dipole antenna for a carrier wave of frequency 3  10 8 Hz?
2. The height of transmitting antenna is 32 m and that of the receiving antenna is 50 m. What should be the
maximum distance between the two antennas for a satisfactory line of sight communication between them ?
Given that the radius of the earth is 64x106 m
3. A TV tower has a height of 400 m at a given place. Calculate its coverage range, if the radius of the earth is
6,400 km.
4. A message signal of frequency 15 kHz and peak voltage of 6 V is used to modulate a carrier of
frequency 1 MHz and peak voltage of 10 V. Find (a) the modulation index and (b) the side bands produced.
5. (a) Wire pairs provide one means of communication but they are subject to high levels of noise and
attenuation. Explain what is meant by (i) noise, (it) attenuation.
(b) A microphone is connected to a receiver using a wire pair, as shown in fig. The wire pair has an
attenuation per unit length of 12 dB km-1. The noise power in the wire pair is 3.4×10-9 W . The microphone
produces a signal power of 2.9μW . (i) Calculate the maximum length of the wire pair so that the minimum
signal-to-noise ratio is 24 dB. (it) Communication over distances greater than that calculated in (i) is required.
Suggest how the circuit of fig. may be modified, so that the minimum signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is not
reduced.

6. Many television receivers are connected to an aerial using a coaxial cable. Such a cable is shown in fig.
(a) State two functions of the copper braid.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 211

physics Classwork Problem
(b) Suggest two reasons why a coaxial cable is used, rather than a wire pair, to connect the aerial to the
receiver.
(c) A coaxial cable has an attenuation per unit length of dB km-1.
The length of the co-axial cable between an aerial and the receiver is 12 m.

7. A signal is to be transmitted along a cable system of total length 125 km. The cable has an attenuation of 7
dB km-1. Amplifiers, each having a gain of 43 dB, are placed at 6 km intervals along the cable as shown in fig
(a) State what is meant by the attenuation of a signal.
(b) Calculate (i) the total attenuation caused by the transmission of the signal along the cable, (ii) the total
signal gain as a result of amplification by all of the amplifiers along the cable.
(c) The input signal has a power of 450 mW. Use your answers in (b) to calculate the output power of the
signal as it leaves the cable system.

8. (a) Cable television uses optic fibres for the transmission of signals. Suggest four advantages of optic fibres
over coaxial cables for the transmission of data.
b) Electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 1,310 nm is frequently used for optic fibre communication, rather
than visible light, (i) State the region of the electromagnetic spectrum in which radiation of wavelength 1,310
nm is found. (ii) Suggest why this radiation is used, rather than visible light.
(c) An optic fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 0.2 dB km-1. A signal is transmitted along the optic fibre
of length 30 km to a receiver. The noise power at the receiver is 9.3 W .The minimum acceptable signal-to-
noise ratio at the receiver is 26 dB. Calculate (t) the minimum signal power at
the receiver, (ft) the minimum input signal power to the optic fibre.
9 (a) Optic fibre transmission has, in some instances, replaced transmission using co-axial cables and wire
pairs. Optic fibers have negligible cross-talk and are less noisy than co-axial cables. Explain what is meant by
(i) cross-talk, (ii) noise.
(b) An optic fibre has a signal attenuation of 0.20 db. The input signal to the optic fibre has a power of 26 mW.
The receiver at the output of the fibre has a noise power of 6.5 W . Calculate the maximum uninterrupted
length of optic fibre given that the signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver
must not be less than 30 dB.
10. The E-layer of the ionosphere disappears night. Why ?
11. At night, the E-layer of the ionosphere disappears, but the F-layer persists. Why ?

Digital Electronics
1. Show that the following Boolean identities are true:
(a) A.B  B.C  A.C  A.B  B.C
 
(b)  A  B  . A  C  A.C  A.B
2. Write the truth table for the combination shown

3. Produce the truth table for the combination shown and hence show that it behaves as XOR gate.

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 212

physics Classwork Problem

4. The circuit symbol of a logic gate and two input waveforms A and B are shown. Name the logic gate, write its
truth table and give the output waveform.

5. Using De Morgan's theorem, prove that the logic circuits given are equivalent.

6. Shaw that A.B  B.C  C.A  A.B  B.C  C.A

7. Express the following distributive laws for OR and AND operations by making use of the symbols for OR and
AND gates.
(a) A  B. C   A  B ).( A  C 
(b) A. B  C   A. B  A.C
8. Write the Boolean expression and the truth table

9. For the logic circuit shown, predict the outputs y1 , y2 , Y1 , Y2 and Y .

(b) An input signal shown is fed to the logic circuit .Draw the waveforms for the outputs y1 , y2 , Y1 , Y2 and Y .

Sparkwiz Academy Private Limited ©All Right Reserved Page 213